v

a.

UBRAKY

v.

PATI
Call No.

This
date

last

rate of

book should be returned on or before

marked below or fines will be levied at

DEC

t 2

SEP

2 S

1968

NOV1W

2 SEP 1970
1

the

06 Ps. per day.

T. T. D. Press

the

5 NOV -.1977

C. 10,0001-7-67.

SANSKRIT

GRAMMAR

FOR STUDENTS

A SANSKRIT GRAMMAR
FOE STUDENTS

BY ARTHUR

A.

MACDONELL

M.A., PH.D., LL.D.(Edin.), D.O.L. (Calcutta)

Boden Professor of Sanskrit in the University
of Oxford ; Hon. Fellow of Corpus Christ! College j

late

Fellow of the British

Academy

THIRD EDITION

OXFOBD UNIVERSITY PRESS

5.V.O. Co

likranj

TIRUP1II.
Ace.

**

PKEFACE TO THIRD EDITION

IN preparing a

new

correction to

misprints requiring

The

alterations that

edition of this

grammar

have found

be few and insignificant.

seemed necessary are nearly

all

concerned

with facilitating the use of the book for students.

these

is

the indication of the relevant

number

paragraph on the inside top corner of each page.

and

Since the

intended to supply a complete account of Classical

grammar

is

Sanskrit,

many paragraphs may be omitted

I therefore here append a

of study.

One of

of chapter

essential for absolute beginners

list

till

a later stage

of those

which are

and thus constitute a virtual

primer of Classical Sanskrit.

I: 1-7, 8-12, 13.

42-44, 45,

87i9

97

i,

i. a,

II:

52-55, 65, 67.

i,

Bv

]6-22, 27, 30-34, 36 A.

37, 38, 40,

Ill: 70, 71, 73, 74, 77, 85,

IOT D(p. 63), 103,

i,

2,

109-111, 120.

IV; 121-128, 131, 132 (only Pres. Par., pp. 92, 98), 135, 136,
i

138,

(only Jtud., Par.), 141 a (only Par.), 143,

(only Par.),

147 (only Par.), 148 (only a<lam\ 151 (only Par.), 154 (only
Pres.), 156, 160,

When

i, 2,

162, 163, 167, 168, 165, 172, 173.

the student has gone through these paragraphs he

be quite prepared to begin reading.

will

matical forms he

now meets with he

Any new gram-

will be able to find

explained in the paragraphs that have been passed over.

this

way
word

every

In

he will understand, with the aid of a

vocabulary,
in the first canto of the Story
of Jfdla within the

course of a month,

and know

reading easy Sanskrit texts.

all

the

grammar necessary

for

PREFACE TO THIRD EDITION

vi

Since the appearance of the second edition of this

(1911) ray

Though

Ved'ic

this

Gmmnarfor

new book seemed

Students was published (1916).

at first sight to

III superfluous in the present

work

to retain it as presenting Vedic

grammar

and rendering

it

make Appendix

(pp, 236-44), I decided

in

an abridged form

easier for absolute beginuers to master,

A.
20 BARDWSLL ROAD,
OXFORD,
r,

work

1926,

A.M.

PREFACE TO SECOND EDITION

THE

original form of. the present

(1886) of

Max

Sanskrit

Miiller's

work was

my

abridgement

Grammar (2nd

ed.,

1870).

That abridgement was the outcome of what I had found by

experience, both as a learner and a teacher, to be unessential in

an elementary grammar.

It

was

also partly

due to

my

con-

grammars, being too much

dominated by the system of Panini, rendered Sanskrit unThe introductory sketch of the
necessarily hard to learn.
viction that the
existing Sanskrit

history of Sanskrit

grammar

prefixed to the present rolume

show that the native Indian system

incompatible with the practical methods of teaching and

will, I think, sufficiently

is

learning in the "West,

In the
earlier

first

grammar, published in 1901, the

transformed into an entirely new work.

edition of this

book was

Though, on the whole, considerably enlarged

For I made

it

showed many

my guiding principle to leave out

found exclusively in Vedic literature or in
the Hindu grammarians, the aim I had in view being to
omissions,

all

matter tbat

it

is

describe only such grammatical forms as are to be

in the actual literature of post-Vedic Sanskrit.

met with

The student

grammar would thus not be burdened with matter

which could never be of any practical use to him. Hence
of Sanskrit

I refrained from employing, even in a paradigm, any word

not to be found in the literature; though for the sake
of completeness I here often gave inflected forma represented

only by other words of the same type.

book, then,

was not

mainly useful

for

to

The purpose of the

supply a mass of forms and rules

answering examination questions more or

PREFACE TO SECOND EDITION

viii

mechanically, bat to provide the student with the full

grammatical equipment necessary for reading any Sanskrit text
with ease and exactness.

less

The present edition has undergone a thorough revision aided

by the experience of ten more years' teaching and by the suggesThe
tions of pupila and others who have used the first edition.
improvements chiefly consist of additions, which have increased
the size of the book by twenty-four pages.

An entirely new portion

sections comprised in pages

grammar are the

159-168. The first (182)
of the

three
deals

with nominal stem formation, giving an account of the primary

and secondary suffixes, and thus furnishing the student with
a more complete insight into the structure of Sanskrit words
than the first edition supplied. lu connexion with these suffixes

a surrey (183) of the rules of gender is added. The third new

section (184) describes the formation of verbal compounds.

The most noticeable case

of expansion

is

otherwise to be found

in the rules about t&e treatment of final dental

these

now

in Sandhi

give a complete account

(36, 40) of the changes

undergone by that letter. In the accidence a few new paradigms
have been introduced, sueh as grdvan
(90, 4), and additional
forms have been given, as ni the difficult s-aorist of dah, where
I
*v n middle forms, though not occurring in that verb, are
( 44i 5)

supplied as a model for other verbs presenting similar difficulties

of euphonic combination^
Other improvements are intended to

the use of the grammar. Thus in the list of verbs

(Appendix I) abbreviations have been added to indicate the
varioo* forms which beginners have otherwise often found

lacilitate

difficulty in identifying.

Again, the Sanskrit Index has been

and more eixplanatory (see e.g. prakrta). A

decidedly practical improvement is the substitution of a brief
flympgb of the sulrject-matter far an elaborate table of contents
at thft beginning, and the addition of a General Index at the

made both

fuller

PREFACE TO SECOND EDITION

ix

All these extensions and changes will, I feel sure, he

end.
found to have considerably increased the practical value of the
grammar both in matter and form.

As in the first edition, the book is transliterated throughout,

excepting the list of verbs (Appendix I) and the syntactical
examples at the end (180
190-218). The system of transliteration remains the same, being that which is now most
;

generally adopted in the West. This system includes the use of

r (to be pronounced with a syllabic value, as the r in French

chambre) to represent the weak grade of the syllables ar and ra.

The improvements appearing in this edition are largely due

to the suggestions of former pupils or of friends. The gentlemen
to whom I owe thanks for their advice are
Prof, E. J. Eapson ;
Dr. James Morison; Mr. M. L. Puri, B.A., of Exeter College;
Mr. Horace Hart, M.A., Controller of the University Press; and
especially Mr, T. E. Moir, I.C.S., of Wadham College, as well as Dr.
F. W. Thomas, Librarian of the India Office. Mr. J. C. Pembrey,

Hon. M.A., Oriental Reader of the University Press, has read

with his usual care the proofs of this edition, which is separated

by no less an interval than sixty-four years from the first Sanskrit

Grammar which he (together with his father) corrected for the

H.H.Wilson, in 1847. T <> Dr. A. B. Keith

indebted for reading the proofs of this as well as of all the
other books I have published since 1900.
I must take this
opportunity of thanking him not only for having read the proofs

press, that of Prof.

am

Grammar, but also for having passed

work through the press for me during my
India between September, 1907, and April, 1908.

of the whole of

my

Vedic

several sheets of that

absence in

A. A.
107

BANBUKT EOAD, OXFOBD.

July, 1911.

MACDONBLL.

INTRODUCTION
BRIEF HISTORY OF SANSKRIT GBAMMAR
THE

first

impulse to the study of grammar in India was given

by the religious motive of preserving intact the sacred Vedic texts,

the efficacy of which was believed to require attention to every
Thus, aided by the great transparency of the Sanskrit
language, the ancient Indian grammarians had by the fifth cen-

letter.

tury B.C. arrived at scientific results unequalled by any other

nation of antiquity. It is, for instance, their distinctive achieve-

have recognized that words for the most part consist on

hand of roots, and on the other of affixes, which, when compounded with the former, modify the radical sense in various ways.
The oldest grammar that has been preserved is Panini's. It

ment

to

the one

already represents a fully developed system, its author standing

end of a loiig line of predecessors, of whom no fewer than

at the

sixty-four are mentioned, and the purely grammatical works of

all of whom, owing to the excellence and
comprehensiveness of
his work,

have entirely perished.

is considerably later than Yaska

(probably about
500 B,C.), whom he mentions, and between whom and himself
a good number of important grammarians intervene.
On the

Panini

other hand, Paniiu is much older than his interpreter Patafijali,

who probably dates from the latter half of the second century B. c.,

the two being separated by another eminent grammarian, Katyayana. Pftnini himself uses the word yavanml, which Kiityayana
it

ig

'

writing of the Tavanas (i.e. laones or Greeks). Now

not at all likely that the Indians should have become

explains as

'

acquainted with Greek writing before the invasion of Alexander

in 327 B.C.
But the natives of the extreme north-west, of

whom

Panini in all probability was one, would naturally have

become acquainted with it soon after that date. They must,
howeve^, have grown familiar with it before a grammarian
would make a rule as to how to form from Tavana, 'Greek/

INTRODUCTION

xi

a derivative form meaning 'Greek writing \ It seems therefore

hardly possible to place Pan in i earlier than about 300 B.C.
Panini's grammar consists of nearly 4,000 rules divided into
Being composed with the utmost imaginable
eight chapters.
brevity, each Sutra or aphorism usually consists of only two or
three words, and the whole work, if printed continuously iu
medium-sized Devanfigarl type, would not occupy more than
about thirty-five pages of the present volume. And yet this
grammar describes the entire Sanskrit language in all the details
of its structure, with a completeness which has never been equalled
elsewhere. It is at oiice the shortest and fullest grammar in the
world.

In his endeavour to give an exhaustive survey of the bhasa

or classical Sanskrit with a view to correct usage, Panini went
on to include within the scope of his grammar the language of

which was no longer quite intelligible. He

accordingly gives hundreds of rules about the Veda, but without
His account of the Yedic language, taken as a
completeness.
the sacred texts,

whole, thus shows many gap?, important matters being often

omitted, while trifles are noticed. In this part of his work Panini
shows a decided incapacity to master his subject-matter, atlri"

bating to the

Veda the most unbounded grammatical

license,

especially iu interchanging or dropping inflections.

'

The grammar of Panini is a Sabdanuiasana, or Treatise on

Words ', the fundamental principle of which is, that all nouios are
Starting with the simplest elements into
which words can be analysed, root, affix and termination, Panini
shows how nominal and verbal stems are formed from roots and
complete words from stems. He at the same time indicates the
functions which words acquire by the addition of formative
It is a
elements and by being compounded with other words.
peculiarity of Paniui's word-formation, that he recognizes deri*
Thus when a verbal root like bhid, to
vation by suffixes only.
pierce/ is used in the nominal sense of 'piercer', he has recourse
to the highly artificial expedient of assuming an imaginary suffix,
for which a blank is substituted
Yaska records that the universality of Sakal&yana's principle
of nouns being derived from verbs was contested by Gargy&,
who objected to the forced etymologies resulting from a general
derived from verbs.

INTBODTJCTION

xii

Gargya maintained that if aiva,

application of this principle.
horse/ for instance, were derived from ai, 'to travel/ not only
would everything that travels be called aiva, and everything
1

he named after all its activities, but states of being (Ihwva) would
he antecedent to things (which are presupposed by those states).
Panini makes a concession to Gargya's objection by excluding
all words the derivation of which is difficult owing to their form
l

or meaning, as aiva, horse/ go,' cow/ andpun^a/man/ Primary

nouns of this kind had been collected before Panini's time in a
special list, in which they were often forcibly derived from verbal
roots by means of a number of special suffixes. The first of these
suffixes being u 9 technically called un, the whole list of these
formations received the name of un&di (' beginning with tin').

Panini refers to all such words as ready-made stems, the formation

of which does not concern him.
The Unadi list which Panini had before him survives, in a
somewhat modified form, as theTJnSdi Sutra with the commentary

from the thirteenth century JLD.) of UjjvalaIn its extant shape this Sutra contains some late words,
such as dlndra (Lat, denarius), a noun which cannot have come
into use in India much before 100 A.D.
The proper object of Panini's grammar being derivation, he
does not deal with phonetics as such, hut only incidentally as
affecting word-formation, or the combination of words in a

(dating probably
datta.

He therefore does not give general rules of phonetic

change, but since his analyses, unlike those of the Un&di Sutra,
move within the bounds of probability and are generally correct,
being in many cases confirmed by comparative philology, he
actually did discover several phonetic laws. The most important
of these was the
interchange of vowels with their strong grades
sentence.

and vrddhi (cp. iy), which Grimin called ablaut, and

which comparative grammar traces to the original
Indo-European
The other great phonetic discoveries of the Indians
language.
had already been made by Panini's predecessors, the authors of
the original Prfiti&khyas, the phonetic treatises of the Vedic

gwa

schools.

P&nini also treats of the accents of words in derivation and in

the sentence, but with syntax in our sense he does not

deal,

perhaps owing to the simplicity of the sentence in Sanskrit.

INTEODUCTION

xiii

The general plan of Panini's work is as follows : Book i, contains the technical terms of the grammar and its rules of interii. deals with nouns in
composition antf case relations;
pretation;
iii.

teaches

how

suffixes are to

be attached to verbal roots

iv.

and

explain the same process with regard to nominal stems ; vi. and
vii. describe the accent and phonetic changes in the formation of
This general
words, while viii. treats of words in a sentence.
v.

is, however, constantly interrupted by single rules or by

a series of rules, which were added by the author as a result of
progressive grammatical studies, or transferred from their natural
context to their present position in order to economize words.
In formulating his rules, Panini makes it his aim to express
them in as abstract and general a way as possible. In this he

plan

occasionally goes so far as to state a general rule for a single

case; while, on the other hand, he sometimes fails to collect
a number of related phenomena under a single head.

In carrying out the principle of extreme conciseness dominating

grammar, Panini resorts to various devices, such as ellipse of
the verb, the use of the cases in a special technical sense, and the
employment of heading rules (adhikara) which must be supplied
with a number of subordinate rules that follow. By such means
a whole rule can often be expressed by a single word. Thus the
ablative dJtatoh, literally 'after a root ', not only means 'to a root
the following suffixes are attached', but is also an adhikara extending its influence (anuvrtti) over some 540 subsequent aphorisms.
The principle of brevity is, moreover, notably applied in the
invention of technical terms. Those of Panini's terms which are
real words, whether they describe the phenomenon, as sam-dsa,
'compound/ or express a category by an example, as dvi-gu ('twoall borrowed from precow'), 'numeral compound/ are probably
But most of his technical terms are arbitrary groups
decessors.
of letters resembling algebraic symbols. Only a few of these are

his

abbreviations of actual words, as it, 'indicatory letter/ from iti,

'thus.'
Most of them are the result of great deliberation, being
chiefly composed of letters rarely occurring in the language. Thus
the letter I was taken as a symbol of the personal endings of the

verb ; combined with a cerebral t it refers to a primary tense or

mood, but combined with a guttural n it denotes a secondary
tense or mood.
Thus lat, Zi'f, lut let, lot, mean present, perfect,
y

INTRODUCTION

xiv

and imperative respectively ; Ian, lun, lin,

imperfect, aorist, and potential.
Panini's grammar begins with the alphabet arranged on scienTo several of its letters is attached an it or
tific principles.
amtbandha (indicatory letter), by means of which can be formed

future, subjunctive,

convenient contractions (called gratyahara) designating different

groups of letters. The vowels are arranged thus a i w-n, r !"\
e o-n, at au~e.
By means of the indicatory letter at the end of
the group, all the simple vowels can be expressed by ok, the
As the last
simple vowels together with the diphthongs by ac.
letter in Sanskrit is A, written ha-l, the entire alphabet is ex:

it by
pressed by the symbol al (much as if we were to express
and
to
attached
are
also
letters
roots,
suffixes,
az\ Indicatory
words in order to point to certain rules as applicable to them,
thus aiding the memory as well as promoting brevity.
One of
Panini's work has two appendixes, to which it refers.
these "is the Dhaturpatha, or 'List of Verbal Roots', arranged
according to conjugational classes,. the mode of inflexion being
expressed by accents and indicatory letters. A striking fact about
this collection is that of its 2,000 roots (many of which are, however, merely variants of one form) only about 800 have yet been
found in Sanskrit literature, while it omits about fifty Vedic verbs.
The second appendix is the Qana-patha, or 'List of Wordgroups '. Panini gives rules applicable to the whole of a group
by referring tq^ its first word. This collection, which contains
many words occurring in Vedic works only, has been less well
,

'

'

preserved than the Dhatit-patha. The Ganas were metrically

arranged in the G^na-rcUna^mahodcidhi, or 'Ocean of the Gems
Ponini's

a work composed by Vardbamana in 1140 A. D.

work very early acquired a canonical value, and has

of Word-groups

continued, for at least 2,000 years, to be the standard of usage

and the foundation of grammatical studies in Sanskrit. On
account of the frequent obscurity of a work which sacrifices
every consideration to brevity, attempts soon began to be made
to explain it, and, with the advance of grammatical knowledge,
to correct and supplement its roles. Among the earliest attempts
of tbifl kind was the formulation, by unknown authors, of. rules of
interpretation {jpar&kcbd), which. Panini was supposed to have
followed in his grammar, and which are mentioned by his sue*

INTRODUCTION
cessor Katyayana.

collection of

xv

such rules was

made

in the

eighteenth century by Nagoji-bhatta in his Paribhdsendu-^ekhara,

or 'Moon-crest of Interpretative Rules'.
Next we have the Varttikas, or c notes' (from vrtti, explanaof Katyayana, on 1,245, or nearly one-third, of Panini's
tion'),
'

aphorisms. That grammarian belonged to the Deccan, and probably lived in the third century B. c, When Katyayana's criticism
shows him to differ from Panini, an oversight on the part of the
latter is usually to be assumed ; but in estimating the extent of
such oversights, one sbould not leave out of account the fact" ihat
Katyayana lived both later and in a part of India far removed
from that of Panini. Other grammarians made similar notes on
Panini both before and after Katyayana
subsequent to the
latter's time are the numerous grammatical Karikas or comments
in metrical form.
All this critical work was collected by Patafijali in his extemivo
Mahabl&sya, or Great Commentary ', with many supplementary
His discussions take the form of a kind of
notes of bis own.
;

'

and deal with 1,713 rules of Panini. a PataRjali'H work

as has been said, from the latter half of the
dates,
probably
The MaJiabhdpya in its turn was comsecond century B.C.
dialogue,

mented upon in the seventh century by Bhartrhari iu his V&kyapadlya, or Treatise on the Words in a Sentence ', which ia
concerned with the philosophy of grammar, and by Kaiy&ta
probably in the thirteenth century.
About 650 A.D. was composed another commentary on Pfmiux,
'
the Kd&ka Vrtti, or Benares Commentary', the first five bookfl
of
work
the
Baaed
Jayuditya, the last three of V&matia.
being
on a deteriorated text of Panini, it contains some errors, but hits
the merit of conciseness and lucidity.
Though much shorter
'

than the Mahabh&sya, it is particularly valuable as the oldest commentary on Panini that explains every Sutra. The eacum^lvfl that
it gives in illustration are, as a rule, derived from older intera usual practice; oven Pittnftpreters. Such borrowing was
c
jali speaks of stock examples as mfirdhdbhipikta, or conHccnitetT
the
on
head
').
sprinkled
(lit.
'

In the fifteenth century Hamacandra endeavoured

his /V/*'
kriyarkaumudl, or
Moonlight of Method ', to m*ko i'&nim'*
grammar more intelligible by rearranging its mutter iu a iuuro

INTBODTJCTION

xvi

The SiM&nta~kaumucfc

practical way.
Settled Conclusions

or 'Moonlight

oi

in which Bhattoji in tbe seventeenth centur?

in a more natural order, had a siimlai
Sutras
Panioi's
disposed
of
this work, entitled Laghu-fyiddhanla-}
An
aim.
abridgement
'
Varakaumu&i or Short Moonlight (of Settled Conclusions)*, by
to the
introduction
as
a
useful
is
daraja,
commonly employed
belief in the infallibility of Panini,
native system of grammar.
which still prevails among the Pandits, has often led the abovenamed interpreters, from Pataftjali onwards, to give forced
explanations of PSnini's rules.
Other later grammarian?, not belonging to the school of Panintj
',

are on the whole of little importance. While adducing hardly

since
any new material, they are much less complete than Panini,

forms and
they omit whole sections, such as rules about Vedic
aim solely
the accent,
Introducing no new points of view, they
at inventing technical devices, or at presenting their subject in
a more lucid and popular form. Among these non-PSninian

grammarians may be mentioned the names of Candra who flourished about,6go A, D *; the pseudo-S&katayana, who was posterior
to
Vrtti ; and the most important of them,Hemacandra
uncer(twelfth century). The Katanira by J3krva-v&rman (of
tain date), whose terminology has striking affinities with older
works, especially the Prati&khyaa, seems to have been the most
influential of these later grammars. It served as a model for the
standard PfiK grammar of Kaccayana, and the native grammars
of the Dravidians and Tibetans. Vopadeva's Mugdha-bodha, or
'Enlightenment of the Ignorant ', a very technical work dating
from the thirteenth century, has beeo, down to the present day,
the Sanskrit grammar chiefly used in Bengal Lastly, we have
1

theoa

tlw Saraswrti Sutra^ or 'Aphorisms of the Sarasvati Grammar ',

by an unknown author, a work distinguished by lucidity as well
as9 *AFMU1CTJUOOB*
conciseness.

There are, besides, a few works dealing with special departments of the subject, which form contributions of some impoitance
to our knowledge of Sanskrit grammar. The PMp Sutra of
1

Hi* Grammar,

&*&<& (Let&g,
*
>

tix>

C&ndrfi-rydkarnna, has been edited by Prof. Bruno

1902).

See Vicww. Oriental JowitaJ, I& 308-15 ; Wvnternits, GescUicbte der

mc&atat

Litteratttr, H, p, 959.

INTRODUCTION

xvii

gfantanava, composed later than the Mahabhasya, but at a time

when there was still a living knowledge of the ancient accent,
gives rules for the accentuation of nouns, not according to the

method of

Pfinini, but with reference to the finished

does not determine the gender of individual
words, though he treats of feminine suffixes and does not ignore
differences of gender in general, some value attaches to works
dealing with the subject as a whole, especially tp Hemacandra's

analytical

As Panini

word.

LingQrvuiasana, or Treatise on Gender '.

The first Sanskrit grammar ever written by a European was
composed by the German missionary Heinrich Roth, a native of
Augsburg, who died at Agra in 1668, as Superior of the Jesuit
This work was never published, but the
College in that city.
manuscript is still preserved at Rome, There is, however, in
*

Kircher's China Illustrate*, (Amsterdam, 1667), pp. 16263, a

contribution by Both, which contains an account of the Sanskrit
alphabet with five tables in Devanfigari characters (undoubtedly
the earliest specimens of that script to be found in any book
l
printed in Europe) .

The first printed European- 'Sanskrit grammar was that of

Paulinus a Saucto Bartholomaeo, written in Latin and published
at Borne in 1790.
This work was based partly on the. MS.
material left by a German Jesuit missionary named Hanxleden,

who

died in 1732.

The

first scientific

grammar aiming

at com-

It was
pleteness was that of Colebrooke, published in 1805.
followed by that of Carey in 1806. The former work was based
on Panini, the latter on Vopadeva.
The earliest Sanskrit
principles, and therefore of most
influence on the study of Sanskrit at the beginning of the last
The most notable among
century, was that of Wilkins (1808).
his successors have been Bopp, Benfey, and Whitney.
Bopp's

grammar written on Euiopean

grammar was important owing no

philological method.
Benfey was

than to its
combine with the

less to its lucidity

the

first to

traditional material of Pfinini a treatment of the peculiarities of

the Vedic and the Epic d'ialects.
He also largely used the aid
of comparative philology for the explanation of Sanskrit forms.
The American scholar Whitney was the first to attempt an
1

See Zachariae in the Vienna Oriental Journal, 15, 313-20.

INTBODTTCnON

xviii

historical

more

grammar of Sanskrit by

folly,

and explaining from

it

treating the Vedic language

the development of classical

The first grammar treating Sanskrit entirely from

comparative point of view is the excellent work of Prof.
J. Wackernagel, of which,, however, only the first volume, dealing
with phonology (1896), and the first part of the second volume
(*95; treating of compounds, have yet appeared.
The best known of the Sanskrit grammars used in this country
during the latter half of tlxe nineteenth century are those of
Monier- Williams and Mas Mtiller. Both of these contain much
matter derived from the native system that is of no practical
utility, hut rather an impediment, to the student of literary
Sanskrit. All such matter has been eliminated in the present
work, not from any prejudice against the Indian grammarians,
hut solely with the intention of facilitating the study of the
subject by supplying only such grammatical data of the actual
language as have heen noted by scholars down to the present
time,
Vedic forms have also been excluded, hut in order to
furnish English and Indian students with the minimum material
necessary for "beginning to read works written in the older
language, a brief outline of Vedic Grammar is given in
Appendix in. My recently published Vedic Grammar being too
elaborate for elementary students, I hope to briog out, as a
parallel to the present work, a simplified vedic Grammar, including syntax, which will afford beginners the same help in
the stody of Vedic literature as this grammar does in that of

Sanskrit.
tiie

Sanskrit.

Though the accent is never marked in classical Sanskrit, I

have, owing to its philological importance, indicated it here in
tasmsHteraied words as far aa it can be ascertained from Vedic
texte.
sbort aceouat of the Vedio accent itself will be found

CONTENTS
PREFACE TO THIRD EDITION
PREFACE TO SECOND EDITION
INTRODUCTION: BRIEF HISTORY OF SANSKRIT GRAMMAE
TABLE OF THE DEVANAGARl LETTERS

CHAPTER

**

THE ALPHABET

Relation of Sanskrit to Yedlo and to the Indian Vernaculars

Origin of Indian Writing
Arrangement of the Letters The
Vowels The Consonants The Numerical Figures Pronunciation .

CHAPTER

II

1"

EUPHONIC COMBINATION

External Sandhi: Combination of Vowels and of ConsonantsInternal

Sandhl : Combination of Vowels and of Consonants

CHAPTER

III:

1Q"

DECLENSION

Nouns Consonant stems unchangeable changeable -with Two

items with Three Stems Vowel stems Degrees of ComparisonNumerals: CardinalsOrdinals Numeral Adverbs Pronouns Per:

>nal

Ive

Interrogative Relative Reflexive PosseaQuantitative Indefinite Pronominal Adjectives

Demonstrative

Compound

CHAPTER

IV:

CONJUGATION

Introductory The Present System First Conjugation Second

Conjugation The Augment Reduplication Terminations Paraigms Irregularities The Perfect The Aorlst First Aorist
lecond
Aorist Benedict! ve Future Conditional Passive ParCausative Desiloiples Gerund Liflnittve-Derlvative Verbs :
.erative Intensive Denominative
:

CHAPTER V: INDECLINABLE WORDS

Prepositions
prepositional Adverbs Prepositional SubstanIves Prepositional Gerunds Conjunctive and Adverbial Particles
Qterjections

CHAPTER

VI:

144-159

NOMINAL STEM FORMATION AND

COMPOUNDS

Primary Suffixes Secondary Suffixes Gender Verbal Comounds Nominal Compounds

Determinatives
Co-ordinatlves
:

Dependent and Descriptive

159-178

Pofisessives

CHAPTER

VII:

SYNTAX

of Words The Article Number Con3rd

Pronouns
Use of the Cases
Locative and Genitive
.bsolute Participles
Use of the Tenses Use of the
Infinitive

Introductory

Order

[cods-Conditional

178^209

PPBNDIXI: LIST OF VERBS

PPENDEC H: METRE IN CLASSICAL SANSKRIT
PPENDEC HI CHIEF PECULIARITIES OF VEDIC

210-281

ANSKRTT INDEX
ENERAL INDEX

GRAMMAR

232-235
286-244

245-250

THE DEVANAGARI
LETTERS
-

-~

VOWELS.

CHAPTEE

THE ALPHABET
L Sanskrit

(from sa?n-sltrta t 'elaborated')

is

that later phase

of the literary language of ancient India which

is

described in the

grammar

of PSnini.

the earlier

from the
decay

it is practically

Vtdio language. In accidence

dialect of the

Vedas by a

it

identical with

has become different

process, not of growth, but of

a large number of older forms, including the whole sub-

mood and all the many infinitives save one, having

junctive

disappeared,

while

In phonology

it

entirely

The chief modifications are in the vocabulary, which,

has lost

much of its

old material, has been greatly extended

by the accession of new words and new meanings. The

difference,

on the whole, between the Vedic and the Sanskrit language

may

be taken to be much about the same as that between Homeric and

Attic Greek.

2.

From

called

the Vedic language are descended the popular dialects

Prakrit (* derived from the fundament/ i. e. from

Sanskrit,

'

thence
in

of

vulgar').

The

oldest extant forms of these are preserved

King A^oka's rock inscriptions of the third century B, c., one

them, under the name of Pali, becoming the sacred literary

language of the Southern Buddhists.

preserved

From

the ancient Prakrits,

in inscriptions, in entire literary works,

and in parts

of Sanskrit plays, are descended most of the dialects of

modem

India, PanjSbl, SindhI, Gujarat!, MarSthl, Hindi (which, with an

THE ALPHABET

idmixtnre of Arabic and Persian,

is

Urdu

or Hindustani

dialects of

Southern Indii

called

The Dravidian

BifcSn, and Bengali.

Tdtegu, Tamil, Ganarese, Malayalam, though non- Aryan, are fu

U* f Sanskrit words, and their literatures are dominated
by Sanskri
,

3-

A form

of Semitic writing was introduced into the north

of India

by way

of

Mesopotamia, probably about 700

etriwst Indian adaptation of this

script, known
d inscription* of the third
century B.C., is called
writing of

BrahmaV

Though written from

from

B, c

coini

BrahmT

left to

it

01

bears

right
written from right to left. From
the later Indian scripts. The most

Atr t!oas of having once been

"*

*** descended all

these is the
3%arl (' urban writing,* or perhaps
f tt* Nagara Brahmins ' of
GujarSt) or Deva-nSgan
of the gods/ a term of late but obscure
origin),
<rf

J its

fc Nottlwsrn

***&&
'*

or

TWB

-2*^**

shape about the middle of the

most commonly written in Devn-

characteristic

A.D. Sanskrit

ia

India^but other modern Indian character*,

are also employed in their
respective
non-Iryau south the Dmvidian scripts

Oriyfi,

ia the

^My-^w

~* A|w*ffto

consists of
forty-eight letter,
consonants (including -the pure

the spirant called

Visarga).
of the Sanskrit
The

language.

roil

These

arrange-

g% scientific, has

** the le
^ogmphical

order

oidty in

Hnding
on their
alphabetical order wiU

THE ALPHABET

g. The vowels are written

.tial

or follow a consonant.

(a)

Simple vowels

(&)

Diphthongs:

differently according as they are

They

are

au 6
toably be useful.

Uant, or

^h

The unchangeable Anusvura

cp. 42

i)

(before a semivowel,

has precedence of every other consonant

t*^^ samvara, tJUJ^I sams'ayn precede ^f5ff sa-ka. The

ngeable Anusvara (10; 42 B 2) occupies the place of the nasal into
Lch it might be changed. Thus ?iRT sam-ga would be found beside

ice

Similarly the' unchangeable Visarga (before a

sanga.
tural or labial) has precedence of every other consonant.

^Tn\*y
:

antalikarana and

^n

hard

Thus

H^C antalipura follow ^M^l anta

But the changeable Visarga (before

occupies the place of the sibilant into which it might be
Thus ^n*^I antahstha would appear where ^n^5T

precede *3|*nn anta-ka.

ibilant)

nged.
tsstha

There

might be written.
is no sign for medial

(or final)

ft,

as this vowel

is

considered

e. g. ^R = ka.
je inherent in every consonant ;
Medial or final I is written before the consonant after

which it is
and I were written as
srea to the left and the right respectively above the consonant ; but
the sake of clear distinction were later prolonged wibh a vertical
nward stroke, the one on the left, the other on the right.
Though based, in nearly al] cases, on iti and &u respectively, e and o
at present, and have been since at least 300 B. a, pronounced like
simple long vowels e and 0* in most European languages.
Though etymologically representating ai and au, ai and au are at
tent, and have been since at least 300 B.C., pronounced as ai and Ha.
The medial forms of the vowels are in combination with consonants;

nounced;

^ k,

e.g. fSfi ki.

Originally both

written as follows:

^
B

Jt

ka, ERT ka, fS|R ki,

2

^\

ki,

3p ku,

THE ALPHABET

I 6

6. The following table contains a complete classification (known

to Panini) of all the sounds of the
Devanagaii alphabet according

to the organs of speech

employed in their articulation.
Hard

Hard
Soft
uplrttes. media)).

teuudij.

*k

Gutturals

Paktals

Soft

vptntu

Sott
(Soft)

voeli
Short,

Long.

DIpl

17

Oerebralu

Dentals

|3

t-li

flt

\* d-h

Labials

Wb

tfip-h

^ kn,

kr,

binntion with

ra,
1

^ m.

|
^

kr,

fn
7f

kj,^i ke,

iri

kai,

^ ^
ko,

n and n are written at the

r,

kau.

In com-

ride instead of below

The

palatals, being largely derived from original guttuwds under

the influence of palatal vowels, were transliterated by Max Mttller with
italicized gutturals.
*
This term is a translation of the old native Sanskrit word wRrdhanya,
1
produced in the head (mnrflkan), i.e. on the roof or highest point
of the mouth, which is nearest the
upper part of the head. This class

of sounds has also

often been called linguals (since Bopp).

They
are as a rule derived from original dentals under the influence of a
neighbouring cerebral a or r sound.
s

IB

not a semivowel, but the soft breathing corresponding to

the guttural vowel

a,

BO semivowel of -its own.

soft aspirates g-h,
*

which, unlike the other simple vowels, has

It is identical with the second half of the

<fcc.

(Visarga) the hard breathing, corresponding to the second half

of the hard aspirates k-h, &c., is regularly used at the end of a word
in pausti for s or r,and before hard gutturals and labiala. In the latter
case modifications of it called Jihv&mtiliya
('formed at the root of the
1

spirant ( = GernL 0A), and UpadhmSnSya ('onihe Mlabial spirant/, were formerly employed, but have
beconae obsolete. They were both written

toDgtie

),

a guttural

hrefcftSng*)'

It

is

importafit to note that in the above table only the letters in

THE ALPHABET

I TO

7. AnusvSra ('after-sound'), the unmodified nasal following

a vowel and differing from the nasals given in columns, is written
with a dot above the letter which it follows; e.g. *R kam. Before

WJi

it is

sometimes written

originally before the sibilants

From AnuBvara

is

e.g.^R kam. Its proper place was

and

whence

h,

its

use extended.

sometimes distinguished Anunasika

('

accom-

panied by a nasal'), the nasalized vowel.

8* In writing the DevanSgari alphabet, the distinctive portiou
of each letter is written first, then the perpendicular, and lastly
the horizontal line

1
ir, rt

e.g.

rf ta.

9. Consonants to be pronounced without any vowel after them,

are marked below with a, stroke slanting from left to right, called
Yiraiim

('

Thus

stop').

The only marks

cik

must be written

^R|j.

uf punctuation ure the wigu

and

half-verse ur sentence,

the sign

II

at the end of a

end of a verse or

at the

paragraph.

The

elision of

^a

at the beginning of a

European editions with the sign

tion ');
o-S- ?J<TPT te 'pi for ^ ^fft

An

ribbieviation IH indicated

%*T (ga)-temu
10. AMien the

own

word

is

marked

called Avtigralw
te

('

in

separa-

iipi.

by the sign

five nasals are followed

thus *|<i4-^gfihun,

by consonants of their

within a word, they are often, to savo trouble, incore. g. ^fqid anikita
rectly replaced by the sign for Anusviira
for
ankita ; cJTpRT kampita for ftf*Rff kampita. In the
^f^-'fl
cla*s

same way

final

J^m

at the

end of a sentence

is

often

wrongly

thus ^T^ aham for ^^*^aham. In both

cases the pronunciation remains unaffected by the substitution.

written with

Anus vara

columns

and 7 are hard

i, a,

(sonant, voiced).
1
This was uot

(surd, voiceless), while all the rest are soft

originally iin essential clement in the letter, but

represents a part of the line below which the characters wtre written.

THE ALPHABET

6
n.

If a consonant

consonants they are

The

tfiTO?$ kartsnya.

is

followed immediately by one or

more

all

written in a group;

^TW

atka;

e.g.

formation
general principle followed in the

of these conjunct consonants,

to drop the perpendicular

is

and

Most of these combina-

horizontal lines except in the last letter.

with the exception of those transliterated with thick type in

the subjoined list, may be recognized without difficulty.
tions,

of
following are the most noticeable modifications
consonants when written in conjunction with others

The

12.

simple

The component

1.

^Tjf^Sf

and

A horizontal

2.

parts are indistinguishable in ^Tor

in Bf or ^f ksa

=^ ^
-f-

line is sometimes substituted for the distinctive

portion of 7T t and for the loop of eR k

3.

^s

V jfia=

is often. written

the vowels u or

e.g.

^T

tta

<t,

t when followed by a consonant or by

e.g.

-,

^ sen, *J su,

"*! sf.

4. "^ r following a consonant is written with a short oblique

stroke from right to left at the foot of the letter ; e. g.

W krn> ^

clra, J( s^ra,

*&(

ntrj-a.

vowel ^J r is written
preceding
*
at
of
with
the
before which it is to
letter
the
top
placed
be sounded; e.g.TF% arka, *n*1 varsma; Pl^ufn* niri-tilu
a consonant or the

Thw sign

for

^ is placed

the top of the same

Iiist of
13.

to

letter;

the right of any other

e.g.

marks at

"^S?" arkendu.

Compound Consonants*

^ k-ka.^f k-kha, ^

k-ca,

^ff k-ija,

W k-ta,

?J5f

k-t-ya,

f k-t-ra, Iff k-t-z-ya, ?i k-t-va, WT k-na, |p k-n-ya, ^T k-ma,

or ^B k-ra,
or
I k-ya,
k-r-ya, 9T k-la, 8p k-va,

^ ^

k-r-yaj ^f or ^f kngra, ^pf k--nw.

^R

k-s-ya,

^T

k-s-va.

THE ALPHABET

3
kb-ya, *| kb-ra.

HT

gb-n-ya,

gb-ma,

^?

fi-kb-ya.Nfffi-ga,

V
^

c-ca,

ch-ya,

fi-na,

^f

fS-cha,

S
31

t-ta,

^*Q

t-ya.

3J

^j" d-gli-ra,

c-fla,

5?J j-jha,

Tj-ya,^f j-ra,^T j-va.

fi-jfti

c-ch-ra,
j-ja,

-ma,

^-gha,

ft-k-ta,

^p

ft-kba,

^ fi-gba,^ fi-gb-ya, ^ fi-gh-ra,

ft-g-ya,

^ ch-ra.--^55f
1

A-ka,

ft-k-s-va,

3p

ft-k-sa,

^f gb-na,

ft-ma, ^gj d-ya.

^f

c-cba,

TZf g-r-ya.

g-ra,

gb-ya, ^T gb-ra.

ii-k-t-ya, ^JJ fr-k-ya,

fi-fta,

J*l g-ya,

^T

c-tna,

or Tf j-fia,

^T

c-ya,

^1 j-fi-ya,

^ fl-ca,t8T fi-c-ma, W fl-c-ya,

ii']-ya,

th-ya,

^J

tfi-ra,

^J

d-ga,

d-g-ya,

ST dh-ya,

<J-ma, v5J d-ya.

h-ra.

-ta,

TIJ ^-tha.TliS' n-da, TCfgjn-d-ya, ^ii-^i-ra, IJjq n-d-r-ya,

^ ZL*XLa

-dba,

gf

t-ka,

1OT

t-ra-ya,

raZf

t-ya,

d-ba, ^f

th-ya.

n-d-ra,

"i(

n-dba,

n-ya,

p-t-ya, "H p-na,

"^

b-da,

p-va,

3KT
5f

db-r-ya, ^c[ db-va.

u-p-ra, ^R

p-la,

fR

t-ra f

"^

b-dba,
b-ra,

b-ya,

bb-va.

m-ma, ^1 m-ya,

t-pa,

^1

t-t-ra,

Tff

t-va,

if d-ga, gf d-g-ra,

d-dha, 3T

HT

p-sa,

3T

BT

b-na,

b-va.

'W
n-ra,

'W

^f

p-pa,

m-raj ^1

5 d-gha,

n-t-ya,

Hf

db-ya,

W n-t-ra,

n-pa,

n-sa.

^T p-ma,

bb-na,

JJf in-p-ra,

m-la,

t-sa,

d-ja, 3ff cl-r-ya,

^1

TZJ

p-ya, IT p-ra,

b-gba, *5f b-ja,

9T b-ba, **C b-bba,

d-dli-ya, If d-na,

n-db-ra, 5f n-na,

*13f p-s-va.

^1 m-na, 1R m-pa,
J5T

*tt n-ta,

t-t-va,

31 t-ma,

t-p-ra^

t-r-ya,

d-bh-ya, ?I d-ma, ^T d-ya, j

^
n-ma, 11
^

fl p-ta,

t-t-ya,

^ db-ua, W dh-n-ya, m db-ma,

31 d-v-ya.

ii-da,

n-ya, ^3" n-ya.

d^da, ^J d-d-ya,

d-bha,

t-n-ya,

or

T^H t-s-n-ya,

-s-iia,

cl-gh-ra,

db-ra,

ij-ma,

^T t-ta, T5f

t-k-ra,

?^. t-na,

t-tha,

d-va,

WT b-bh-ya,

bb-ya,

^T bb-ra,

^f m-ba, ^T m-bba,

^ m-va,

THE ALPHABET

1 y-ya,
^f

^f

1-va,

B-ca,

y-.

1-ha.

^Bf

^|T 1-ka,

1-pa,

1-ya,

1-ma,

W 1-1*

* v-ra, 9 v-va.

v-na, *g y-ya,

TBJ

^R

T*

B-c-ya, ^ s-na, 19 ^-ya,

*3

^T s-ra,

?T

s-r-ya,

e-la,

s-n-ya,
T

a-p-ra,

s-ta,

^[

^IT

f Shra,

^|

^T

s-t-ya,

^T

| s^n-ya,

s-ma,

s-pa,

s-va,

^5

The muerical

ffeures

s-t-ra,

^T

s-pha,

^T

s-t-va,

s-ma,,

s-ka,

s-tha,

s-m-ya,

s-sa.

^ Iw^a, 3f h-na, ^
14.

^f

^5f s-va.

s-ya,

It-nia,

IT h-ya,

^f li-la,

J[ h-ra,

Z h-

figures in Sanskrit are

were borrowed from the Indians by the Arabs,

wfeo iHtrodced them into Europe.

5. Tfce foUoiring roles ehonld be noted

flw

To-wefe are

The short ^?

pronounced as in Italian.

a,

bffwftvr, fc*8 nkihea: the sound of the so-called neutral vo^vel

S* BB^Jrfi, Bte the

'

in

but/

It

had

this

We vpintioB of tbc coaaonante should be heard

ft,

sound (in

300 B.C.

fTj-ta, 'closed') at least as early as

distinctly.
9

^=t-h

in 'pothouse ;
-h in loghouse ; \SC=d-h in

IK ^Hk-feom';

'

tho ^KHnHnA
l*a i^e ttPoad of Eg in king/
!**
ft*
^c
*,
ftd^j iwre tke sound of ch in
.

'church,'

THE ALPHABET

I '5

5.

The cerebrals

are pronounced similarly to the so-called dentals

t, d, n in English, the
tongue being, however, turned rather
further back against the roof of the inoulh.

6,

The

dentals in Sanskrit are at the present day

as inter-dentals, being

pronounced

produced by bringing the

tip of

days

the

In the

tongue against the very edge of the front teeth.

of the ancient Indian phoneticians they -were pro-

nounced as post-dentals, being produced

upper front

? The dental

at the ba'ck of

the

teeth.

sh in 'shun';

sounds like

ts

in 'sin/ the cerebral

while the palatal

^s

between the two, being the

sibilant

place as the spirant in the

German

is

like

produced midway

pronounced in the same

'

8.

The Visarga, being a final hard

pronounced

as

ich.'

breathing, is in India generally

a hard h, followed by a short echo of the

preceding vowel.

The Anusvara, being a pure nasal unmodified by any

f
sounded like n in the French bon.

stop, is

'

io. Since about the

beginning of our era Sanskrit has

nounced with a
accent)
laid

much

been pro-

stress accent (instead of the earlier

in the same

way

as Latin,

Thus the

musical
stress is

on a long penultimate (Kalidasa), OH the antepenulti-

mate when followed by a short syllable (Himalaya), and on

the fourth from the end when two short syllables follow
(karayati),

JO

CHAPTER
KTJLES

II

OF SAJSDHI OK EUPHONIC COMBINATION

OF LETTEBS

16. In Sanskrit every sentence is treated as one unbroken

chain of syllables. The coalescence of final and initial letters is
called Sandhi

('

putting together').

The

'rnleg of

SaniHri are

basedchieflyonthe avoidance ofhiattwandon assimilation.

The ahsence

of Saoclhi is in

many cases

sufficient to

mark

the

stops which in other languages have to he marked hy punctuation.

Though

"both are based

essential, in order

on the same phonetic

principles,

to avoid confusion, to distinguish

it is

external

letters
fKttilMj Tvhich determines the changes of final and initial
final
the
io
which
of words, from internal Sancthi,
applies
letters of verbal root*

and nominal stems when followed by certain

suffixes or terminations

4.

The

niles of external Sandhi apply,

mth

few exceptions

to
(which ace survivals of an earlier stage of external Sandhi),

words forming compoxuids, and to the final letters

stems before the Pada or middle case-endings

of

WJ.

fif^bhis,
suffixes

VR

bhyas,

beginning

bhyam,

su (71), or before secondary (182, 2)

ivith any consonant except

JL

nominal

^y.

External Sandhi.

CrlAMxEcfttioix of
17* Vowels are divided

A,

i.

3.

into

Simple rowels:
Giina vovela:

TpddM

^H a;

To^wels: 'VR 5

TM VrtWhi fona of ^[

(wfeash w<mkl

be

^W^&l)

does not occur,

II

RULES OP SANDHI

Guna

a.

('secondary form')

ia

II

the strengthening of the simple

'vowels by a preceding ^f a (which leaves

^a

itself

un-

changed) ; Yrddhi ('increase *) is the further strengthening

of Guna vowels by means of another "^ a 1 .
B.

Vowels which are

i.

ft I;

^T u,

latter half of
2.

liable to

^ u; ^
which

Those which are not

is
:

be changed into semivowels

r,

and the diphthongs

r,

or ^T u)

^ff a,

"3R

^i,
(the

liquid vowels.

a.

Combination of Final and Initial Vowelfl18. If the same simple vowel (short or long) occurs

and

beginniug of words, the result

sit

^TJTt

api

kimtii udeti

becomes

is

becomes tdlH^fl sapik&ite

Iksate

at.

the end

a long vowel;

becomes fqig^fif kimtudeti

fS|f?J

^H^

*ffg

kartf rju

^l^^'kai-tfjn.

19. ^T a and *R
a. coalesce with a following simple liquid vowel to Guna
tava indral.i=:7T^R;: tavendrali
t?'RT

soktva;

e.g.

^T

sarddhih.
.

coalesce with

Guna vowels

tavaiva

c.

VT

to Vrddhi

e.g.

''Sfnrfv: sa

are absorbed by Vrddhi vowels

e. g.

^HT

sautsukyavatu
In this vowel gradation, as Comparative Philology shows,
vowel ww
vowel represents the normal stage, from which the ample
f
***
a
!
variety
lengthened
reduced by low of accent, while Vrddhi
with the
The reduction of the syllables ya, va, ra (which are parallel

Guna

vowels
stage) to the corresponding

(' distraction').

i,

ur

| is

EXTERNAL VOWEL SANDHI

12
20.

A simple liquid vowel followed by any

a diphthong

is

changed into its semivowel

dadhy atra

artham
21.

madhu iva = *rfl^f

= ^4( j*^ nadyar tham

e.g. c^f%I

kartr uta

madhv

other vowel or

iva

The Guna vowels

api=?Ufll

TJ e

become

^a

te 'pi; ^ft

ff

sakhe

W!

=^5^T kartr uta ;

*f^t W$l^ nadi

and

^_
o

a,

which

^ffq so

elided

is

api=^ft so

^rft?

te

'pi-

^RJ^ay and V^av, which drop the

*T%
every other vowel (or diphthong)
:

iba=5TO T[f sakha

iha^

wft Tlf%

prabho ehi=

Ttff prabha ehi*

23. The Vrddhi vowels

a (throng

^H^ay)

^ ai

and

and ^fr au respectively become

^p^rtv (the semivowel not being

in this case) before

every vowel (or diphthong)
i

v
e

by

*Hf dadbi

(thi-ough

semivowel) before

w*4

zc

*; remain
unchanged before

fr

R<|

II

arthafc=f%RlT

^f

fcyS artha^

f^ftfr

?ft tf^T tan iti==

iti.

(secondary) hiatus occasioned

ia *^e

by the dropping of
above three cases (21 b aud
22) remains

Vowel Sandhi.
of Gnait results

from the contraction of

arcchati.
;,

^*1 ^^* i>ift fee perfect participle passive

up.
'

(from

^Ri;
ud,

Vet

).

EXTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHI

II 27

13

Absence of Vowel Sandhi.

24* Inteij ectional particles consisting of or ending in vowels,
5, ^ i,
n,
he, ^T^ aho, are not liable to Sandhi

^ ^

such as ^IT

'

JTJ

1[

Indra';

indra,

^T

"WC

* e^arn,

is it so

indeed?'

'

^^7 VM^

aho apehi, Oh, go away.'

The
vowels
25.
f^i, ^l u, 1? e, when dual terminations, nominal
or verbal, remain unchanged "before vowels (^ a not being elided
after this dual If e)
they are called Pragrhya ( separate *) The
c

final of

TRTT ami, a uom. plural

same way.

(of the

pronoun

^tn

asau, 112),

treated in the

is

E. g. "BR^ ^ift" kavl imau,

these

imau, 'these two merchants';

two poets

ft% 1^

'

'BT^T'ft sadhu

vidye ime, 'these two

'

; ili^T^ ^|^*^yScete artham, 'they two ask for money'

^H*n il-yit ami aavab, those horses.*
26. In the Epics, the law-books, and other works not strictly

sciences

conforming to the classical standard, vowel Sandhi is seldom

applied between the first and second line (Pada) of a hemistich.

Combination of Final and Initial Consonants.

27. The rules of Sandhi are only applicable after the final consonant of a word has been reduced to one of the eight allowable
(actually occurring) consonants at the

end of a word in pausa, viz.

d
xf n,

The

*^n,

thirty-four consonants given in the table (6) are reduced

to these eight, as follows

J^m
:

must be hard and unaspirated, the palatals (including

n)> ^?
fl
and
^ h are replaced by ^5 k or <[ t (1 ty

final

s)

by

t, ?E^ s

and

by Visarga, while Uln,

^7 ^N l and ^v do

EXTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHI

14

Thua

not occur*

II 28

the second, third, and fourth column*, as well as

the second line (the palatals), disappear entirely, leaving only

four tenues in the first, three nasals in the fifth, and Viearga

alone in the sixth and seventh.

No word may

end in more than one consonant, except

a final fk, 3 t, c^t, ^p, which is radical (or
precedes
when^r
In the case of 'all
substituted for a radical) and not a suffix.

28.

other combinations the final letter or letters must be dropped

till

only one, in the form allowable as a final, remains. Thus ^q*<*J^

bhavant-s becomes ITf^bhavan, 'being' ^iftH^ abibhar-t=
"Hf^W abibhalj, 'he carried' (<^t is a suffix; "^ r must become
;

Visarga); but

*U);

^F^urk,

^WT^ amSrt,

'strength

(qg

'he wiped,' from

k substituted for radical

*JWxmrj (^

substituted

for radical

Classification of Consonants.

29. Place or organ of articulation.

i.

The

throat, the

lips,

the roof of the month, the teeth, the

iwilate,

and the nose

are called

the

places

or

organs of

articulation.
a.

By

contact between the tongue and the four places

palate,

roof, teeth

dental consonants are formed..

formed by contact between the

3*

throat,

the guttural, palatal, cerebral,

la forming the namls

Labial consonants

and
are

lips.

of the five classes, the breath partially

posses through the nose while the tongue or the lips are in
the position for articulating the corresponding tenuis. The
seal AatOT&ra is formed in the nose only, while the tongue
Is

fa*

lie position

for

forming the particular vowel which the

accompanies.

II

EXTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHI

30

4-

The semivowels

^ y, ^

r,

1,

v are

15

palatal, cerebral,

and labial respectively. They are described by the

old Indian grammarians as produced by partial or imperfect

dental,

contact of the tongue with the organ of articulation,

often interchanges with or is derived from
5-

The three sibilants

are hard spirants produced

by partial
contact of the tongue with the. palate, roof, and teeth
Sanskrit has not preserved any of the
respectively.
corresponding soft sibilants (English

6.

^f

r.

z,

French j).

^ h and h

are respectively soft and hard spirants produced

without any contact, and articulated in the position of the
I

vowel which precedes or follows-. ^ h, corresponding to

the second half of the soft aspirates g-h, ]-h, d-h, b-h, from
which it is in fact derived, occurs only before soft letters.
Visarga, corresponding to the second half of the hard
aspirates (k-h, &c.), occurs only after vowels and before
certain

In India Visarga

hard consonants.

is

usually

articulated as a hard h, followed by a very short echo of the

l
a

preceding vowel;

kali=kah

e.g. qi:

,^Sfir:

kavit==kavih

30. Quality of consonants*

Consonants are
i.

either

hard

(surd, voiceless)

columns

i, 2,

7 in the table,

p-4;
or soft (sonant, voiced)

AnusvSra (besides

all

the rest (columns 3,

all

4, 5, 6)

and

the vowels and diphthongs).

aspirated columns 2, 4, 7, besides ^ h (in 6) ;

or unaspirated : all the rest.
c to ^ k is a change of place (palatal
Hence the change of

3. either

^
^

to guttural), and that of

to soft)

c to

while the change of

j is

c to

a change of quality (hard

*^g (hard

palatal to soft

EXTERNAL CONSONANT SANBHI

guttural), or of ?^t to Sfj (hard dental to soft palatal)

"both place and quality.

II 3 1

is

one of

is essential to remember that consonant Sandhi cannot

applied till finals have been reduced to one of the eight allowable letters (2*7). The latter are then modified without reference to

31. It

"be

their etymological value (except partially in the case of Visarga).

Only six Of these finals occnr at all frequently, viz. ^|[ k, ?t, *^n,
m, and Yisarga. The changes which final consonants
^p,

undergo are most conveniently

treated with reference to (I) their

quality, (II) their place or organ.

Change* of Quality.

I.

32. Final consonants must be

before hard initials.
a.

%,

This rule

before soft initials, and hard

hard consonants (^jk,

b) t the nasals (6; 36) not being liable to
of quality (but two of them,^n,,^m, are liable to changes

*^t,

changes

soft

affecls only the five 'final

t^p and
j

of place, like the two hard sounds

?^t and Visarga : 37).
Hence final ^| k,
},
t,
p before sonants become

d,

^ d,

W^b

^ ^

respectively
'

samyag uktam,

well said

'
;

e.g.

f^[ TO:

= ft[T*W:

dig-gajal?

world-elephaiit/
Mf\fll^t*l*i parivr4
1|(\41^ ''^^F^
,'ne (is) a mendicant '; ^l\^^^^ l^Bgf?C
Mf\g| If
'
pariTra^ gacchafci, the mendicant goes.' STf^t ^HT
aaiid afera, *tlu> river here ';
mahad-dhanub,

^Pl

?Tf^\nj:=Tr^^j:

*a lATge bow.*
^QR^^ni^^pni kakub
****** J ^nt ^i;=' ^H: ab-iafe, born in water. 5
I

^i ^

atra,

'a region

t ^t l^p, isteB followed by initial ^n or *^m,

r
,aad i^ practice almost iavwiahly do, become the correspond-

EXTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHI

II 36

17

'

or

dig-nagalji

WlS|T*4:
lord of the world

the

'
;

^RE *u<4!

'

TTTf

or ^4|fUU|: jagad-nathat or jagan-nathab,

'

of six months

'

world-elephant

din-uagali,

= q<i<tiit|!

= ^I^U^*
<3*^*

'

san-mafiah,

period
*

facing

prat-mukhati,

east.'

34- Final ?^

before

becomes

^1

^1

(through

^ d)

e.g.

'

that

?T7^ <H*><+V= TrtRKTI^t'al labdham,

is

taken.*

35. Since the nasals have no corresponding hard letters, they

remain unchanged in quality before hard letters but in several
;

cases a sibilant (after H.n) or cognate hard letter (after

*^n

or

^ n)

'J

ft

or

is

inserted between the two.

An

original palatal

cerebral TI^ n never occurs as a final letter (27). The guttural

in that position,
vjp n, which is rare as a final, remains unchanged

but

^ k may be inserted after

ITTV ?$l pr&n

Final

Hm

s'ete

is liable

or

it

before the three sibilants

e. g.

'

J4I& ?fa prSnk

he

sete,

lies

eastward/

to change before all consonants (42).

Final

dental *^n remains unchanged before most letters, but is modified

before all palatals and cerebrals (except ^s), before the bard
dentals c^t and

^th, aud

ment

somewhat

requires a

before the semivowel ^IJL

detailed statement.

38. A. The dental nagal

i.

before vowels (op. 52);

Its treat-

^n remains unchanged

e.g.

^iH.^^V^I tan uvaca/he apoke

to them.'

3. before* all gutturals,

6-g. fjFll^

mail

'

1*1,

TTTH

^ k, ^kh, ^g, ^gh, as well as ^ h

^jf^^t^T

^TT

buddhiman ko

'a certain wise

*pi,

tan hatva, having slain them.'

3. before all the labials,

^ p,

ph,

^b,

T^bh,

m^HTI, etan pasan, these bonds

bandhavan mama, my relatives.
i^cil*^

4. before the soft dentals <g d,

'
;

^
c

clh,

^u

e.g.

*^m;

e.g.

EXTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHI

II

'

matejan dhatta, 'put the fish ; 11^4^1*1*1^1^ rajapuiii

nayati, *he leads the princes.'
5. before the semivowels

^y, ^

r,

^ v;

f ^1*1 V*f

e.g.

haipean raksati, 'he protects the geese/

^s and

6. before the cerebral

the dental

but before th

s,

e. g. TTTT.
a transitional ?^t may be inserted
'
or
tSu
fc-ahate
six
those
;
(
TTTt ^HfH

latter

'fi

'

ttn

titai

sabate r 'he endiues them.

E- Th* dental nasal

lu

baCor

ihe hard palatal

al

^tand ^th,
deatal

^s

1n

is

^c

and

to

changed

ka^liing'

^ch;

cerebral

^t

^s,

Anusyara, a palatal

a cerebral
1

being respectively interposed

hasan cakara=
tt

o. g.

hasaina cakSra, 'lie

f ff^l 4bT'<!

chetttim

TTT^T^^^fp^ pSsan

diettum, 'to cut the bonds';

*
:

calanis tiftibhak

patan

taruljt

a moving

MTI^I^ pataips

tree.'

*fe toft

!>alatal8

^J, ^Jh, and

tk* a^l cerebrals

d and

the palatal sibilant

tlh

to nasalized

to

the cerebral

Tvritten

with

of

Te plural (in

and the nominative

- .- +++*,*.* appears
in Sanskrit its use has been
&&*i
n before hard palatals,
-joa)

of

EXTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHI

II 40

19

Changes of Place.

II.

37- The only four final consonants liable to change of place

are the
a.

dental

The

?^ t

dentals

aud

become

^ n,

the labial

^ m, and Visarga.

and cerebral before palatals and

palatal

cerebrals respectively.
b.

Visarga and, to a less extent,

*^m

adapt themselves to the

organ of the following consonant.

Final

1.

c^t.

^ ch, 3TJ, HJh, ^ s)

38. Final ?^t before palatals (^c,

changed

c or

to a palatal

'and that'; 7T?^fift*lf

(^
^J)
H = dP*fe*lPH

tac chinatti, 'he cuts that'

'

?rafl<<^

taj jiiyate,

that is born

*HU srnoti, but in practice)

ffl

^=*W

e.g. TTc^

13

is

tac ca,
;

Wc^ ^UlVf^ =

'

n^uHRf tac

c-hvnoti

'

he hears

that.'

39. Final c^t

is

changed

H^^ft^:

liefore

to a cerebral

etatf

? &, ^

01

<l

or

dh (but not before \s)

dh)
e.g. !T?Tc^ i3?l*

<l,

thakkui-ah, 'the idol of him';

'

tad dayate,

ti

'

it flies

\*fH

7T?[.

v^Rl =r

7f^

= flj\4kr)

flj
tad dhaxikate,

ej?|
e

it

approaches.'

2.

40. Final
e. g.

7TPI.

^n

^i^Ht

before

Final

and
3JJ, 1Jjh,

= flllS^ni

becomes

fi

'

toft jayati,

he conquers them

'
;

sSrdulan or
tftfi

chardulan \ 'those tigers.'

With

aspirate

the further change of the initial

^f
For the change of
eee 36 B i.
2

*^

4 to the corresponding

ch, cp. 53.

^n

before the hard palatals

2

and ^g

ch,

EXTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHJ

4L, Final
e -6-

^ before^ d,

TfT*l VTT:=^f

UJ!

dh

(but not

^ <t mahan

3.

Final 11

^s)

is

changed to m.9

41

claraarali/ a great uproar.'

an.

40. A. Final 5F^m remains unchanged before voxels;

Jrim atra, 'what (is) here ?

e.g.

'

B. Final J^in
i.

is

changed to Anusvara before consonants

necessarily before semivowels, sibilants,

and

e.g.

yeda/I know bim*; 4R^UI

karunaqi roditi, 'he cries piteously';
*

moksaiii eeveta,

one should devote oneself to salvamadhurani hasati, 'he

^woally fceJore mutes and the

H may become the class
*feJn European

w ftr^Ckfl)
^!R ^t =

?>

'kill

editions);

kirji

^m

3
nasals i^n,
(6, cols.
3
nasal
(a change which is

e.g.

'R^ ^Of^=f^

karosi (or kin karosi),

'what doest

^Tft (or IT^Tff) s'atrum jahi (or

'; ftj^ ^^^=^1

TRI^ (or
kim phalam), 'what (is) the use?

tbe enemy
(or

'

guruni namati (or

(or

the teacher

gurnn

>;

aastram mimSipsate (or sSstram

book.'

t,
*

3
^

>

th,

Sandhi of the Vedic

lauguag-e.

and

EXTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHI

II 44
of final

^n

before the soft palatals

cerebrals

^d

and

of

final

kiintau

dh

na the

first

?fT*t.k&ntan (36

(41),

before

c^ t

is

responding

hard letter
1.

(33)

thus

UT*nTl. kantam (42

^Br^l^

qi|vni*t
masc. 3RT-

kantat (33),

2).

Final Visarga.

r are

reduced in paiisa.

a palatal, cerebral, or dental

(^ c,

and the cor-

If followed

^ ch Z ^ th
;

to the sibilant

changed
^th),
(^s, t^s, ^*)
which the following letter belongs ;
e.g.
it is

the soft

and with that

ace* pi.

the spirant to which the hard

(40),

in

e. g.

the abl. sing. masc.

4),

4.

soft

and the dental *^n

word may represent Hie

or the ace. sing. fein.

43- Visarga

?J jh

WJ,

21

by

t,
?^ t,
of the class to
;

"

purnas

candi-al;, 'the full

nadyas

tirani,

'

2.

moon

'TOT:

';

the bank of the river.'

a guttural or labial

(^

k,

^f kh,

^ p,

Ifi

ph),

it

remains

'

e.g. TfTf* EfSTT! tatah

kamal;, thence love

'; 'TOT''
unchanged
nad
the
of
the
river.*
shore
yak pajara,
opposite
MT^*^
2
3. a sibilant, it remains unchanged or may be assimilated
;

'

e -g-

$H*

IRW;

or
fit^J* suptali sisuli

'GT'h

^JHHW^J*

prathamat sargah or

tho child

w^^y<|:

is

prathamas

asleep

eargfi^i,

'

the

fii'st

canto.'

a or ^Jf S) if followed
44. Yisarga (except when preceded by
by a soft letter (consonant or vowel) is changed to ^ r; e.g.
*

avir ayam,

'

this poet

gaur gacchati, 'the cow walks

';

'

r
va3 ur vat i,

the wind blows.'

Cp. the treatment of *^n before hardiautes, 36 A 2, 3; B i.

This assimilation was undoubtedly the original Sandhi, and
required by some of the ancient Vedic phoneticians.
1
3

is

EXTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHI

22
i*

45.
tr

uJt

coaso&ants;

'thi potto

*lU

W! fib

Tlte fiwtl syllable

its

Visarga before vowels

Vft

^Wpftrr^nn

icqi**

e.g,

drops

IT 45

asvil aim,

htvearrnwr; f?TT; Wf.'- ?<TT WT* hatfi

Wfl fif: = ?rrf5f: niii-l)hH) instr,

fepbi3ta (are) killed':

'

plnr. of HTOt. mSs,

.

Tli

moon.

final syllable
its

W ah

Visarga before voweln

:

knta

except

fitah,

esah,

'who

(is)

the poet

(is)

a;

^ST

e.g.

'whence come?'
lie?'

^fq:

?fi:

km

rtift,

uoft

who

fooaonants and before

anTto OTpa^. "the

mano-Lhii,
ro

clwngetl to

^ff a, is

'with

inst. plur.

^:

a^i,

in the

minds

fe* instances

Ti

represents an etymological
txrepiional rule stated in
In
43.

reVeHin ^ to

lamp (has been) brought

'yam, 'this man.'

and

7tW>lefi ^r; aJ;

'

ai> ft

r,

are not

other word*

Br, in

this case

ap,
blufitar dehi,

dv5r
r

'brother,

e?5j

thffi

doof/

b rfway d ^PPed,

preceding short

vidhu

KU 'mlT/^
-tlSti^

"**'
'**'

'^ IW^tar,

dTSr>

^^JJ^JTL^Ll?^

pit

'

*"*'
"

**
.

'within';

^^ var
?o.)

'

aing. imperf.

EXTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHI

II gi

i-Etjate,

moon

'the

23

shines

';

^jf^lpn

tptt

"^*ft puna

rogi,

'

ill

agftin/

48. The two pronouns

(no

retain Yisarga

a),

?t

become

at

'

sal?,

so and T^ft eso before ^f a (45, 2

<^Tf?f=*r
he was '

end of a sentence

the

<^<Tffl

sft

l>)

'

'

this

only,

but

e.g. ^ft

'he gives'; *H

dadfiti,

sa Indrah, 'that Indra*; but ^f:

'

that/ and TJ^: esah,

f^:==^T T^?
WRf^sr^ftjWfc^so 'bhavat,

'

^7f ^: mrtab sat, ^e (is) dead/

bholjt, an in-egular contracted vocative
J

49- Ht
(for bhavas,
used as an interjection) of fl'flc^ bhavat, 'your honour,' drops
its Visarga before all vowels and soft consonants;
e,g. Ht
^i(|9|=9ft ^5TTf bho Isana, 'O lord
bho deval?,
but Ht: %^f :
gods
c

1
:

^fT:=Ht ^fTt

flt:

= H^"%^T: bhos

'

chettab,

'

cutter.*

The same mle

*.

applies to the contracted vocative

H*ftj

bhagot (for bhagavas) from *Nf*|c^ bhagavat, adorable on,e/

50. Nouns ending in radical ^ r (82) retain the "^ r before the

^ su

of the loc- pi.

a.

^r

^nr^

e,

g..TT^
abar (91, 2 N.) and
;

+ 55=^13 vSr-su,

^^

when compounded with

in the waters-*

svai- (indeclinable) retain their

trftT pati

'

'

^HjMf?f! ahar-patih,

'

lord of

day/

*<t4f?f.' svar-patilj,

lord of heaven.'

Doubling of Consonants.
51-

^ ch

at the beginning of a

after vowels;

particles

^T a

it

must be

ccMya, 'thy shade';

but
'

cchaya,

word may always be doubled

vowel and after the

after a short

ma;e.g. 7TO ^i^i = 7W

^T eei^^fn= m^l^^Pl

and TTF

'he covers'; ^TT

cut';

so

t^^c^=TT f^^^nia

*1<^O^I^I

shade of jujube

badari-chaya
trees.'

or

^|)|

tava

acchadayati,

cchidat/let

him not

II S 2

EXTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHI

24

In the body of a void the doubling takes place after all

vowete l^Efif icchati/he wishes ^351 mlecchak barbarian.'
vowel and
ft and
52. Final
n, preceded by a short
m.

'

'

wwel

followed by any

diphthong), are doubled;

(or

pratyaM

'he

aste,
'

dhavann

asvafc,

sits

e.g.

westward*;

a running horse

'
;

but

'

kavm

call

ohvayasva,

the poets/ remains.

Initial Aspiration.

53.

Initial *^s, not followed

by a hard consonant, may

be,

and

in practice nearly always U, changed to the corresponding aspirate

^P <* after
tflic

e (38)

ehlokena, 'by

chalatt, "a
r

and

idiat

fl

verse

(40)

*;

WPT, *ni = ^I c
:

'

:>

*.*l*

dll5:vafs

running hare.

Ibe same

is

change

nsuaily apj^ied

allowed after ^1 k,

^l^rt^

vak-satam

t,

^p, though not

may become

*a hundred speeches.*
InJtiai

^ h, after softening a

to iKa

soft aspirate

preceding 3
e.g.

of the preceding letter;

for speech'

ghi,

7R^ ff

^^T tad dhi,

55- If ^gfe, ^dfe t ^bh, or 1 h are at the end of a (radical)

begmaing i?iik ^g, ^ d| ^b, and lose their Aspiration
initb! consonants are aspirated

by way

n\itt^

3 i>t ^ fo
^riguua initial -aspiration of such
**$**, *4 Sawfctt) by the operation of

^wfc tiu feud w|mto ^si^jpeared the

initial

INTERNAL SANDHI

II 59

B.

25

Internal Sandhi.

56. The rules of internal Sandhi apply to the finals of nominal

and verbal stems before all terminations of declension (except
those beginning with consonants of the middle stem
conjugation, "before

primary
beginning with a vowel or

suffixes (182, 2)

73

suffixes (182, l),ancl before

and

a)

secondary

^y. They

are best

acquired "by learning paradigms of nouns and verbs first. Many

of these rules agree with those of external Sandhi ; the most
important of those which differ from external Sandhi are here

added.

Final Vowels.
.57. In

and

^i
to

H^

cases before a vowel (and even the same vowel)

many

%^ I are

ir (cp.

changed
18 and 20)

to

^^iy

'

sing.,

in thought';

yu-yu + u V
gf

= g^g

+ ati=(it,rn
Ir,

*^+^

= f%rf^T dhiy-i, loc.

= gf3[ bhuv-i, 'on earth

';

yu-yuv-ut, 'they have joined';

'

gir-ati,

he

swallows.'

f before consonant tenninations is changed to

after labials to
r (after a single con^T^ ur ; while

58. Final *{
|j^

^ u and ^T u to ^^ uv

e.g. \ft dhi-f^i

sonant) before

^y

becomes ft

ri

'

is

sing. 'ft^Kl gfr-yate,

pres. 3.

swallowed

P ass

pass, part., 'swallowed';

fiUed';

piir-nalj,

past part.,

TJjtf:

PF

e.g.

(154, 3);

'

^ gf, passive

'

P res

'filled';

*ftlj: gTr-nai, past

%ffi pur-yate,

'is

QT kr, pass. pres.

'

f!|| ^i<\

59-

kri-yate,

e,

is

done.'

ai,

^t

beginning with vowels

^ini^av respectively (21

o,

or
;

au are changed before

^y

22);

to
e.g.

^R^ay, 'JIT^Sy, ^l^av,

% + ^PT=*Iin

'eye';

^ + H=TT^'
ift + ^Tt = TRt

i^y-e, 'for wealth';

'faracow

'

gav-yah,

relating to cows.'

suffixes

nav-afc, 'ships';

nay-ana,

INTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHI

26

II

6-

Final Consonants.

60. The most

notable divergence from external Sandhi

is thi

unchangeableness of the final consonants (cp. 32) of verbal am

nominal stems before terminations beginning with vowels, semivowels, and nasals

the

(while before other letters they usually follow

of external Sandhi)

tjiles

'

vac-ani,

let

me

'

61.

e.g.

TTTV

pranc-ali, 'eastern';
'

speak,' flT*H vSc-ya,

but

ifW vak-ti,

to be spoken,'

'he speaks.'

vac-mi,

I speak

Nominal

or verbal stems ending in consonants,

and followed

by terminations consisting of a single consonant, drop the termination altogether, two consonants not being tolerated at the
end of a word (28). The final consonant which remains is then

Thus WT^-f

treated according to the rules of external Sandhi.

^prSfic+s, nom.

becomes

sing., 'eastern/

HT^

pr5h (the

^s

being
dropped, the palatals being changed to gutturals by
and
the
k being then dropped by 28) ; similarly ^<i?
27,
?^ a-doh-M=^l|th^ a-dhok (35), 3. sing, imperf., he milljed.
first

'

6x

Aspirates

vowels

or

nasals

followed by any letters except vowels, semilose their aspiration

(60)

e.

g.

randh+dhve=^^rnnd-dhve / you obstruct';

an-na,

lap-sye, *I shaU take'

but ^f%( yudh-i, 'in battle/

lobh-yat, 'to be desired/

f!

d
c

is

assimilated before the primary suffix ?[ -na

food' (for sd-na)

and ?^

3R^ mat and ^TO maya

e. g.

by lightning* (vidyut), and

t,

fq^j^f^ vidyuu-mat,

^4||

e.g. in

d before the secondary suffixes

'

accompanied

mrn-maya, 'conBisting

of

clfty'

(mrd).
a
For Sanskrit tolerates two aspirates neither at the beginning and
end of the same syllable, nor at the end of one and the beginning of

the next*

INTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHI

II 63

A lost

a.

(not

soft aspirate is, if possible,

f%( dhi), 3^bh,

?L S

thrown back before

e --

according to 53;

27

V^dhv

^J2$*^ a-bfcud-

'

you observed,'

clhvam,

su, loc. plur.,

b.

But

it is

bhud-bhih,

^jflfJ

inst. plur.,

^JW bhnt-

but

^fiV

dug-dhi,

2. sing,

milk.'

imper.,

thrown forward on a following ?^t and

^th

1
,

which
*

are softened ;

e.g.^R^+7T: lal)h+tati=*W: lab-dhah, 'taken

'^*B : mnd-dhah, 'you two obstruct*;

'

to bind.'

^PV^band-dlitini,

63. Palatals. a.AVhile ^c

consonants

(cp.

61: 27

becomes guttural fllk,

6, N.I),
2

^g)

spoken

(from ^ST^yuj);

\^

om.

XJ^ rat,

(from

b*

^s,

^J^raj

*P^

some cases

vac)

(^

^W

(the majority)

^ d> ^.s)

t,

'

yuk-ta, 'joined

^^ruj

cp. 65);

TWv+^i'jH-s); ^^ mrd-

sing, 'kiiig' (for

J

in

rug-na, 'broken' (from

dhi,2.sing.imper.STipe (from

(from

SJJ

in others cerebral

'

e.g. ^Jff uk-ta,

but

regularly becomes guttural before

g^mrj): ^fras-tra, 'kingdom*

cp. 64).

dh, the middle terminations (73 a) and the nom.

*\i before
k or ^g); before
(
J (sometimes {
usually becomes ^ t *
,

c^t, IT th,

always becomes

it

TB^s (cp. 64),

^s

and before the

of

k; e.g.
the future and of other conjugational forms, always
'
from f%P^ vis we get
vi^-su, 'in the settlers ; fTC vi^-t,

fad^J

^^|fa vek-fyami (cp. 67),

and ^j (not ^s) palatalize

'entered';
c.

a following

^TT^+TT yac+na=^rran
'

yaj-fla,

'I shall enter.'

sacrifice'

ySc-fia, request

but JHR

^ n;

e.g*

1
;

pras'-na, 'question.'

Except in the case of the root VT dhn, 'place,' which has (according
t and
*T^th (eee below, J34i
\Wt dhat before

to the analogy of a)

third daw,

i).

regularly becomes

^ k before a conjugational ^

a (cp.

144, 4)*

28

INTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHI

if.

The

^ cb of the root Tf^

*

Tre PTf-ta,

asked,'

Uplift

II 64

prach, 'ask,* is treated like *l>'

'

prak-syami,

I shall ask,

TFR

pras-

'

na,

(In external Sandhi,

question.*

middle terminations,

it

becomes

i.e.

when

final,

and before

^ t.)

64. Cerebrals change following dentals to cerebrals (cp. 39)

^+n is-hta=l^r ig.^ fished'; ftpG^+f%T dvis4-clhi=
dvid-<Jhi, 'hate'; ^Hf-h^TT^ sa^+nam = *TOT*l. san-nSm
;

.
33), 'of six.'
a. \Yhile the cerebral sibilant

(^T t or

<J)

tion, It regularly

63 Z> and 67)

becomes a cerebral

^s regularly

in declension (cp. 80),

becomes

and before ^dh in conjugak before an

s in conjugation (cp.

^f%| dvek-fi, 'thou hatest,' from ft[^dvis.

65. Change of dental ^n to cerebral TS^n:
A preceding cerebral ^1 r, ^Jf, ^ r,
^s (even though a vowel,
j

agnttural,a labial, ^y,

v ^ h, or AnusvSra intervene) changes
a dental *^n (followed
by a vowel or *^n, ^m, ^y, t^v) to
cerebral

^t * *
'

ear

kar-naV,

'

3-f-TT^= 5WTR^ nr-nam, of men T ^ff

^TOR^dus-anam, abiifle (a vowel intervenes)

e. g-

'

^^^n, bfiph-anani,

'

'

nourishing

'

(Anusvara, f h, vowel)

^HTT

arkena, 'by the snn' (guttural and vowel);

fa<~Uj: ksip-nut,
'
J
T
<
throwing (rowel and lalnal); J|i=mTpremnS, by love' (diphthong

aad labial); Wf^i: brahman-ya^, 'kind to Brahmins

labial,

^n

Towel;

(*l H fo31o^ed

followed by l^y);

by ^n, vhich is

itself

fiR^:

(vowel,

%4^*<ar<^anam,
'

^y,

assimilaied to

vowel)

'

(vowel,

* h,

nisan-nab, seated

'

pa^na/|enany
Bt

'

T^n)

'

'

worship

(palatal intervenes);

^fr

by the ocean' (cerebral intervenes);

ardhena,
*
^r iimif (d^*al intervenes) ;
f$f*T kurvanti, they do (^ n is
foB<rpPe^ ^y
'
*) t TWT*t r^nan, ace.
pL, the Kamas
(^ n

w^aTeft*,
'

is final),

'

INTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHI

II 66

The number

Note.

the above examples,

of intervening letters,
is

be seen from

it will

In the word

not limited.

rSmgyana, for instance, five letters (three vowels, a

semivowel) intervene between the "^ r and the

Table showing when

^n changes

in spite of intervening vowels,

gutturals (including
labials (including

final

vowels,

V-

^y

aiii

*^v

e.g.

TpSp^tan-v-an, 'stretching/

becomes Anusvura before

of a root

s;

e:g.

kill

0?*^ han);

mam-sya-te, 'he will think' (Jp^man) ; also when

^s in the neuter phiral (7 1 c ; 83) ;

it

inserted before ?^s or

e.g. *4^iftK yasams-i,

uom.

{41(^1 havlniff-i, neut. pi. of

B. The dental
i.

^tfft han-

'

ji-gham-sa-ti, 'he wishes to

is

followed by

to

^v),

remains unchanged before

3. as

if

h),

^n

66. A. The dental

yate, 'is killed

and a

to ?H n.

and Anusvara,

*T y,

i.

change

labial,

becomes dental

a. before the

tive) in the

pi.

of

f|tlk y-sas, 'fame';

^f^T^ ha vis,

'oblation* (83).

r^t as the

final of roots or

nominal stems:

of the verbal suffixes (future, aorist, desidera-

two roots ^R^vas, 'dwell/ and^R^ghas,

'eat*:

*R3rfir vat-syati, will dwell' (rgr 6 3); ^iqiAFl^a-vat'

'
has dwelt (144, i); f%IM<Wffl ji-ghat-sati, wishes to
sit,
'

eat

'

b. before

(171, 5).

the endings with

initial

^ bh or ^.

(^ud in the uom.

IT 67

INTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHI

30

ace. ling,
neut.) of reduplicated perfect

caky-vad-bhiV^B*n^[

stems (89)

N. A. n,

caky-vat-su,

^wqc^ cakr-

vat.

a.

disappears

a.

between mutes;

WfW a-bhak-ta

e.g.

sing. s-aoiist of

^%

H^bbaj, 'share';

He= original catJ-s-te), 3. sing. pres.

This

when

loss also occurs

(for a-bhak-s-ta), 3-

of

(&* <*&-

cas-te

'speak.'

^^caks,

the preposition

ml

^T

com-

is

'

pounded with tbe roots 1ST

'

support

;~e.g.^?Tni

stand/ and TS

sthS,

'

'

standing

ut-thaya,

up

ut-tambhita,

raised up.'

6, before soft dentals

e. g.

imperat. of IJT^sas,

order

'

also after

cerebraUzing the following dental;

dhvam

becoming ^js and

a " s *"

e.g. ^t^TljjH.
'

(for a-sto-s-dhvam), 2. pi. aor. of

67. Change of dental

Frecejmg vovels
by a

(followed

^s

weU

vowel,

aw
t,

^ stu,

to cerebral

^ a or ^

excei>t

or Yisarga intervene], aa

2. sing.
(fur sSs-dhi),

TfTfa sa-dbi

'

praise.*

tr

a (even though Anusvara

^k

and

r,

change dental

^ n, ^ m,

fT^th,

^y,

^v) to
'

cerebral

^3

e.

^ianfied batter %

g, from ^rfXR^ eai-pis

^pjfft

aarpTmsi,

nom. pL; *rf$:i| sarpUtsu,

be. pL (cp.43, 3); from

^TT^vac: ^TH| vak-su,
*;

fromft^ gir

with

4]flfoT sarpis-a,

gftr-sa (82), loc.

loc. pi.,

*in

pL, 'in

d, 'gtands/ from ^JT stha; 'stand';

w3l be/ from

>*

fne& ^^svap,

'

^bhs,

'sleep'

from

eeaifigejres^ but

*^

mind

'be';

^tq susvapa,

^pp^ caksus

^:

he

sarpit^ (final) ;-

'

'

(a pawedea}

flfaM*i tamis-ram,

dark-

INTEENAL CONSONANT SANDHI

II 69

Table showing when

Vowels except ^f

a,

^5fT

^s

changes to
if

change

vowels,

to

r,

^n

and ^s
about tbe changes of the dental
the corresponding cerebrals, should be thoroughly acquired,

The

Note.
to

k,

^s

followed by

(in spite of intervening

Antisvara or Visarga),
also

31

rules

must constantly be made

since these changes

in declension

and

conjugation.

68. The labial

W^l
it

60 and 42

(cp.

becomes *^n

^m

remains

B i)

but

e.g.

before suffixes

3TPRT!

'

kam-yak
'

copper-coloured/ ^P5f am-la,

69.

a.

The

^ r,

beginning with

"^v

before

'desirable/

sour'; but *i

iq

TH5f t5m-ra,

*t ja-gan-van,

'

'Jiaving gone

^y,

unchanged

(from ^FJ^gam, 'go

(soft)

beginning with

).

breathing ^ h

d, before c^t, ^Tx th,

e.g.%|+ft[ leh+si=%f^r

before

^dh

also, is treated like

and, in roots

'thou lickest* (67);

lek-iii,

dhak-syati,

he wiU

dha, b lu-nt' (62 1);

burn'

^1 + ^

Similarly
dhag-dhve, 'ye anoint* (620).
treated are the perf. pass, participles of the roots fti^ anih and,
in one sense,
*fl|

muh

ftnV

'

smooth/ and JJIV

snig-dha,

'

mug-dha,
b.

^ h,

foolish.*

in

all

other roots,

is

treated like an aspirate cerebral,

which, after changing a following ^t,

lengthening a preceding short vowel,

'

lidha,

^th,

is

licked

fl

^dh to

dropped

e. g.

h,

and

INTERNAL CONSONANT SANDHI

32

Similarly treated are the roots

'

infatuated.'

mu4ha,

cany
(for

1
*

(for

^F*
'

to
+ 7! vah + ta) *tj^ vodhum
hear
to
+ g^ vah + turn) Vt^, sodhum
'

carried

(for

'

^n|+^sah+tum).

the root *T| nah, in which T[ h is treated

'
9
An exception to both a and
nad-dka, bound.

An exception to
as

^f vah and

the vowel
but with an apparent irregularity in

*R|sah,

u^ha

III 7

V dh

is

TR drh ^f

b is the root

dydha, 'firm

'

(begins with

^ d and

has a short rowel).

CHAPTEE HI
DECLENSION
TO* Declension, or the inflexion of nominal stems by means
is most conveniently treated under the three heads of

of eadisge,
i*

BOOHS (including adjectives)

la Samfcrii there

2.

numerals;

three genders: masculine, feminine,

A. *ltt*e

3.

pronouns.

are

number*:

singular, dual,

and neuter;

and plural;

eight oa***: nominative, vocative, accusative, inatruaumial, datiye, ablative, genitive, locative 3 .
k

yflaifc

""

^ T, whxA is

aad

liable to

Sampraaara^ia

o reprwoita th

Indo-Irajiian a?h,

^IM^g awi M|nizBg the foHowing doital becomes

mm

(p.

u, note

i),

k then langthanecL

ueovou

trfthe Hrrktu

which after cereo, just

aa original

grammariani, excepting the vocative,

a caie
zt * convenient as the only
1 ***
****
*re identicaj in form ei *her in the
^^.SLj
I*B teal, r tfee
plural, nmy be grouped together.

^^y??^
t,

^ tfaeaaa M

DECLENSION

Ill 7 2

The normal case-endings added

71.

following

to the stem are the

SINGULAR.
M. F.

V.'

33

PLURAL.

DUAL.
J. F.

N.

N.

1C.

F.

IT.

*U

I.

D.
Ah.)
a. J
L.

^i
The

a.

vocative

is

the same (apart from the accent)

afl

the

numbers except the mosc. and fern. sing, of vowel

stems generally and the masc. sing, of consonant stems in -at, -an,
nominative in

all

-in, -as (cp. 7605), -yas, -vas.

The nom,

6.

words in
c.

The

-a,

ace. sing. neut. has the bare

stem excepting the

which add J^m.

iiom.voc. acc.plur. neut. before the

insert

*^n

after

a vowel stem and before a single final mute or sibilant of a consonant

stem (modifying the *^n according to the class of the consonant).

73.

An important distinction in declension (in stems ending in

r) is that between the strong and

^c, ?^t, *^n, ^s, and
the weak stem. If the stem has two forms, the strong and the
weak stem are distinguished if it has three forms, strong,
;

middle, and weakest

a. Shifting of accent

are distinguished.

was the cauae of the

distinction.

The

having been accented in the strong cases, here naturally

preserved its full form ; but it was shortened in the weak cases

stein,

by the accent
last

falling

on the endings,

vowel of the strong stem,

if

long,

For a similar reason the

is

regularly shortened in

I 73

DECLENSION

34

the vocative, because the accent always shifted to the

first syllable

in that case.

the following cases

73. The strong stem appears in
.

voc. ace. sng.

Norn. voc. ace. dual

Nom,
Nom.

voc.

[of

masculine nouns

(not aco.) plarJ

plural only of neuters.

stem appears
a. When foe stem has three forms, the middle
2
-bbySm,
before terminations beginning with a consonant
voc. ace.

(^R

l^-bbifl,**^-^^,^^); the weake8t,beforeteTOinatioBs

1
e g- ^ <H
cases ,
beginning with a vowel in the remaining weak
inst. plur.;
protyag-bhil?,
praty&fio^u, nom. dual;

HWfWI

JflSINfo pratlc-^b.

gn.

dual (93).

In neuters with three stems, the nom. voc.

ace, sing, are

middle, the nom. voc. ace. dual, weakest ;~e.g. HRff^S pratyalr,
ring,,

imHt pratic-i, dual, 1OT^ pratyaflc-i, plur. (93)-

The

other cases are aa in the masculine.

NOUNS.
into two
74. Tbz* de^easion may conveniently be divided

Stenu ending in coasonante :

A. unchangeable B. changeable.
;

In

T* ; (101) oewly aU nouna with

changeable

(i).
in the

KIH

Sowe

tii*

g^Momm

k alao

to name chuigeftble stezna

the fona in which they appear aa prior

fegfewift

&e

rowel dedenflion

t*fi^or^y<rfmBtbed^

in^T

(H. A)

DECLENSION

Ill 7*

II.

35

Stems ending in vowels

A. in ^J a and
and ^5 u; C. in ^ I and x3F u; D. in ^B
:

"w

o,

a; B. in

r; E. in*Tfc ai,

au.

A.

I.

Unchangeable Stem*.

75- The number of these stems is comparatively small! there

being none ending in guttural or cerebral mutes, and none in
nasals or semivowels
(except

changes only

as are required

consonant terminations
ending in the

(cp.

r).

They are

liable to

such

by the rules of Sandhi before th*

16

a).

Masculines and feminines

same consonant are

inflected exactly alike ; and

the neuters differ only in the nom. voc. ace. dual and
plural.

76- The

final

consonants of the stem retain their original sound

before vowel terminations

but when there is no ending
(71)
(nom. sing., the
of the m. f. being dropped), and before the
;

^s

loc. pi,
?J su,

^
^

"^

in

they must be reduced to one of the letters *5 k,

?^t, t^p or Visarga (27), which respectively become

^g, ^d,
d, ^b, or
r, before the terminations beginning with 3J bh.

t,

The

m.

voc. sing.

the same as the

f. is

nom, except in stems

(derivative)"^reC.as (83).
b.

Forms

of the

nom.

in this declension;

voc. ace. plur. neut. are extremely rare

e.g.

from

^TT^-bhaj, 'sharing/

-bhanji; nom. sing.

But for practical reasons it appears preferable to begin with the consonant declension, which adds the normal endixtga (71) without modification ; while the wide deviation of the a-deolenaion from these endings
is

apt to confuse the beginner.

CONSONANT DECLENSION

TIT 77

Stem* in Dentals.
77. Paradigm ?JJR[ su-hyd, m. 'friend'

(lit.

'good-hearted')-

PLUR.

SING.

N.Y. *H*tsu-hrt (27)

A.
^*flR[* ,

d-au

-brd-ab

*J15( su-brd-a

I*

D,

^pF^

':

-hrd-bbilji

su-brd-e
;

-hrd-bhyah

Ab/
L.

-hrt-su (32)

su-hrd-i

tbe paradigms of regular nouns witb unchangeable stems

will be sufficient to remember tbe nom. sing, and the nora.

A. In
it

'

inst. loc. plur.j

ftW:

-jit-alj,

e.g. from

fa^ -jit,

^ftrfir: -jid-bhi^,

-math, 'destroying*:

conquering

f^c^

-jit-su

^R^ -mat, ?Rft -math-at,

*

*^<^

-mat-su

-vrdh-a^i,

from

f^-vrdh

^fl -vyd-bhi^

*f^^ -jit,
from

^^

Tf|r* -mad*

increasing

*^

-vrt,

-vi-t-su.

Stems in Labials.
78. Only a few ending in
declined exactly like

*J1^
BOM.

STEM.

in.

guardian, of law

^kakubh,
f.

region'

^ p and ^ bb

occur.

They are

au-hrd.
8G.

LOC. PL.

KOK. PL.

'

-gup

-gup-afc

*JH *$*:

-gub-bbih

-giip-su

Vtf&T.'

HiJ^

kakup kakubh-aVi kakub-bbili kakup-su

UNCHANGEABLE STEMS

Ill 79

Stems in
79- The

when

palatals

(^ c,

^T

j,

37

Palatals.

*^s) undergo a change of organ

and before consonant terminations

final

(cp. 63).

(^ k or ^g) ; 3(j and *s nearly always

sometimes cerebral (Z t or ^ cl).

always becomes guttural

become

guttural, but,

STEM.

vSc
f.

ROM.
*,

'speech'
'

blood

n.

disease

'

^nSrn^Hammj,
m.

LOO. PL.

UTST. PL.

^T^

THTI

qifi*i*

vak

vac-at

r5g-bhfb

ruk

ruj-afy

ru^-bhiti

ruk-u

tlt4l^

tlt^i^i*

Wlf^f*

f|4l|^^

sarara-fc

samraj-ah samra4-bhiU flam-ra^su

f^<n
dfk

f^Ef*

f^PH*

f^^

dfs-ah

dig-bhifc

dik-lid

vf-f

vls'-aTji

vid-bhf^

vi^-stl

'

f.

WOM. PL.

SO.

*
'

sovereign

r^t^

dis,

'

f.

cardinal point

m.

'settler*

'

vis,

A,

Like "TT^ vuc are declined

light,'
*

^^

sruc,

water-shedding

f.

'ladle'

^^

tvac,

f.

skin,' 1J^

^^^^ jala-muc^ m.

rue,

'doud

f.

'

(lit.

').

Like "^T^ruj are declined ^Tf^T^Ttv-ij, m. 'priest' (lit.

merchant,' f*iq^
sacrificing in season '), q|7*|^ banij, m.
b.

"

'

bhisaj,

m. 'physician'; ^T^sraj,

f.

'garland'; also ^OT^iirj,

f*

'

strength* (nom.
c.

^n^

urk, 28).

Like f|44 1 4|^ sararaj

is

declined

Mf\fll^

parivraj,

mendicant.'

Stems

in derivative

"V^T ac are changeable

(93).

m.

HI

CONSONANT DECLENSION

38
<f.

Like

fif^dis

are declined

^*^-drs,

^*^ -sprs,

seeing,'

'

touching

80

(at the

end of compounds).

Stemi in Cerebrals.
80. The only cerehral stems
is

are those in the sibilant

naturally changed to cerebral

STEM.

KOJC. SQ.

t or

^s, which

\f d.

KOK. PL.

LOO. PL,

INST. PL.

m. enemy 5

inf\pra-vrg,
f/ rainy season'

dvid-bhffo

dvffc

dvfs-ak

ITT^

TTTJ^C

WT^f^:

pravft

pravfs-ali

pravM-bhili

Stem* in

8L Moat

of the

few stems in

^h

h.

change that

letter

when

final

or before consonant
endings to a guttural, but (cp. 69 6) in
c
4
T%5 -lih, licking,' it becomes cerebral, and in ^mifg upS-nah ,
f.

'shoe' (that which

is

'tied on'), dental:

W)H.BQ^

JfOK. PL,

.ahuk

-dol-a^

-dhug-bhib

*5f:

^fSr:

'making'

IHST.PL.

&:

$&<:

LOG. PL.

^^
-dhuk-fit (62

^l

-droh-a^ -dhrag-bhib -dliruk-su

-3f^
f.

a metre'

v^k

"flnp
-lih-a^i

f-

^fcqfhr:

usnih-a^ nsnig-bhih

nS-nat -nak-h

ftrfj:

^afBr^
usnik-su

"ftra^

-lid-bhH>

-li^-su

-nad-bhilj

-n&t-su

a)

UNCHANGEABLE STEMS

Ill 83

Sterna in
82. The

"^

^r

39

1
.

becomes Visarga only when

final,

that

is,

in the

nom.

sing, only, remaining before the J| su of the loc. plnr. (go).

i or
u is lengthened when the
r is final or
preceding

followed by a consonant.
STEM.

f.

'door'
gfr,

f*r^

voice

f.

5^
f.

KOK.

IHST. PL.

dvSfc

dvar-afc

dvar-bhifc

dvSr-f u (67)

*ft:

fine:

pur-bhih

pur-f u

LOO. PL.

gh

pur,

town

NOK. PL.

SO.

Iff*
*

puTj

pur-afc

Stem* in
83. These stems

consist almost entirely of words

the derivative suffixes

^R

as,

f^

is,

^R

formed with

us, chiefly neuters.

They lengthen their final vowel (before the inserted nasal) in the
nom. voc. ace. ^plur. neut.
The masculines and feminines are
nearly

all

adjective

member; those

in

compounds with these stems

Paradigms: ^n^yas-as,
tion

as their final

"^T^ae lengthen the ^f a in the nom. sing.

n.

'fame';

ffRhav-is,

n. 'obla-

^igt^ ay-us, n. *life.'

SINGULAR.

N.Y.A.

^TJj:

yasat
i.

^npnr
yasas-5

There are no

havif

^ (67)

Syuf-5 (67)

steins in other semivowels*

CONSONANT DECLENSION

Ab.G. ^npEn

83

^1^

ffift
ha vis -e

yasas-e

I IT

Syus-e

^f*ro
havis-ab

havis-i

yasas-i

Syns-i

DUAL.
N,V*A.

^iittTl

ff*ret

^ur^ ^

yasas-i

havis-I

fiyus-I

havir-bbyam (44)

Syur-bhySm

havis-ob

ayns-oh

i.D.Ab.^rotrra
yaso-bhySm

(45, 2)

G.L.

PlUBAL.

N.V.A. ^4^i(ti
yasfii|i-i (66, 2)

"fPfft
havini-i

Syur-bhi^

"W^St
yaso-bbya^

bavir-bhyab

Syur-bhyah

yasas-Sm

havis-3m

Synfl-5m

ywafc-su

havi^-su (67)

'ayub-su (67)

G.

su-manas, as an adjective, 'cheerful/ has in the

nom. sing. masc.
^iii; simian&lji (voc. ^Hf: stimanafc), but
neuter ^fi; sumaiiat (bat
in all
dirghSyut nom.

^1$|<j:

genders).

Similarly %lff

4^

angiras, m.,

sing,

^OTIf^

usanaf, m.,

names of seers, and^CT^ua-as, 1 'dawn/ form the nominatives

(sometimes ^npfT usrfna), and
t

Ill

CHANGEABLE STEMS

85

-sis

loc.

pi.

nom.

and before consonants

sing,

WftnH

inst.

Ssis-ak

stems

(like the
:

nom.

^^flftf:

sing.

asir-bhij?,

1fnft.'3 astb-su.

c.

^faH. dos, n. 'arm,*

nom. dual

^Wt

is

B.

quite regular

pi. inst.

dos-I;

Z.

^.in

(also

in

nom.

sing.
loc.

Changeable Stems*
in the dentals <^t,

those in ?^t end in ^BR^at (also

^c;

^^vat); those

3[tfifc dor-bhih,

84* Regular changeable stems end

or the palatal

or

blessing,' lengthens its

f.

nom.

hi the

ir)

4!

*^n end

in

V^an

f5T^min, ft^vin);

yas (comparatives) or

^vas

^c end in ^p^ac, \vhich

is

(also

3p^man,

those in

fl

end in

(perf. participles active);

those in

properly a root meaning 'to bend.'

two
IR^at (85-6), l^in (87), ^yas (88) have
forms, strong and weak; those in V^an (90-92), JR^vas (89),

The stems

in

(93) have three, strong, middle, and weakest (73).

HOQUS with Two Stem*.

x.

85.

Stem*

Participles
is in

in

V^at

^P^ant,

the weak

'eating/ from

Derived not with the

with the
2
5

comprise

Freaent and Future

(156) active (maso. and neut.)

prefix

in

at

8
;

e.g.

The strong stem

i<^fls ad-ant

and

^ad, 'to eat'

anffix

is,

but from th

(weakened) root

^T &

On

the formation of the feminine rtem see 95.

In Latin and Greek the distinction was lost by normalization

edentis,

gen,

III 86

CONSONANT DECLENSION
MASCULINE.

PLURAL,

N.V.

adaut-au

A.

adant-an

adat-afc

[I

adat-6

adad-bhySra

)
':

L.

adad-bhii

adat-a

D.

adant-ab

adad-bhyal;

adat-su

adat-i

NEUTER.

N.A.

adat-i
c

a. ir^T^mah-at,
its

strong stem

in.

N.

pli

Tnahant-ah

*^ni

forma

TH^anfe.

A.

I.

'

great, originally a present participle

H.

^|f*fl

-hanti

mahat-a^i

mahat-a
mabat-su

L.

86. The stems of the acUeotivM formed with the suffixes

7^ mat and ^vat, which mean 'possessed of/ 'having/
differ

the

from those in UT^at solely

sing. masc. ;
e.g. x.

nom.

(sacrificial) fire*

From the root

On

(maac. and

^f

in lengthening the

VfM^^

vovel in

agni-m4t, 'having a

nent.)

mah (onginiJly magh), cp.

the formation of the feminine stem see 95.

Lt. mag-nrm.

CHANGEABLE STEMS

Ill 87

N.

m.*u(X|*H*^-man

sg,

*tnl

pi.

-ma'nt-alj

V, -*fa*t^-man
a*

Ul*Wc^

43

jflana-vat, 'possessed of

n.

**tfd -manti

TR?T -mat-su

knowledge* (maso. and

nent.)

N.Rg.m.'in!qit jftana-T&n

pi.

A.

ij

a.

iiq^i*^ jfiana-vant-am

THI^V^*

1fV{ bh^v-at, when used as

be,' is declined like

'UilS'fl* jfiSna-vant-ah

"^l^adat

jfiana-vat-ab

the present participle of

(only the accent remains

on the
'

it
throughout); but vhen it means 'yur Honour,
declined (as if derived with the suffix -vat) like ifli^cv

first syllable
is

jfianavat

^W^bhavan
'

'

sir!

there

is

also

ace.

(a contraction of an older
'

b.

J^RR^bhavantam. Besides
an irregular voc. (cp. 49) m* bhoh,

nom. VTTPtbhavan,

fSil^ ki-y-at,

^W^bhavas).
'

'

how much ? and ^p^f-y-at,

so

much/

are

also declined like

pi-

A.

fqit<n^ klyant-am

ftWW: ldyant-at
f^?T:

kfyat-ab

87. a. Adjeotivefl formed with the suffix T*lin

1
which means 'possessing/ are very numerous. They are
neut.)
,

derivatives from substantives in

^ a;

thus

W^T

bala, 'strength/

is weak only
^rflfUbal-in, 'strong/ The stem of these words
before consonants and in the nom. ace. sing, neut., where it drops
the *^n.
In the nom. sing, masc., where (as in all regular nthe
is dropped, and in the nom. voc. ace. pL neut.,
stems)

*^n

On

the formation of the feminina item see 95.

CONSONANT BJECLENSION

44
the

'rich

is

lengthened;

III 88

VfPT.dhan-in, 'possessing wealth/

e.g.

MASCULINE.
PLURAL.

SISflTJLAB.

X.

dhan-i

A,

%|RlV:

dhanfn-alii

dhanin-am
dhanin-a

dhani-bhil?

V.

NEUTER.

JU.

dhan-i

V.

dhani or

m.

Stems

arededined

in

dhanini

Vft*^dhnin.

fjf^min and f^n^vin have a similar meaning and

'
same way
e.g. *f*lR?|^manas-vm,

in the

wise,'

'

^l|4*l*^v5g-mm, eloquent (from ^ x^ vac)

m. 'lord* (lit.
is used as a
\

'having property'),

88,

4j4

fi| ^T

sva-miu,

substantive only.

Comparatives in t^iyajs (masc.and neut,) 1 form

strong stem in l^it^ TySms;
e. g.
J|0^^ gdr-Tyas,
3.

'

,'

comparative of

J^

guru,

heavy

'-

MASCULINE.
PLURAL.

*^*

TTWrfW: ga>fyo-bhit(45,
NEUTER,

N.A.

rtem ,ee 95.

2)

CHANGEABLE STEMS

1TI

45

Vonn8 with Three Stems.

Participles of the reduplicated perfect in
1
^T^vas (masc. and neut.) form their strong stem with ^1^
89.

i.

Yams, the middle with

C P- J S7)
'

do

to

e.

g.

^vat

2
,

T|a|^ cakr-vas

the weakest with

'

3
f

^us (67;
W kr,

having done,* from

'

MASCULINE.

N. V.

cakr-van
r-variis-am

van

cakr-tis-a

-vdd-hhySm

cakr-tis-i

-vatau

cakr-iis-ob

NEUTER.

On

The change

before

the formation of the feminine stem see 95.

neut.

of

a to

in the early Vedk period

?^t here began
loo. plur. and the nom. ace. sing,

bh, extending thence to the

^^us is the unaccented fonn of f^vaa

a c).
(cp. 137,

active
Beginners sometimes confiue this reduplicated perf. part
with the active participle formed by adding the suffix tR^vat to the
8

perfect

passive part.;

done,' ace.

&flq*Ul

by both ending in

e.g.

nom. masc.

krta-vantam

(l1s -van

QCHII krta-van,

(cp. 161).

in the nom. sing.

The confnrion

'having

is

caused

HI

CONSONANT DECLENSION

46
The

a.

participles is

but

The

From ^JT

is

inserted before the

before

dropped

^us:

^v in

thus HftrfT^taath-i-vin,

may be

following examples of these stems'

stha,

some of these

tasth-tis-a.

TT^^T

b.

which

useful (cp.

AOO. PL.

MOM. SGt.

KOM.PL.

flf^PTPl,

flftTOTO

^^

'stand'

tasth-i-van tasth-i-vains-ab tastiwfe-afc

'lead*

nin!-?an

*bhu,

'*
be*

90

tasth-i-d-bhi

ninl-vaips-afr

niny-UJ-a^

vywt

^ptw

^f5^:

babhfi-van

babhu-vW-hhih
babhu-vams-alj babhu-v-Hs-alj
?rf*prref:

?^:

-i-^ji

ten-i-vaips-at

ten-iis-ati

fW

RT^
'kill'

clPHWJ

iRT'c.

^Wft

1JV

jaghn-i-van jaghn^-Tanifl-^-jaghn-tis-ab

VRWt

^RPTPt

ten-i-vd-bliiV
:

jaghn-i-v^d-bbi

*RflV

jagan-^n

jagan-vams^

jagm-us-afc

jagm-i-vaa jagm-i.vaip8-alijagm-tis.ab
via,

ftfljrV

ft^wt:

Tid-Tan

Yid-^aipa-a^

ja

jagrai-v

know*

90*

a,

Notias in

an

(also

asi seat, 3, form the strong stem

the Boiddle in ^J

la

topped.

a.

&e

in

In the nom,

vid-tis-at

W( man,
^f^an,
sing.

van), masc.

the weakest in

masc. the final

^n,

^n

is

loc. wag. and the nom. voc. ace. dual the

Wi^oot redttplkarfswi, q>. Gk.

CHANGEABLE STEMS

Ill 90

syncopation of the ^f a of the suffix

not take place

cases syncope does

taks-n-5,

these stems are

is here avoided, though

Hence ^iwii St-man-a, hut

V^an.

murdh-n-S,

Jpfr

Examples of the inflexion of

m. 'king'
PLUB.

SIffG.

L.

a.

In the weakest

of three consonants

not in stems in simple

7TOFT

is optional.

when *P^ man and ^P^ van

by a consonant.

are immediately preceded

The concurrence

47

j-fi-i

or

TW^na-man,

v^lfa

n.

raj-a-bhili

raj-an-i-

'name*

(Lat.

no-men)

DUAL.

SDfG.

na-ma

PLTJB.

na-man-i

na-mn-I or

-man-I

TWnama

or

na-mn-5
na-mn-i or

':

na-mn-ot

na-ma-bhil?

ma-su

na-mau-i

3.

VfP^brah-mtfn, m. 'creator'

after consonant)

CONSONANT DECLENSION

III 91

SIKG.

PLUK.

brah-ma
A-

brah-ma^-am

(65)

brah-man-ab

brah-mdn-ah

brah-man-a
4. <4i^n, &ia-van, m.

stone

'

snro.

PLTTB-

gia-va
:

2a.
I.

giav-n-afe

Irregular Stem* in

tp^t^p&ith-aii, m. 'path,' has

stem, ITftf path-f for

weakest stem ; the nom.

its

Ip^p^ pnth-an

middle, and

irregularly adds

^s

^path

for its
for its

PLT7B.

g i,

due

to the feet that in the

earlier language this
1
;

the other,

"

word

P^tha-h,

fomijlg N<

in

CHANGEABLE STEMS

91

'

2.

i-an, n.

day/ takes

H^

49

a*h-as as its middle fltem

DUAL.

FLUB.

TJJjT dhn-I or l|f[4f| alian-I

iihn-a

^C^^IH, ilio-bhyam
dhn-o^i
'

3-

^a'v-4n, m.

SamprasSrana.

N.

dog,'

forms

Otherwise

it is

its

sva

4-

Lttt.

with

N.V. ^fT^: svan-at

t

V.

declined

A.

stem,

sun

weakest stem,

I.

s'tin-afc (*cu

Vftl

svi-bhih

^n.yti-van, m. 'youth' (Lai juven-is), forms its weakest

yu n| t, y gamprasSrana (yu-nn) and contraction (cf.

^^

jun-ior)
SING.

FLUB.

N.V.

yii-v5
ti-

van-am

f:

yti-van*at

yun-afc

I.

The Yisarga

member

of a

night '),

ia

in the

compound

N,V. A.

eing.,

(except in

treated like an original

and when tbe word

^CKH
^

r (46)

aho-rettt,

'

day by day ; ^If^; ahar^janah,

3
So also in Greek:

'eeriea of days.'

it

the prior

m. n. *6*j

tad.

CONSONANT DECLENSION
'

5*

T^WJ. xnagha"-van

(lit.

also forms its weakest stem,

and contraction

bountiful

'),

fl*i1^magh6n

A.
V.

of Indra,

by Samprasarana

PLTTE.

8150.

N.

m. a name

IIT 92

N.V.

magha'-va

magha- van-am
<H V| q v^ magha- van

the end of
92. The root ^^ban, kill,' when used as a noun at
a compound, for the most part follows the analogy of stems in
V^aju The strong stem is f^han (with a long Towel in the
e.g.
nom. sing, only), the middle ^ ha, and the weakest t^ghn
'

'

Jlfl^l^ brahma-hati, m. Brahman-killer

3.

'

Adjective* in

3
93. .These words, the suffix of which is generally expressed
*
by -ward,* form the strong stem in W(w affc, the middle in
1

Forma from 4J^q<\ magha-vat

are alao sometimea found ;-

The cerebxaBfcation of l^n (65) does not take place here, probably
becwaae the guttural mote immediately precedes it.
3
These words are properly oompoundfl farmed with the verb ^TOjtic,
*

bead,* which has, however, practically acquired the character of A suffix.

HI

CHANGEABLE STEMS

93

c,

^[ ac

and the weakest

is

preceded by
'

backward,' westward

*(j

or

t^Ic

in

or

\v)

BP^

e. g.

uc

(according as

TO^praty-ac, m.

n.

'

MASCULINE.
PLT7B.

DU-1L.

SING.

-tyiflc-au

(61)

pratlc-a
ic-1

NEUTER.
L

N.A.

TTOftf pratylflc-i

Tc-i

pratydk

Other words similarly declined are

BtoDii Same. WKAKBST STEM.
STRONG STEK.
'

ny-kfic,

downward '

^nffv aam-y-dflc,
,

nfc

sam-ic

sam-y-6k

right

'transveree'

'

^T

n-ak
ny-ak

'

fNJ

tir-y-al:

'

tid-Io

upward
1

ContrftctioiiB fop

would be shortened

^C 7-c and

to

f^Io

v-ao respectively (wh

and ^nc).

The apparent

irregularity

not
of the long vowel is probably due to the Samprasrana here being
If the vowel
internal bnt external, at the junction of a compound,
to
were short, the stem wonld look aa if formed with a suffix

^-cadded
^J^ann-c.

the final vowel of the prior member; e. g, J|f?P^ jn-fttK

On the formation of the feminine see 95,

From

ft^

tints (cp.

zontal'; as a noun, m.
*

i,

though no

Lat

n., it

trans)

+ ^T^ac,

'hori'going across,

means 'animal/

^y precedes xthea ^ a of the

suffix,

by analogy.

HI

CONSONANT DECLENSION

52

HIDDUS STEK.

STEJC,
'

c,

following

c/ all-pervading'

94

WEAKEST

<*M*tk an v-k

^I*^ aiiuc

ftMj

fo^viKuc

visv-ak

5c/ turned away/ ITT^ pruc, "forward/ eastern/

mid ^RTP^uvSc, 'downward/ 'southern/ have only two stems,

*HCn^ ptfrafic,
pdrac,

TTnj^praiic and

ITT^ piac and

vailc for the

^nTTi^

%4T"^

vac for the weak

strong,
:

MASCULINE.
JPLUH.

ante.

N.V. ITT^F prai (6ij

A. TTTOt, prafic-am
I.

Hi-qi prac-a
piac-i

94- 7h beginner
ptfeift with
1*

will find it useful to

remember the following

regard to changeable stems:

TW Towel of the suffix

in aiems in

^^

at

lengthened in the nom. sing. masc.

and
ac;
^f^^ll^ agni-man,
is

^R

cakr-van

manos-vf; but

^W^ad-ftn, TTBff^

amg, iasc. ends in a nasal in

all

praty-Aft.

changeable stems

winch drop H.

AH cfeftgMble steras which

H sbqyt m the

lengthen the vowel in the

vocative,

nom.

and always retain the

CHANGEABLE STEMS

Ill 05
a.

In otber changeable stems the vocative

solely in always

having the accent on

nom.

dd-an, voc,, addn,

144Q^

95. The feminiues

formed by adding

53

differs

tlie first

from the nom.

syllable

^M^l

pratyari, voc., praty&n, notn.

of nouns \vith changeable stems are

weak stem (when there are two

to the

stems) or the weakest (when there are three), and follow the
declension of
iR^t nadT (100); e.g. Jl^fll adat-i;
agni-mdt-T, 'VJ|iqn\ jfiana-vat-T

vag-min-I, H+tftsnl manas-vf n-i

^Tpfft

dhanin-f,

*lO^^H

gariyas-I

"^nft

cakrfs-i;

Bun4

raja!

queen

('bitch');

')

Tna^-n5mn-T(adj., 'named') ;

-ghn-T ('killing');

mfKR

pratlc-i,

prac-T.
a.
first

The feminine

of the

conjugation (125)

^H^ft^ant {cp. 156)

weak stem
tud^nt-I

in

TR^

striking,

corayatit-T, 'stealing';
yufij-at-i, 'joining,'
1

present participle active of the

made from the strong masc. stem in

that of the second conjugation from the

at

'

is

e. g.

WRft

<lH*T|

bhavant-I, 'being /
*

divyant-T,

but ^fifll jMhr-at-i,

^qrV

playing,'
5

'sacrificing,

sunv-at-i, 'pressing,'

^tanft krin-at-i, 'buying.'

The feminine of the simple future

3*4^1

35* ?H

kurr-at-J,

doing,'
b.

formed

bhavisydnt-i
c.

2
,

is

usually

'about to be,' ^R^*fl karisyant-i, 'about to do.

The few adjectives in *P^ -van form their feminines

f. iftqO jn
^nct -van;
pi- van (n-cW) 9 *fat,

4^^

in

participle active

like the present part, of the first conjugation;

But Wpfft

bbavat-i from ?n|7^bJiavat, 'your Honour' (86 a).

If the verbal baae, however, ends in accented ^f a; e.g. tudiC,

Dhavisy^, the
;he accent

weak form may optionally be taken, when the

^ff)

tud-at-i,

tiftfmft

bhavisy-at-i

1^

receives

* TI 9 6

CONSONANT DECLENSION

54

'

The fern,

(Truipa).

^itff

yuva-tl or

Irregular

'

(91, 4)1

^T^yl-van, young

of the irregular

^prft yuva-ti.

Vouxw with ChangeaUe Stems

'

water/ which is always plural, lengthens

for
a
in
the
^T
strong cases (N.Y.) and substitutes T^t
before

96.

i.

^ap,

f.

its

A.TOap-ab

aaa4-vah, m. 'ox

vah) f has thTee stems: the

I. "Jllir:

'

(lit.

ad-bhib

L.

ap-flti

cart^lrawer/ from anas-h

last syllable is

lengthened in the strong

in the

stem, ^V^lflf ana-v5h> and shortened by SamprasSrana

anad-ut
weakest, ^PHPf ana^-uh, and in the middle ^PTi^
(olwimilated*

fw ^Pl^| anad-u^

are irregularly formed, as

if

The nom. and

cp. 27).

voc.

from a stem in

ff.V.

A.

'VWf-

anadtih-ab

X.
^

^Wftl

L.

ana4ih-S

VTfiT

anafldd-bhifc

L. ^il^ffU anaddt-su
1

'

& *e

m- man,' has three forms, being lengthened

stem to ^i^ptimftms, shortened by syncope in

Ibe ^eafcet t& ^pwpg, and in the middle to ij^pum (with
sfcrcjflg

cp.

sHooaposiBd,

28 and 16 a)

whh the ieoond

Lat,
part of which the

IRREGULAB CHANGEABLE STEMS

Ill 97

N.

(J4H*lptSman

sg.

N,V.

(cp. 89, i)

pi.

55

y*iiW ptimSms-at

V.
A.

I*

*jfar punis-a

I.

jflH* pum-bbifr

L.

ljf% pnms-i

L.

^[ pam-sti

II.

Stems ending in Vowels.

97. A. Stem* in
2
e.g. ITfT k5n-ta
,

V a (masc. neut.) and ^SJ a

'beloved* (past

'love')

participle

1
(fern.);

of

W^

kam,

SINGULAR.
XA80.

1TEUT.

A.

qn^i*^ kSnta-m

I.

VRtf kantena 8

^TRRTT kanta-y-5

D.

41^11^ kantaya

m^VllQ kanta-yai

A.b.

^rffnT^kantat

3.

VPn^T kSnta-sya

L.

*ll^ kante

cn^il^l*
3

kSntfi-yalj.

^nTT^T: kSntS-yih
qn^iitii^kSnta-yam
6
^T*T kante

^1 a

Certain adjectives in ^fj ah, ^Tf 5

Gk. -os,

eclenflion
3

-OK; Lat. -ui,

^(T S-Gk,

-um.

V^am

-o, -17;

Lat. -a,

follow the pronominal

(no).

Theae terminationi

originally

came from tiie pronominal declension

*
no).
*
This termination if preserved in the Lat 5 for 5d (e. g'. GnalvoVi in
*
iscriptiona), and in the Greek (Cretio) adv. rw-fc, 'hence/
*
The terminations -yai ( -yft-e), -yah ( yfi-ai), -yamaredue to the
.

ifluence of the feminines in

ady&m
*
The

-I

(originaUy -ya);

(cp, 100).

voc. of

VJT

'

nba,

mother,'

e.g. nadyai,

nadjih,

VOWEL DECLENSION

56

DUAL.
kantau

N.A.Y.
I.

D. Ab.

^pit kante

kSnte

ltflWIHt kSnta-bhyam

G.L.

kanta-y-ofe

PLUHAL.
XA8C.

N.V.

kant2t

KET7T.

^TRTrfSf kSnta-n-i

A.

2
:

kSntah

kantan-i

kanta-bhilji

kSnte-bhyat

kSnta-bbvalj

kanta-su

Stenu in ^

^J myd^

'

and ^ u
8oft t_

(masc.

fern,

nent);

SINGULAR.
MASC.

NEUT.

mrdU

36 B, foot-note
<* tie tern,, in

t^wwd in MS* Gk.

i), Gfoth.

n:

dative*

u rr,o<r

-ana,

STEMS IN A, A,

98

FIK.

I,

MASC.

HEUT.

stic-au

rnrdti-n-e

g^t:

l?ET:

?f^:

mvd-6b

mrdv-4li

mrdii-n-ah

??T^

?ff^

Hirdv-aan

rnrdii-ix-i

mfdo

mfdu

uirdiv-e

^rrr:

gf^r:

sticy-ah

sdci-n-alj

^TT^

^Rf*l

?^

sdcy-im

siici-n-i

mrd-au

stice

sdci

nifdo

sitce

mrdv-&i

siici-n-e

s'ucy-ai

FSK.

stic-ay-e

57

DUAL.

stSci

I.

D. Ab.

Btici

stici-n-I

mrdu

s'licy-ofc

sdci-n-oti

nardti-n-i

4j^lH, midti-bhyain

^fi|^|f^ siici-bhyam

sdcy-oi

mrdd

mrdv-6t

mrdv-dfe

PLURAL.

A.

b'ticay-afr

sdcT-n-i

mrdav-afc mrdAv-a^ mrdu-n-i

^K

Tfr

^w*

?i^

atidn

sticlh

stici>n-i_

mrdnn

?TI

mrdnh

^f^r: siici-bhit

I.

D.Ab.

1
3

^jftW:

stici-bbyat

f|W mrdti-bhyab

Op. 97, foot-note 5.

Thin very anomalon* ending, being tbe Vrddbi

of the eteias in
^i, seema to be due to the influence
of which is entirely analogous.

wwel

^ a,

IH

VOWEL DECLENSION

58
m.

99

maybe declined through-

Neuter adjectives (not substantives)

out (except N.Y.A. of all numbers), and fern, adjectives and

substantives in the D. Ab.G. L, sing., like masculines. Thus the
or <R7fV
f. 'thought/ is *ircn*< maty&m
vSrini.
.
n
'water,' only cuRlui
vSri,
The voc. sing* of neuters may optionally follow the masc.

L. sing, of *Tfif mati,

matau, but *frf^

b.

form ;-^<.g. mfl^ vSri or *Tft vaxe ; *I^J madhu or *nJt mdho.
c. The feminine of
u is sometimes also
adjectives in
formed by adding f[ I ; e. g. 7TJ tanti or IT^t tanv-I, L thin ' ;

'

hH or

^Jt

f.

laghv-i,

T^

'light';

prthti,

f.

'broad,'

prthv-t '(the broad) earth.'

Xrr^gnlarities.

^ft pai-i (Gk. ir&rt-s), m, 'husband/ is irregular in

99*
the wieak casea of the
singular: I. T|WT paty-a, D. tfSf pdty-e,
i.

AKG. inj: ptfty.h *, L. inrft paty-au. %Vhen

or occera at the

Tbe ftm.

end of compoimds,

is Jfgft pdtnl,

'

wife

it is

(Gk.

2*.

sferoag

**T *&*&,

A.

regular (like *jf*T

s'uci).

irtrvia).

*~ Wftf slii-i,m. 'friend/ has the

ad&&*i ba *

'

means lord/

it

same

irregularities,

but in

stem formed with Vrddhi, ^raTR^sikhay

^^TTO^ sakhiy-am,

*&hj-e, Ab.G.

^f

I.

sakty-Ti^

L.

?nRTT sakhy-S, D.

^t

saTchy-an,

raT^fV sakhSy-au ; pi. N. V.

sa^hih. -At the end of compounds
id

regular in the

weak

ia the strong.

The

cases,

but retains the stem

fern, is

^pfV

eye/ ^Tftff

rfsthi,

'

'

sakthi,

*PP

sakh-T.
'

bone/

thigh/ form their weakest cases

to be due to the influence of the

HI

lEBEGUJLAB STEMS IN

ioo

N.A.V. ^rf^

I AffD

du. ^rfiroft

ksi

59

TJ

pi.

Aksl-n-i

ksi-n-I

I.

dksi-bhy5m

'

6ksi-bhijji

'

4. *| dyti, f.
sky (originally diu, weak grade of Wt dyo :
102 c), retains this stem before consonant terminations
(taking

Vrddhi
vowels

N.V.

in the

sing.),

but changes

it

to

fiff^div before

sura.

PLTJB.

N.

^ft: dyfcu-^

A.

t^R^

I-

A. f|[f I

div-a

t^TT

I.

D.

f^%

Ab.G.

t^:

div-at (Atftff)

div-1

L.

V,

N. f^i: div-at

(zci5Aiw)

div-am

IjfSr: dyti-bhib

D.Ab. ^Wf: dyd-bhyab

div-^

f^f^

dfr-afr

G. fi[^FC div-am
L.
dyli-su

^J

(A*fQ

dyin-h

(ZcS)

IOO. C. Stems in
u (fem.), according as they
I and
are monosyllabic or polysyllabic, show various differences of
inflexion :
i.

Monosyllabic stems change

^ I and 55 u to ^Cjy and V^uv

^y and ^v.

before vowels, the polysyllabic stems to

Mono-syllabic stems have the normal terminations (71)

take the special feminine terminations
throughout : they
a.

may

-am)

(-ai, -Slj,
1

2
,

polysyllabic stems must.

The nom, with voo. accent, while the Greek hai th0 proper voc.
These terminations started from th* polysyllabic rteio* in

^ 4,

originally ^TT

to

-am

-y&,

which wa finad with the nocmal

$ -yai and ZTPEC.

(of unknown

-vis, and, in the toc^

origin) to

*u^-yanL

eedin^pi

^* and

with an

VOWEL DECLENSION

60

III 100

Monosyllabic stems use the nom. (which takes ^s), polyI and ^K u of the nom., in the
syllabic stems shorten the
3.

voc. sing.

stems in

4. Polysyllabic

^1

have

no

^s

in the

nom.

sing,

'

i^Tlt laksmllj,

except
c

string,'

goddess of prosperity,' 7T*^it tantnb,

and optionally TP)f\

5. Polysyllabic

sloth.'

taiidri,

stems form the

ace. sing, in

f^ina

and

'

the ace.

pi.

in

SINGULAR.
Stem >ft

dhi,

'thought'

f^[ nad-i

3^ bhu,

'river'

'earth'

N.

A.

Ab.G.

'woman

I^J

nadi

vadhu-b

f%ra^

^ji*^

dMy-am

bhtiv-am

nadi-m

vadhu-m

dhiy-a

bhuv-a

nady-a

vadhv-a

dhiy-^

bhuv-^

nady-&i

vadhv-4i

tw:

w:

i^i*t,

^^H,

irar:

dhiy-dt

bhuv-a^

nady-h

vadhv-ah

dhiy-i

bhnv-1

nady-im

vadhv-am

V- 'rf^
nacU

1^ vadh-ii,

T^[
vidhu

Tb ipecxai feTninme teanninations in *ai, -as, -Sm are here, as in the

i dedensian (97), due to the influence of the
polysyllabic I declension.

IJI

STEMS IN

TOO

AND U

6l

DUAL.
N.V.A.
dhfy-au

blitiv-au

nady-au

vadhv-au

dhl-bhyam bhu-bhyam

nadi-bhyojn vadhu-bhyam

fv^ffc

vprt:

wt:

wt*

dhiy-6b

bhuv-o'lj.

nady-6Jt

vadh.v-6fr

nady-aji

vadhv-ah

nadi\i

vadhub

bhu-bhib

nadf-bhib

vadhu-bhih

dhl-bhyalj

bhu-bhy^h

nadi-bhyat

vadhu-bhya^

dhiy-am

bhuv-am

nadi-n-am

vadhu-n-5m

PLUBAL.
N.V.A. f%ra:

tf.v.

g^:

dlify-al^

bhiiv-a|ji

G.

^3

$5

^4^3

^3

dhl-sH

bhu-stL

nadi-su

vadhu-sn

woman,' though monosyllabic, has most of the

characteristics of polysyllabic stems in t^i (roo, 2-5): it must
stn,

f.

take the special fern, terminations, it shortens its i^ I in the voc.

it has no
s in the nom., and has ail optional ace. sing, in vt,ini

and ace.

plur. in tftis.

having been a

dissyllable.

This

is

doubtless due to

its

originally

VOWEL DECLENSION

62

N.V.

N. *ft BiA

A jf^RR, strfy-am
l^j^ta;
I.

fifltij striy-a

D.

f^ft

L-

striy-aft

Jf^RIJ

Btii-iii

strt-h,

(^ft:
I.

4^1 fit: stri-bhfk

D.Ab. ^fo*: strl-bhyAt

striy-fri

Ab.6. Rqqi;

III 101

fftriy-ah

Rfl^I*^ striy-am

G.

vO^(^ strT-n-am

L.

^ftj

stn-sd

Y. ffcstrf

Dual. N.V.A.

G.L.

foql,

f^nft

Vr

are conaonant stems in

declension to stems in

tiagmA a

-tj- (i.

gtrong stem

and a weakest

Ab.

8triy-6^.

IOL D. Sterna in

in the snffii

striy-au, I.D.

(auuio. and fern,), -which in origin

^-ar, are closely analogous in their

V^-an (90). These nouns mostly end

-tar,

Gk.

-tar or

^tr. The

-n;p,

-rp, Lat. -tor). They

TTT^

a middle

-tar,

inflexion of masc.

and

distr,

7J

fern, differs

in

*be we, pjnr. only.

In the strong stem the names of

relations take the

Guna form

(w), the &ames of agents take the Vrddhi form

(Sr).

5^e ting.

gen.

is

formed in

*^

aoc, masc. in

iu-,

the loc. in

^p^rn,

*fft ari, the

voc.

^ra,

the

fern,

in

f,/.'

mother

HI

CHANGEABLE STEMS

ioi

IN R

SlKGULAB.

?[TTrdatr-a

D.

>

U. G. ^1$^
L.

dat-iir

THlft

(H<^

pit-tbf

finnj

pitar (Ju-piter)

dat 6ri

DUAL,
I^N.A.

^1^(0

datar-au

G.L.

PLTTBAL.

III 102

VOWEL DECLENSION

64

and
*nj niptr

*.

bhartf, though

names

of relations, fol-

low ^TTf datf, taking the Vrddhi form in the strong stem
sing.
f.

IJTH^nrfptar-am, *rfn?lbhartar-am ;

'sister':

b.

ace.

sing.

m. 'man* (Gk.

nr,

a-v^p), takes the

TT n,

A.

L.

HT^nar-am,

TT: ndr-a^ (Ep, Gk.

pi.

Guna form

n&r-e,^:

^tf

Mpcs), A.

kroB>tfi in. 'jackal'

krostu in the middle coses

I.

^nfn,

d.

Stems in

yeller

(lit.

N.

if declined in
?J tr,

),

^fHt

pi.

N-

substitutes
I.

pi

the neuter, would be inflected

dhffitf ,

du.

VT^uFt

W^^T dh&tf-n-S,

dhatf-n-I, pi.

nf-bhib,

*j!WlV* krostar-at,

gf*T a'uci N. A. sing. VT^

^H?ff^ dhatr-n-i; I. sing.

like the neut. of

nir-aT?)

n4r-i (Ep. Gk. l-vtp-i).

'

c.

in the

the gen. pi. is JUTFC.

*pHT*l
the I.D.Ab.G. sing, are not found in classical Sanskrit

(but the D. tmd G. hi the Rig-veda are *f^

K.

ace. pi.

nrijam as well as

strong stem;

nrnam;

^TO svdsr,

also

^1*1 K*t, 8V&ar-am, but

ace.

pi.

>frfPr: dhatr-bhft.
in
agent nouns are formed from masculines
'
tr by the suffix |^i : masc.
fern, ^nft datr-I, giver
"^TTJ datf,

e.

Feminine

'

(declined like

l^t nadi).

E.

Stem* in

^ ai,

^t

of

au.

IO2* The only stems in diphthongs are

rai, m. 'wealth,*
m. L bull, cov,*
dyo, f. sky,' and *ft nau, f. ship,'

'

^rt go,

rai thangee the

Trot

of the diphthong to

drops h "before consonants.

YytJdhi

'

'

and becomes 'jfV gau which

r

^y

before vowels,

*ft go, in the strong cases, takes

is

shortened to

.MMl pL The ab.gen.has a contracted form

TT

ga in the

(os for av-as).

&5

STEMS IN DIPHTHONGS

Ill 102

These steins form a transition between the consonant And vowel

the normal
they agree with the former in taking
the nom. sing, and
endings ; with the latter in adding ^s in
in showing a vowel before endings with initial consonant

declension:

SlNQTJIAB.

ra-li (Lat. re-s)

A. <i^n.
ray-am

ga-m

Ov)

nav-am

ray-a

Y-6 (re-i)

gav-e

Ab.G-

rSy-1

gv-i

DUAL.

ray-au

av<-au

LD.Ab.
rar-bhyam

g6-bhj5m

PLUBAL.

H.V.
A..

av-an

HI

VOWEL DECLENSION

66

rft-bhffc

g6-bhib

nau-bhifc (wv-

TPT*

*rtw

VNr:

ra-bhyafc (re-bus)

g6-bhyafc

nau-bhyafc

.TreTH

TTR.

TRTH

ray-am

gv-Sm

^ft dyo, *sky/

is

the same as that of

(vgf *)

^5

'ftS

g6-su

nau-sti (vavcri)

declined like ^ft go ; the nom. Bing. is

in the dual and plur. the
dyu (99, 4)
;

N. *fVt dyiut (Zvt), A

dyiv-e, Ab.G. ^Y: dy6^, L.

strong forms alone occur

D.
Dual N.A. WT^ft dy6v-au, N.

(Lat. diem),

nav-am

(/3oi/)

TO3

pi.

*n*C

dyiv-al?.

Xtograaa of Comparison.
103,

i.

The secondary

suffix of

the comparative

?T^ -taiw

(Gk. -rpo) and that of the superlative TI*f -tama (Lat. -timo)
are added to the weak or middle stem of derivative adjectives

(ad

eren substantives)

^RltW
*waa;

B,d4aiDjB;

^Ptdhanin

ITT^

e. g.

prac:

*jfar suci

UTHPC

^jftfl< suci-tara,

prai-tara,

UTTIW prSLk-

\lf*ffl^ dhani-tara, ^rf*f?W dhani-tama

ft ^fl ^ vidvat-tara, ftRHfW^dvat-tamaj HW*C

|\
Tfeee

piatyak-tara, H?ff||9r pratyak-tama.

snffiiee

form thek feminine in ^T a; but

ed as an ordinal

* Ibe jrrmary

suffix,

forms

suffix of the

-wr, U*. -ior), aad thai of the

its fern, in

comparative,

superlative,

7m tama,

f;i (cp. 107).

^TO^iyas (Gk.

f^T istha (Gk. -rro), are

which generally takes Guna (and is accented).

every *wd must be reduced to one syllable by

Eoot,

9-^ minute

'
:

^00*4^ 6n-Iyae,

DEGREES OF COMPABISON

104

au-istha;

gur-tL

*J^

'heavy*: ^TC^TO^ gar-iyas,

^ftfan^ lagh-Iyas,

lagh-ii, 'light':

'

isjha (Gk. t-\dx -toTo f )

67

'

far

du-ra,

fX[

<*T>q^ daViyas

'

T^ var-a,

'choice':

*fO^H.

'mean*:

^ ^l ^t^

yaViyas;

ir^ ^8 - ^

ks6d-Tyas
'short'

111

radical syllable:

81 !

^E&

^p^

^^

"better*;

va*r-Iyas,

ksud-ra,

yu-van, 'young': ^q^l^tl,

Jpft^R^hrds-iyas

with irregular

s^l^H^^

dlrgh-a, 'long':

dragh-Tyas

'

%V*?I bah-u-W, abundant * '4(^414^ b^iph-Iyas.

*. In some cases
^f^yas is attached (instead of i^^RSC
:

tyas)

g- ^i^^l, jya-yas,
superior, W^ j'y^ha (root WTT
^1^ bhu-yas, 'more/ gf%W bhu-y-istha (root ^bhu)
'

a*

'

pre'-yas,

dearer,'

ift?

'better' (Gk. icpW),

pre^stha

(root jf\ pri)

$& er^stha; t%T

SfaRJ. ar^-yas,

sthi-r^, 'firm'

^ERC

sthe^yas.
A.

Some

comparatives and superlatives belong only in sense to

their positives
to

^facvt

e.

g.^fc^ftR^ne'd-iyas, ?rt|[tf ne'd-istha/ nearest,'

antikd, 'near'

'

kan-istha,

'older/

least/

^f^r

to

^^T

^pffa^

kEn-Tyas, 'lesser/

'

small

alpa,

v^rs-istha, 'oldest/ to

'

ff

flMT^^

^rfTO

va*rs-Tyas,

vrddha, 'old.'

JrUMEBALS.
Cardinal*.

104.

4
pafica

$ f^

trl

(Gk. rpt-, Lat.

sapt^l (orra).

tri-).
1

By

assimilation for original 1|^[ g^-^j CP- Grk.

As

first

member

of a

compound

ft[ dvi.

/5op-iJ-r,

Lat.

gritv-i-f.

NUMERALS

68

Q,

III 104

TO nava

catvSrizp&at.

40 80

^Vfl

catva-

casat.

^TET^V asta-dasa.

So

MO

60
70

)0

9TT

sapta-if.

80

^0

H(^f|fn

90

0.0

^*lRf nava-tf.

100

^00

asltf.

dvy-aslti.

mgqffl ^n-navatf.
101

^ka-satam

dhikam satam.
dvf-satam.

adhikam satam.

in -104

NUMERALS

69
'

f^TCRI^trf-satam.

trini

300 $00
s'atSoi.

try-

adhikani aatam.

1000

da&Ja-sa-

^000

dasa

tam.

satani.

sadhikain satam.

laksil (lakh).

100,000

200^00

1,000,000

10,000,000 qflfZ k6ti (crore).

In order to form the ntunbers from 20 to too not enumerated

above, it ia only necessary to remember that 2, 3, and 8 are fl[T
dva (M), ^r; trayat
and TOT asta
before 20
a.

(3rrA)

(rpcif),

(?Trf^nT^ dva-trimaat, ^*jfWH^tr6ya8-trimfiat,

f^hl^

asta-trima'at),

d 3

both forme
b.

The

may

and

WS

ftf dvi, f^T tri,

80;

be used witn 40, 50, 60, 70, and 90,

alternative designations of 19, 29, &c, are formed

the old past participle

^R u-na,

'

diminished

una-vimaati, 'twenty diminished (by one).*

necessary cardinal to this

formed

^WT-

afja before

mth

'
;

e. g.

By

N*lfqajfH

prefiadng the

participle, other alternatives

may be

'

e. g.

diminished by
B^ff^p^try-una-trimaat^ thirty

three,' i.e. 27.

c.

Similarly alternatives to xoi, 102, &c. are formed by means

of the adjective

'

J|f%M adhi-ka,

uln*^ dvy-adhikam
d.

The

s'atam, 'a

exceediBg,' 'plus*;

difference of sense in

tri-s'atam, &c. is only to

e,g.

hundred exceeded by two.*

fg^4*l

dvi-iatam,

be distinguished by the accent, these

compounds meaning K, 103, &c., when accented OB &e

member, but 200, 300, &c., when accented on the last.

first

NUMERALS

III 104

6g
trini

300 ?00

103

satSul.

adhikain aatam.

no

d&sa-sa- 1000

dasa

^000

tam.

sataal.

ram.

da-

sadhikani eatam.

200 ^00 ^f

a.

dve

TO

100,000

sate.

1,000,000

dvi-satam.

10,000,000

laks^ (lakh).

(crore).

In order to form the numbers from 20 to 100 not enumerated

it is only necessary to remember that 2, 3, and 8 are fl[T

above,

dva (dw), ^Ri: trayab (rpck), and ^BT as^L (ojcr<6) before 20
and 30 (flll
dva-triipsat, ^rf^ni^^yas-trinisat, W&1~
t^hXfC. asta-triips'at), and fif dvi, f^f tri, ^ni asja before So

R^

both forms
A.

The

may

be used with 40, 50, 60, 70, and 90.

alternative designations of 19, 29, &c. are formed with

the old past participle

^HT u-na,

'

diminished

una-vimsati, 'twenty diminished (by one).'

'

e. g.

By

^Ji^Rnfa

prefixing the

necessary cardinal to this participle, other alternatives

;

three/

i.e. 27.

e. g.

diminished by
^ifMll^try-iiiia-triipaat, thirty

c. Similarly alternatives to 101, 102,

of the adjective

Vftm adhi-ka

Ujllf^ dvy-adbikaip. satam, 'a

d.

may be

'

formed

The

difference

&c, are formed by

9

'exceeding, 'plus';

means

e.g.|f%|4

hundred exceeded by two/

of sense in

fVlfl*i dvi-satam> f^lllflH.

only to be distinguished by the accent, these

compounds meaning 102, 103, &c., when accented OB the first
member, but 200, 300, &c., when accented on the last.
tri-s'atam, &c. is

DECLENSION OF CARDINALS

in

iog

Daclemrion of Cardinals.
IO5- Only the
i

TJ(

kalj,

four cardinals distinguish the genders.

first

TpIT

ka, V.qit^^kam, following the declension of

the pronominal adjectives,

2,

two/

dva",

N.A, m.

dvau,

3.

PI

is

nfi sarva (120 b).

declined like the dual of JFPff kanta

f.fl(

bhyam, G.L. ^{\l

of

is inflected like

dv, n.^( dv
is

except in the gen., which

traya (the regular form ^ftH7^tri-n4m

Ita fern,

stem

dvtf-y-ofr.

in the masc. and neut.,

trl,

^|f*f Buc-i,

I.D.Ab. flfWT'^dva-

declined like the plural

is
is

formed

is f?|1f tisf the inflexion of

,

N.A.G. from that of the

as if

from

Vf

found in the Eig-veda).

which

^J

regular stems in

differs in

the

r.

'

4*

stem

^5^

catiir,

^tui^

four/ in the masc. and neut., has the strong

catvar (cp. quatuor).

The

G.pl.,

though the stem

ends in a consonant, inserts

sat),
*^n before the ending (like
The feminine stem is
catasr, which is inflected exactly

^?W

like

f?ni

JUSO.

tiflf.

HEIJT.

FIX.

KASO.

OTtUT.

VVX.

N.V.
tray-afr

tripi

trm

trmi

i.

Win

catvir-at catvir-i c^taar-ah

tir-4h

cattlr-at

catvir-i caiaer-oh

RliiRit
tisf-bhib

catur-bhih

catasr-bhit

tisf^hyati

catiir-bhyat

catasf-bhya\i

caturaam

cataey-nam

catdr-flu

catasf-sii

D.Ab.
tri-bhyat

b)

IH

DECLENSION OF CABDINALS

107

^&

106. m.
V^Ris, 'eix*; N.A.
D.Ab. ^f**: sa4-bhyafc, G.

(27), I.

WT^?an-*a (6

A. IHff p&Lca, 'five,' is declined like a neuter in

except in the gen., where

I. 1p(fiT:

P^lca,

"*re

asffc,

forma :

^SF^an

follows ^TPff kSnta:

(90, 2)

-N.A.

Vft

pancaVbhik D.Ab. XRP*: panctf-bhyak G.

M ^ 1 1 in, paficfVn-am, L.

The numerals

it

for 7 to

"q^ paftca-su.

ro are declined in exactly the same way.

however, has also the following alternative (older)

N. A.

-^

atf&u,

as^-bhya^ L. TOr^:

I.

TOTfr:

astft-bhlb,

D.Ab. ^rBTP^:

astft-sti

c. The cardinals
3 to 19 are nsed as ploral adjectives, agreeing
with their substantives in number and case
(3 and 4 in gender

also).

**

The

cardinals

stantives, the

case

from 20 to 99 (which are feminine), as well

a^ ^^^sab&ram, are

*in*t,satani

or in the genitive;

e.g.

as singular

sub-

either in the

same

used

accompanying substantive being

H?rt ^nftf*K

or

Catena daalbhi^ or daeinam, ' with a hundred female

slaves.'

Ordinal*.

107. The

ordinals

various suffixes

from

tha

to 'tenth' are

'first'

(for original Tf ta),

or a combination of the

first

formed with

H ma, ^ ya,

f^I

lya,

with the second and fourth (W*T

*

tha-ma, ifttf t-iya); those from eleventh* to 'nineteenth*

have the same form as the cardinals (excepting both inflexion like
'
^P*l kftnta and change of accent) ; while those from twentieth*

onward

either abbreviate the cardinal or add the suffix

WR tama

and ^THTT **& (&*r&, Lt. ocW, Gothic ahtriEa) are old
dual forma, meaning probably 'the two tetndi 1 (perluqw with relerenoe
to the finger* of the two hands).

ORDINALS
to it

The faminina of

all

but

III 107

'first' to

'fourth

IB

formed

with i^T.
1st

2nd fipfar:

f.

dvi-tiyab,

(from cm older dvi-td).

3rd

(Lat.

catvarizp-

ter-tius).

sat-tamab.

4th

flca

quaivtns)
tur-ijah,

f^

paficasat-ta~

^43|l<lltt*i?

(fox

mat.
6oth

tnr-yab,

f.

(for

6ist

k-tur-ya).

paUca-mak

f.

7oth

saptati-ta-

$Hhit (sex-tus).
lJ

apta-mafc (septi-

ekasapta-

mm).
8th

eka-saptataJti.
l

aslti-tamah.

fl*(:

ekaslti-

tamafe.

***
90th ^^fflfl*?: navati-tamab.

im^qRl^^:

eka-nava-

ti-tamat.

**

'oo^ VT7Rn sata-tamai.

NUMERAL DERIVATIVES

Ill 109

73

Numeral Adverb* and other Derivative*.

Multiplicative adverb*: ^^7^ ea-k ft, 'once'
'
one making ') ; ftp dvf-fc, twice (Gk. jM-s, Lat. bi-s) ft I

I08.
'

a.

'

(]it.

times' (for
(Gk. rpif, Lat.tri-s); 'qgrcattffe,' four

trf-i, 'thrice'
ratrfr-s)

pafica-krtvab, 'five times

1135^:

"

q^K^!

six times

sat-krfcva"b,

Adverbs of manner

b.

'

^sTT

^CT? dve-dha,

'

tre-dha, in three ways

WJW paflca-dha, 'in

five

'five

makings ');

eka-dha, 'in one way';

1FWT

(lit.

&c.

fif\ST dvi- Jha or

'

two ways

in

*
;

f^TOT

catur-dha, 'in foxir

^J^Jr
ways'; iftH so-dha,
;

ways
six ways'

'in

^JfTOT sapta-dhi, 'in seven ways

a^a-dha, in eight ways'; &o.
(cp. 104, foot-note 3)

tii-dha or
'

'

Diotribntiva adverb*

c.

dvi-sab, 'in pairs';

'

fives

by

'

"Pup

^RI

pair';
'

tetrad

tray-a, adj.,

n.

tri-taya,
'

1
;

flf^T

-t

dvay-A,

threefold

pafica radt,

adj/ twofold';

'j

n-,

pailca-taya, adj.

fivefold

^n^

i,

f.,

and

'

Stem

Peraonal Pronoun*.

(in composition)

mad

and

(sing.)

asmad

*f^

Stem

W^

(in composition)
tvad (sing.) and

yusmad

(plur.)

(plur.)

BlNGXTLAE.

N. ^Tf^ahtfm,
A.

'I'

WT^mam, 'me'

n.

^FWW asta-taya;

PBONOUWSL
A.

ftl^

disa-tayar, adj, 'tenfold';

&c.

log.

n. 'a

adj. 'fourfold';

catus-taya,
'

adj. 'eightfold'; n. 'ogdoad';

n. 'decade

'singly';

TOTO

^TJ5T

'triad';

^TOTO

eka-s'afr,

&c.

Aggregative noun*:

</.

TPH[:

trinsab, 'in threes';

W^tv-am,

'thou'

WTHtvam,

*thee'

PEBSONAL PRONOUNS

74
'

L TOT mi-y-a,

me

by

<

0.

'from me
ITf mid,

TO m6.ma,

of

me

'

WOT tvd-y-5,

D, ^|nHmrf-liyam(inihi), to me
Ab.

III 109

by thee

'

'

ipOTt W-bliyam

'

(tibi),'

Wf tvAd, 'from thee

TO t*va,

'

L Iffo md-y-i, 'ia me*

'

of thee

to thee

'

tytf-y-i^'in thee'

Wf^I

DUAL.
,

A.

<

'

mq|J(jmm, we

or us two

'

'

'

avi-bhySm,
to, or

I^^IR^tt

from na two
5vtf-y-ot,

'

ye or you two

^TTH, ynvam,

^41^11^ yuva-bhyim,

by,

'

or from you two

'of or in

^RJt*

us two*

by,

to,

'

yuvtf-y-oti 'of or

you

two*

PLUEAL.
N.

TO^ Tay4m,

'we

'

^[^ yu-y-dm

'

/ye

^n^yusmaD,
4

arat-bhik by us

>

'you'
f

^Tt^t yusmi-bhi^,

'

by you
1

us*

'from us

^W^yuflmi-bhyam,

^ you

'

^f^ yusmAd,

from you'

in TW*

^qTTf

yusmi-su, 'in you'

by the
no* genitivei

g ^bdcmin
*"*'

all,

to

influence of

bat neuter singular* of

m'

'

Ill

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS

10

The

a.

75

at
following unaccented forms, which are not allowed

the beginning of a sentence, are also used: Sing. A. *TT ma",

tv; D.G,

% me

(/wi)

te (r

Plnr. A. D. G.

B.

HO. The
=' he, she,
declension

stem
it '),

*)-

naji (Lat. nos),

*H

vafc (Lat. vos).

Demoutratnra Pronouns,
fl

ta

may

(in composition

'

'

that

tani),

(alao

be taken as the type of the pronominal

PLTTBAL.

SIHOULAB.
KA80.

Dual. A.D.G. 'ft nau (Gk. wi),

lW ta-d

WOT.

MABC.

PHI.

HBUT.

FB*.

TTT^ t^n mfif tani

VPl.tam

m: tab

Hlft: ia-bhib

^:taH(roip)

ta-bhyafr

W5 ta-su
DUAL.

D. Ab. m. f. n. ITPTPl ta-bhyfim ; G. L. f^t\

I.

a.

compound

of 7T

ta,

ta-y-ofc.
'

'

that/

is

ipl e-ti,

this/

It is

declined exactly like the former : Sing.N. TPK esd-t (48, ^?)
&c.
esa,
et*-d; A.Tp!Het^m, TCTW.ettt-m TPIf et-d,
f

H?I^

Op. 48 ; si,
Lat. is-tud).

Bft,

Horn. Gk. rofo

4

Lat. ig-tirum,

ta^-Gk.

d,

, r<J,

Gothic

BE,

'

(for rJo^o).

Gk.riw

(for T&rwr),

5, that-a

Lt-

(EiJ^. tht,

-t5ram.

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS

76

III

in

Both the pronominal roots ^T a and ^ i (which here in

some cases show a double inflexion) are employed in the declen-

m.

sion of

V^

a-y-Am, 'this'

(indefinitely)

SlNGULAB.
HAM.

NBUT.

N.
A.

I.

V*H

D.

^Hjt a-smai

aa-foa
^1^1 a-syal

Ab.
'

'"

'

a-syab

G.

PLUBAL.
VEX.

VZUT.

L
D.AI).

^VPVt S-bhyat

Tp^; e-bhyat

G.

DUAL.
N. A. m* ^fi l^Bi^b,

f.

^pt

i-91-^, n.
;

a.L.

TIT 112

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS

77

113. The demonstrative pronoun, -which in the nom. sing, has

the curious form m. f. Trtft a-9-&n, n. 1W^fC. a-d-aa, meaning
'that,' 'yon/ employs hi the rest of its declension the stem ^1*J
a-m-n, for which
airn is substituted in the fem. plurmasc.
(also ace. sing, and partly in dual) and Vft a-m-i in the

^W

plur. (except the

ace.)-

SlNGtTLAR.
KEUT*

HABO.

TJX*

^lfl*l a-m-ii-m

^-

^J^T amli-y-5

^B^PIT amu-n-5

"Tg

^ amti-smai

^1*1^ amu-syai

Ab.

a
L.

PLUBAL.
IfltTT.

1LAJBO.

N.

S(T\ ami

^
^a.
^'TOT'I amuni
i

A.
I.

G.

L.

n; LD.Ab.
amti-y-ofe-

INTERROGATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS

78

The unaccented

a.

ena

and G.L. dual

defective

pronoun of the third person, Tjf

declined in the A. of all numbers,

is

he, she, it'),

III 113

I. sg.,

A. HTF^ena-m, UTT^enS-m, H*T^ ena-d ipu

enau, T(^ ene, 1&( ene ; HIC^ ena-n, TfTtt en5IWrf*! enani
:

I. sg.

Tpl*I enena,

f.

C.

HQ. The stem

what?'

is

ena-y-a; G.L. du. Tf*Rft: ena-y-o^,

Interrogative Pronoun.

of the interrogative pronoun ^1 ka,

is

qf

^rr: kalj,

ftfiJ^

kl-m

^ift

e. g.

N.

e, g.

ka"fc,

t^RR^ki-y-at, 'how

'

^R[T ka-dS, when ?

^TT ka,

'

As

the

'

first

'

of what form

'

ftl^

'

great

N. A.

kirn \ plur.
f.

4*3141.

as well as t| ka,
Jl kn,
?

'

JR ku-tra,

member of
J ku

kirn is generally
employed, sometimes
adj.

who, which,

L. sg. ^lif^lH ka-srnin,

kani.

ki-sySm ; pl.%J kg-su, f. >Tf ka-su.

a. In derivation the stems ftj ki and
are used ;

'

inflected exactly like *T ta,

excepting that the

neuter
ke*,

HiRTT

n.

gW^ku-karman,

('

where?

'

compound fip^

H*^M

kim-nipa,

what kind of '=)

wicked deed.'

D.
114.
is

The stem

Relative Pronoun.

of the relative
pronoun

H ya,

'who,' 'which,'

declined exaetiy like 7T tar

STH6.

PLTTB.

y4-d

yi-smai

yi-syai

yd-miai

y^-bhyalji

ya-bhyab

y^-bhyalj

REFLEXIVE AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS

ii7

79

Brtflaxiv* Pronoun*,

'

US*
nom.

a.

<3f*V

self,' is

sva-y-dm,

indeclinable (originally &

may express any person or num'

ber (e.g, 'myself,' 'himself,' yourselves '). It usually has the
meaning of a nominative, bat often of an instrumental, and somesing, like it-y-m).

times of a genitive.

It frequently also means

'

A.

It

^IcHI. atmdn,

Bvalk

spontaneously.'

self/ is a masc. substantive (declined like

9jtyV brahman, 90, 3). It is used in the

pronoun of all persons and genders.

^ST sva,^n^sv4m

adjective (declined like

singular as a reflexive

(Lat. snus), 'own,* is a reflexive

^pt sarva, 120

b) referring to all

three

persons and numbers (* my, thy, his, our, your, their own ')- It is
also used (like "*|| <N Batman) in the oblique cases as a reflexive pro-

noun ;

e.g. ^Jf

Pl^fcl s vam nindanti/ they blame themselves.'

'

f*W ni-ja,

properly an adjective meaning inborn/ native/

is often used in the eensfeof a pronominal reflexive adjective (like
d.

^T sva).
Poamssive Pronoun*.

7.

n6.

Possessives are formed with the

suffix

f?

&c.
1T^ mad, ^1^ tvad,
1
asmad-iy^'oor/
mad-iya, my/ ?fa|^l tvad^ya, <fey '5
:

fltems of the personal pronouns

'

'

^V^9
'

its, their/

y usmad-iya, your ; Tf^U tad-zya, his, her,

With the suffix q| ka are formed from the genitives

mama
-

thy

and

(cp.

*W tava, 3THW mSma-k^ *my/

from m*t bhavat>
L09, foot-note a)
;

'

bh5vat-ka, your/
G-.

Compound Pronoun*.

H7. By adding f^dre,

f*

drsa, or

f^

drksa, to

bate
prouominal stems, the following compound proaoffl^

formed :-

8o

COMPOUND PKONOUNS

III 118

'

of that look

(lit.

'of

what kind'

'

^TT^ya-dtf, ^TflT

tyt Mft tjH

3*a-d(sa,

what like/
'

i-dfs'a,

t$*

wtfksa,

such

'

*tl^kr-dft*tf*T

^Tflf

me,'

&

kl-d#a,'what like

? ';

*TT?*l mS-drsa, Uke

tva-drsa, 'like thee.'

The feminine stem

same as the maec. and

of the

neut.;

tSdjk; that of the compounds in

^1f drsa

tSdpi; of those in

n8. By adding

^vat

compounds in f{^ drs

nom. sing. m.f. n.

is

the

is

WHR

e.g.

formed with ^T;

drksa

mth

^If aj~e.g.

and SR^'yat to certain pronominal

stems, the following compounds,

implying quantity, have been
'
'
formed :--?!TO^ ta-vat and
eta-yat, BO much ;

^TWt

TflfPRt

ya-vat, 'as

much?

'

much'; l^l-yat,
These are all declined

'so much,' fiRJ^ki-yat,

like

nouns in

^vat

form their feminine* in the same,

way (flFTft

'how
and

(86),

|^

tavat-I,

iyat-i, &c.).

A ^rf?r k^-ti, 'how many?'

(Lat. toti-dem),

^ft

'

(Lai quot), Itft

y*-ti, 'aa

ta^ti,

so

many*

many,' are uninflected in the

N.A., but in the other cases are declined like

suci (98) in
^jf^T
the plural.

ng. The
cana, or

interrogative

^rfq api t

'some one':

*ft^kaa

^^Tkascan^yp^rka
*Tft kapi, ftRft
.

* ka, hy tlw
cit,

'when?'
1

^lf%^ ka

cit,

f^C cit, ^T

PM^Ckim

cana, ffiqif kirn cana;

cit;

^t^ftf ko

'pi,

kirn api.

In the same manner

ka-da,

addition of

changed to an indefinite pronoun, 'some,'

is

iDdeflnite adverbs are

^rf^ kada

time or other, 'once

formed:

^T

^T^f kada cana, 'some

kva/where?' ^ mft na kySpi, not
cit,

'

anywhere,' 'nowhere/
b.

*:

The relatheprecedingthe

kat, Whosoever';

interrogative renders

it

indefinite

^f ^W yasya kasya, 'of whom-

oever/
flf*

Similarly

or
^fiffUjalji kaecit, *T* ^TC( yak kasca,
*

^p| yafc kaicana,

whosoever/

relative pronoun, if doubled, assumes a distributive

*
whoever, whatever in each case' (fol-

The

c,

81

PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES

1*0

II

^V

ueaning:
yo yat
owed by a double correlative)*

H. IProjiominal

Adjective*.

iao. Several adjective* derived from, or allied in meaning to,

either
pronoun*, follow the pronominal declension (like 7T ta)
altogether or in part,
,

other/
'

other/ Jfln; ka-tara,

many ?

'

*W!T anya-tara,

'

'V* any*,

which of two?

l^Hm

eka-tama, one

*WT

anya-b.

(of

either/

many)/

^TT 1-twa,
'

ka-tami,

which of

follow the pronominal

d in the N.V.A. sing, neut.;

^Wf anya^d

anyA,

'

*7RT

'

decleneion throughout, taking

^W:

'

(cp. Lat. aliu-d);

D.
&o.

^l^|> anya-imai, ^flpft anyrf-syai, L. ^RflR^anyi-amin

^d pi.)
* adrva, every/ all/ ^TO ubh^ya, Wfc (sg;

f.

'

'

'

'

in taking

one (io5),HWn: eka-tara, either/ differ only

instead of
$ d in the N.A. sing. neut.;-e.g. Ab. sjrva-^
D.
'

**

ftirva,

^rf^^rva-mj

^N

0.

*rve,

sirva-sya, L.
,

north/

^T5

VTC 4PM*.
'own/

^(^

TO

rf

purva, 'prior/ 'east/

W^^dha-ra, inferior/ west/
c.

'

dok*ina, south/

other/' inferior/

besides necessarily taking

But

kitlU),

**

ubM, 'bo*,'

i*

sarva-smin ; Pl. N-

west

*va-ra, 'posterior/
tit-tara,

-^^

pto, subsequent,

***<**,

^m

in
follow the nominal declension

^vi<

g^sjSm-Bmai,

outer,

in the K.A.

to

other

sing,

sva,

neut

Ab. L. sing. m. n. and

declined in the dual cnly

(&*

82

PBONOMINAL ADJECTIVES
N.

in the

*T$

d.
^
'

some,

e. g.

or

y^RH*^

^^T

r^n4

IW taya),

dvi-taya,

first,'

twofold

purvat-

'

^fiTTO

^[T cara-md,
(and similar

kati-pay^,

^BT dva-ya
words in
ya and
last,'

are inflected like ordinary adjectives, except that they

may follow the pronominal

^\u;

^j:

41pa, 'little/

'

pra-thama,
c

and

purve or

TJSf

ardha, 'half/

im|

121

N. A, n.
tj4*^ purva-m Ab. m. n.
L.
;
purvSt
purva-sniin or
g^lO,

plur. masc. ;

^q^rR^purva-smitt
^3f purve; N. pL m.

IV

caram&t or

-q^

declension in the

K.

pi.

masc.;

e.g.

cai-am^.

'

'

r^nl^f dvitiya, second,' and ^tfta tytiya, third/ may follow

the pronominal declension throughout the
oblique cases of the
e. g. D. m. n.
or
singular j
trtiyaya
(0^1^ trtiya-smai
^ffjiJUT
e.

L- *
pj.

^Jl^nMl*Vtrtfya-yam
m. only
trtfyat.

f.

or

fll *|

*$\ 1^ trtiy a-sy 5m ;

but N.

^pft^TT:
Any of these pronominal words occurring at the end of poscompounds (189) are declined like ordinary adjectives.

CHAPTER IV
CONJUGATION
121. Sanskrit verbs are inflected with either active or middle

terminations.
i.e.

transitive

called

which

(lit.

'word

Atmane-pada,

The passive
it

The active

ite

called

is

i.e.

reflexive

Faraftmai-pada,
The middle voice is

(lit.

'word for oneself).

Atmanepada ; with

takes the terminations of the

it coincides

forms

voice

for another').

except in the present and imperfect (where

stem with the

suffix

ya),

and in the third

sing,

aorist.

The Sanskrit verb has

numbers, Singular, Dual, and
tf.

in

each tense and

mood three

Plural, with three persons in each.

CONJUGATION

IV 124

83

122. There are in Sanskrit five tense* conjugated in the

:
I. Present (with imperative and optative moods)

indicative

Imperfect; 3. Perfect; 4. Aorjst (with a kind of optative

called Benedictive or Precative); 5. Future (with the Conditional,
2.

a kind of past future).

There are also participles connected with three of these tenses,

and future ; and one infinitive (167), a verbal

present, perfect,

noun unconnected with any

a. Classical

junctive

mood

tense.

Sanskrit has neither a pluperfect tense nor a sub(excepting the survivals of it in the first persons

imperative); nor has it an imperative or a proper optative of any

tense except the present There are, therefore, fa* fewer verbal

forms in non-Vedic Sanskrit than in Greek.

The Present System.

123. While the

perfect, aorist,

and future tenses add the

terminations directly (or after inserting a sibilant) to the root,

the present group (the present with its moods and the imperfect)

forms a special stem, which is made in ten different ways. Hence

the native Sanskrit grammarians have divided all verbs into ten
classes.

The tenth

retains its present

class,

which

is

stem in nearly

really

all

a secondary formation,

the other verbal forms also,

as do the secondary verbs generally (causatives, desideratives,

intensives, denominatives).

The Ten

Classes.

124. The ten classes are divided into two conjugations.

In the first, comprising the first, fourth, sixth, and tenth classes,
the present stem ends in ^a, and remains unchanged throughout.

In the second conjugation, which

maining

classes, the terminations are

comprises

all

the re-

added directly to the

filial

FIRST CONJUGATION

84

IV 125

of the root or GO the suffixes ^5 n, *[ nu,TT na, (ift nl,

n),and the
present 0tem ia changeable,, being either rbrong or weak.
1

A.

First Conjugation.

a to the last letter of

The fir*t or BhfL class adds
125.
the root, which, heing accented, takes Guna of a final vowel
(short or long) and of a short medial vowel followed by one
i.

consonant;

e.g.

^ hhu,
'know'

btav-a;

ip^hudh,
The gixth or

'be/ forms the present stem 3f|

Wt^I b6dh-a.

Tnd class adds an accented

a to the root,
which (heing unaccented) has no Guna. Before this
d final
a.

^C f

changes to

kf, 'scatter*

ir.

f5^

'

tud,

strike

'

1ft tud-d

kir-a\

The fourth or Div

3.

the root, which

Thus ifj
class

adds ^T ya to the

last letter of

accented (hut the weak form in some case?

assumed by the root points to the 1J
ya having originally been
accented);
'

P^y

'
:

is

e.g.

^*

'bind':

Iff nah,

^HS

f%*^ div,

niih-ya;

div-ya "(133 B).

^R

The tenth

or Cnr class adds the suffix

^ya, before
vowel takes Vrddhi, but a short medial vowel
followed by one consonant takes
Guna; e.g.
cur, Steal* :
^K*< oor-iya. Short medial a followed by one consonant is in
most cases lengthened;
e.g.
desire.
4.

which a

final

^kam

B.

^TRRI kam-aya/

Second Conjugation,

Et6. The strong forms are

L the singular present and
imperfect active
a-

aB tot persons imperative active

and middle

3. tbe tbird person singular

imperative active.
la tbeee forms the vowel of
the root

or the

being
becomes

affix,

is

strengthened ; while in the weak forms

because the terminations are
accented.

it

SECOND CONJUGATION

IV 127

85

In the ninth class the accented form of the affix is TT na,

or *^n; in the seventh they are respec^"

*.

the unaccented
tively *!

n& and ^n.

Ad

class adds the terminations directly

la?, i. The second or
to the root, -which in the
strong forms takes Guna if possible
'
*
1
e. g.
(* a 5 i) j
XT^ ad, eat sing. r. 'WftT a*d-mi, 2. Vfer 4t-si,
:

3-

^ftr^ti; TiVgo':

%%

'

T^W,

ltfo<<- 9 i, TCfif^tij ftfflih,

"*

%ft l-Qbi (69 5).

This and the seventh are the most difficult classes to conjugate, because terminations beginning with various consonants
'lick

leTi-mi, 3rflT lelc^d (690),

come

into contact with the final consonants of roots,

quently

many

and

conse-

rules of internal Sandhi have to be applied.

a. The third or XTn class adds the terminations

directly to
the reduplicated root, which in the
strong forms takes Guna if
possible;
e.g. JThu,' sacrifice':
ju-L6-mi, I sacrifice';
'

^tfc

'

ju-hu-mfit, we sacrifice.*
The intensives conjugated in the active (i 72) follow this class.
The evaiitli. or Rudh class adds the terminations directly

<3<l**i:

*.

3.
to

the final consonant, before -which

strong,

and *^n in the weak forms;

na" is

inserted in the

e.g.^B^yuj, 'join':

Jlfi(H

yu-na-j-mi;

|^4i: yufij-ma^.
4. The fifth, or 8n claws adds ^J nu, which takes
'
*
strong forms, to the root; e. g.
*Uf press out :

Guna in

the

4|f1fa

su-

n6-mi; <gji; su-nn^ma^L.

5. The eiffh.tli or Tan, class adds ^3 u, which takes
'
'
the strong forms, to the root ; e. g.
3!*^ tan, stretch *

Guna

in

fll1fil

tan-d-mi; n^*l* tan-u-ma^.

*. All the (seven) verbs of this class end in *^n, except
kr,
do /which has an irregular present stem ^pftf^Tk ftr-<5-mi( 134 E).

6.

The ninth

or

Kri

class

adds to the root

TT na

strong foims, but in the weak *ft ni Lefore consonants

in the

and

^n

86

CONJUGATION

before voxels;

e.g.

*t kri,

IV 128

'buy': *lMJ|f^ kri-na-mi;

pi. I.

kri-n-nti.

3. fnl<(|An

The Augment.
128. The imperfect, the
the root accented

with an

aorist,

initial

vowel (23);

'

f^budh, 'know 3. sing.

und/wet': ^ff^f u-n-t-ti,
wetted '; ^g r, 'go': *raff?T
e.g.

^T

imperf.^Rt^-bodha-t;
'he wets,

and the conditional prefix to

^ & as their augment, which, form* Vyddhi

1
^St*T^ 4u-na-t, 'he
rcchtfti, 'he goes,' Tfff^B^ arcchat, 'he went.'
a. The augment is dropped in the
imperf. and aorist (which are
then used imperatively) after the
prohibitive particle *TT ma (

TT

ITt^ mS

*iJTcvor

'

karsit or karot,

may he

not do

it.'

Reduplication.
129. Five verbal formations take reduplication in Sanskrit
the present stem of the third
the
conjugational class,

one kind of

aorist, the desiderative,

these five has certain

peculiarities,

and the

perfect,

intensive.

Each of

which must be treated separately

under tin special rule* of

reduplication (130, 135, 149, 170, 173).

Common to all

are the following.

General Bides of Reduplication.

i.

The

fitst syllable of

with a vowel)
.

is

Aspinted

a root

reduplicated;

3.

that portion of

^budh

it

which end*

^5^bu-budh.

letters are represented

cat'-;

fh

(i.e.

e.g.

by the corresponding unasdhu, 'shake ':

fl|f3f^ bi-bhid;

Gnttnrala are represented

by *U;-e.g.

%Hkam

'

by

tiie

corresponding palatals,

BEDUPLICATION

IV I3r

87

4. If the root begins with more than one consonant, the first
e. g.
is reduplicated;
krus', 'shout': fj^^cu-krus;

$^

only

f^t^ksip, 'throw': f%rfan,ci-ksip.

5. If a root begins with a sibilant followed

the latter

is

reduplicated;

'
,

stand

'
:

7WT ta-sthS

skand,' leap ':

ea-smr (m

e.g.
;

by a hard consonant,

stu, 'praise': IJjT tu-sju (67);

'

'

drip

scut,

^^

cu-s'cut

^ra^ca-skand. But ^fsmr,' remember':

is soft).

6. If the radical vowel, whether final or medial,

is

long,

it is

"

shortened in the reduplicative syllable ;

ja-gSh; jft kri, 'buy':

ft^l

e. g.

ci-kri;

TT^

g5h, enter

u;

e.g.

si-ev (67); Vt^| dhauk> 'approach

%^6ev,

'
:

wtt^

fT^kuj, 'hum':

7. If the radical (not final) vowel is If e, it is represented

^i; if^Uto or^au, by^f

'

'worship*:

by

ftft^

du4hauk.

8, Boats which, according to the native Sanskrit grammarians,

in
5,
end inlf e
ai.^lft' o are more conveniently stated to end
and are so treated in reduplication; e.g.
gai, 'sing/ 3. sing.
t

^Rt ja-gau (136, 4).

perfect

dan.
by ^ i;

Speoial Bnle of BaduplicatioB for the Third

130. ^B

and ^H

f are represented in reduplication

'

'

b-bhar-ti
:
If bhr, bear' fSpffif

^ W,

'fill

fSnifif p-par-ti.

following table gives the terminatons r which are on

the whole the same for all verbs, of the present system. The chief

131.

The

difference is in the optative, which

is

characterized

by H e in the

and ^TTya and^i in the second conjugation. It will pi-event

confusion to remember that the present indicative has the primary
some variation*)
(-mi, -si, -ti, &c.), while the imperative (with

first,

CONJUGATION

88

IV

131

and the optative, as well as the imperfect, have the secondary

terminations (-no, -s, -t, &c.).
the primary,

and the

ditional, takes the

Of the other tenses, the future takes

aorist, with

the benedictive and the con-

secondary terminations

in the active (with

many

while the perfect takes

variations) the secondary,

and in the

middle, the primary endings.

In order

to

understand clearly the difference between the two

conjugations, the following points should be noted.

In the first

ora-conjugati02r(as in the a-declension),the accent is never

on the terminations, but
always on the same syllable of the
tern (the root in the first and fourth, the affix in the sixth and
tenth classes), which therefore remains
unchanged. On the other
hand, in the second conjugation (as in the declension of
changeable stems) the accent falls
in the
tions.

weak forms by the

on the strong stem, which

shortened

is

shifting of the accent to the

In the second conjugation,

therefore,

termina-

the ter-

mination* are accented except in the

strong forms (126)
the present.
The same would apply to the
imperfect, were
without an

augment

(128),

PABASMAIPADA.
I&porfect*

Optative.

andooq).

TTT^tam

tfTema

of
it

89

TERMINATIONS

TV 131

ATMANEPADA.
Present.

Imperative.

Optative.

Imperfect.

It

i;

ai

a.%
66

tha3

ethas

te

ta

eta

Tff
vahe

vahi

eva

ithas

tain

^l<^

inrfif
1

evaM

Iv^bi

Evahai

eyatham

lyatham

ethSm(i)

2.

ethe(i)

etham(i)

athe(2)

atham(3)

ete(i)

etam(r)

atham(2)

eyatam

lyatSm

et5m(i)

atSm (2)

ate(2)

t*f^
1

emahi

imdhi

dhvam

edhvam

idhvim

ante(i)

ania(r)

eran

ir^n

dte(2)

ata(2)

mahe

mahi

dhve

i.

^m

The
or

final

^v;

^ a of the
e.g.

amahai

4tam ( 2 )
first

conjugation

bMvS-mi,

is

lengthened before

IV 13*

CONJUGATION

90

Terminations beginning with vowels should be added in

a;
conjugation after dropping the final
e.g. ^f4*<,

a.

the

first

WlT^ bhav-et.

a*-bhav-am,

The terminations of the

3.

first

conjugation, given in the above

table as beginning with 1ge, really consist of the final

+ li;

but on practical grounds

that they begin with T[ e.
base

Verbs of the

4.

2. sing,

first

conjugation take

^a of the

preferable to

assume

no termination

in the

it is

imperat. Par. (being exactly parallel with the vocative

singular of the a-decleasion).

Those of the second take f\T dhi

(Gk. 61) after consonants, f|[ hi after vowels.

*. -in the ninth class

e.g.

^Pf

*TWTW math-Sna*

But

ana takes the place of

fw

dhi;

(but ^Fhtftff kri-ni-hf).

and eighth classes, if the

u is
a
su-nti (but
preceded by
single consonant;
e.g.

ff hi is dropped

b.

in the fifth

^[

^Iflfi ap-nu-hi).
c. in

the third class JT

a vowel

Verbs of the third

5.

stems
indie,

(cp.

134

A 4,

B;

A 4, B

fof

172) take

(instead of ff hi) after

and some other reduplicated present

172) drop the

^n

of the

3. plur. pres.

In the JLtnu the whole

Meond con-

^n

vid,

suffix

ur instead of

Those of the second

imj& Par.
thk

fV dbi

of the 3. plnr. pres. impf. impv.

Verbs of the third class and some other
reduplicated stems (cp.

6.

as

class

and imperat Par.

j*g*tion rj^ot the

134

hu adds

^FfV ju-hu-dhi

'know,' and

a final

class

f^dvis,
is

Vtan

in the 3. plur.

'W a,

which end in

-hate,'

dropped, while

may do

^ *

so.

u,

I,

as well

Before

^T

r are

Tfce ocigin of thij

peculiar imperative ending is uncertain
for -lOHUt: &
the reduced form

perip. ttendi
wn*at) of the
Vedic

2.

daa

being

inffii -ni,

0. impv. ;-e. g.

and n the ending which

i-ta-na.

It

(-long nasal

ii

found in the

IV

TERMINATIONS

132

'fear';
ganatei;-e,g.lft HI,

d-ju-hav-4;
tliis

JI

jfoiy Wi-lbj-4;

W^-ya-u or fj! fy4

ending(which

plur, petf, acdve)

also

is

appears

in the

etymological])'

by the corresponding forms in the

That the (nil of

and the

j.plur, optative

fy and

not

^s,

is

},

proved

A vesta,

Paradigm
IJ2, As the four classes of the

exactly

ale, one paradigm

applies

to the fifth

first

conjugation

The same

will sufice for them,

and eighth

classes,

In the second

fiftdris has teen used for the paradigm, because

better than

are inflected

it

class

illustrates

ad loth the rules of internal Sandhi and the

FIRST CONJUGATION

to

o
H
*
tii

t)
i->

ft

o
o
CO
rt

TV

132

IV

132

FIRST CLASS

iillfi

93

94

SECOND CONJUGATION

IV 132

fifl
F 4 r ^

IV

132

SECOND CLASS

95

SECONJD CONJUGATION

^
?
S

I
I

It!

61

?3
i

II

1
-3
o>

43

fl

^s-

^a

-t

'
i

on-

K
E3

i|C
/JV

*|

*-

vi

THIKD CLASS

IV

97

SECOND CONJUGATION

IV

132

FIFTH CLASS

IV. 132

99

or

>
>

*0

100

SECOND CONJUGATION

IV 13*

SEVENTH CLASS

10 J

102

SECOND CONJUGATION

IV 132

IV

NINTH CLASS

132

103

'I

u
9

?'

fJ
a-

*^

<

r
?
g
rr "r
1

CO

'I-

TV 133

CONJUGATION

104

Stem.

XrregvlfuritiM of the Present

First Conjugation.
133.

Piwt pr Bhu ClaM,

A.

S-cam,

'sip,*

Jf

conceal/

guh,

x.

WH kram,

fWv 9ttiv,

'spit,'

'

step,'

T0 wel :

WH kram-a, ^H^TH a-cam-a, ^f guh-a, tffa

^jnrj,

'cleanse/ takes Vrddbi

rabstitutes t[i for

1^ gam,

a.

stem with

bekw, C

^ a: ^t^

'go,'

^ cha

aad

(Ok.

gi-ccha,

*p^[ y^-ccha

cate with

i :

fflTET jf-ghra,

'

drink/ ^TT stha, stand/ redupli-

ftW

the third (reduplicating) class

3^

darns',

drop the na*al:

'bite/

^J

pf-ba (Lat bi-bo), fTTS ti-stha

These verbs originally belonged to

(Gk. T-^mT-M', Lat. sirto).

T&g

(see

2).
'

3!^ sad above,

(cp.

ptfs-ya,

l).

Jf^manth, 'churn/ ^IS^saiij, 'adhere/

da^r^, VRT m^th-a, ^T saj-a.

Y^dw/see/ "UfT dhma/blow/

5*

Vf dh^m-a,

t^Tfmna, 'study/ aubstitnte

YHf m^n-a.

B. Fourth or Div ClaMi.

i. Tf^tam. 'languish/ %(9^

bhram, 'roam/ Tp^sam, cease/ ^ST^sram, 'be weary/ ?f^ ma<l,
'

*rejoice,'f^div,'play/ lengthen their vowel:

mad-ya, i^fal dfvya, &c.

?TW

tam-ya,

*m
a.

M^ bhrfuns,

'faU/ drops

its

nasal

W5JT bhra-ya.

vyadh, 'pierce, takes Samprasarana

ftiaf vtdh-ya.

^fl

^^
Jan.

WT ja: WW ja-ya (cp. 1540, i).

Sixth or TudCl&M. i.
krt, cut/ ^muc/ loosen/

'be born/ substitutes

C.

'

lup,

yam, 'restrain/ form the present

3. fTT ghra, 'smell/ 1JT pa,

4.

sink,

sad,

(for si-B[a]da: Lat. side).

!&%

fthiv-a.
'

Wt$ marj-a.^R

fl'd-a

trie)

W-^TH,

lengthen their

'

break/ f*R;

lip,

sprinkle,' insert

Kmp-a; ft

anasal :vi

'

'

paint/

ftf

rid,

find/

IV

IRREGULARITIES OF THE PRESENT STEM

1 34.

a*

T^Ja,

ch

'wish,* substitutes

^R?

1^5 i-ccba",

3- Jra? prach/ask,'

^ch

for

W^bhrajj,

^s, and ^gr, 'go/ adds

r-ccha* (cp.

2).

fl^vrasc,

'fry,'

'cut,'

^5

prcch~a\

bhrjj-a Ifil vrsc-a .

3^T

Second Conjugation.
134. A. Second or Ad Class.
i. The root 19
irregularly strengthened
verbs

'

instead of

join,*

and

Guna in the

with consonants ;
b.

JJ^mrj,

c. ^IJT

pres., impv., impf,:

3.

sg.

root

*.

*P%

vas, 'desire/ takes

is

irregularly

^M-ti (63

of the pres.

3. pi. pres. ^jfifT

c.

the

^p^han,

Wlfa

becomes

The

3. sg.

(Gk. <CM-CU), 3.

and imperative;
-dnti (sunt). The

?Jvl

the following verbs:

ha^i-ti,

** sing.

"^IRftj

as-Ifr,

impv.
it

is

inserts

^^Rfa^as-i-t.

before l^t and

^n
but

the

e.g. 3. sg. opt.

In the imperfect

a. 3. sing.

fRf!

pi.

ne-tfnti.

^th

in

JfW ha-thft. In the

h
dropped and the

2. pi.

impv., impf. the radical ^f a

^ gh

a. sg.

initial,

weak

^a in the optative and all

'kfll/ Par., drops its

weak forms

3. pi. pres.,

tfi-te

its initial

e-dhl (for az-dhi, Avestic zdT).

before the endings of the

its

SamprasSrana in the weak forms

i), 3- pi-

^T^as, 'be/ drops

mrj-inti,

Guna throughout

weakened in

The

s-yat

take Yrddhi

^HXT i-se-r-ata.

3.

weak forms

r before the terminations in the 3. plur.

s^-r-ate, JKiK+ise'-r-atam,

^ft

rnfa

down,' Atm., takes

forms, besides inserting

b.

^u

tflRi yafr-mi, but i*ti^*^ a'-yav-am,

(cp. 63), 3. pi.

'lie

fli,

other roots ending in

all

strong forms before terminations beginning

'cleanse/ takes Vrddhi instead of Guria: 3. sing.

^TrfS map-ti

3- S 6-

the following

in

^ yu,

a.

take

Samprasarana

105

is

^rf% glin-inti, TT^Tglm-^ntii, ^ii^i-glm-an.

impv.

is

^rff ja-h

instead of tiff" gha-hf).

(for

^ff

jha-hf, with palatalized

IV 134

CONJUGATION

106

A vowel or semivowel is irregularly inserted in

3.

ing verbs

the follow-

A V^an,

'

breathe/ Sf^jaks, eat/

^[ rud, 'weep/ ^^s'vas,

'

breathe," ^l^svap/ sleep/ insert^i before terminations beginning

with consonant? except

T^t of the

rud^nti,

tl

l^y

^^ i*^ rud-yam
4.

bat fj

3. sg. impf. Par. ;

and

'praise/

e. g.

^is,

e.

tm

impv.)

- tW *i-f

r6d-i-mi, but ^[f^T

*lO<^1 d-rod-I-t

'rule/ both Atm., insert

^s

and

tft<*

e,

^dh

(I.e. 2.

A Ti

consonants :

preceded

t^P-

nd

by^rfV

inftf*T brfv-I-mi.(but

TO:

adhi, 'read'

^^tT adhl-y-,?,

Ifljy ahd\^aiy r-pres. sg. i.

"dhwe-J impf. Bg.I 1 'W0f?radh y
.tfi-y.i, 3

2.

^V^%

.^WT:adhy.j.thab.
The replicated verb.
fWTO>.kss/shine/
ja-ks

(fa

JMghW^from

ghas), 'eat/

ja-gr,

!). ^T^Tdari-dr5 (intensive of j^T drS,

Aa

aocoMtedverbs of the second

ttadm taking^**

'wake' (intensive

rnn

'

'),

be poor/

^^ ^ ^ ^_.^ ^ ^ ^
class, follow

in the
3. pi. impf.
3- pi-

impf.

g. pi.

i^i-dhve;

(Atm. only), resolves |ji

(augm. a+i) in the impf. before vowels

ai

into

4.

or

^bra/speak/ inserts ^1 in the strongforms before terminabeghmingjfith

in

^ a before the ^s and

^tf^fo

impf. 3. sg,

before terminatioM
beginning with

pm. and

or

those of the

sg.zf^nfir dan

^^; Jjaks-uh.

IV 134 IKBEOULAEiriES OF

Kn

B. Third or
'

place,' use

Claw.

62 b) becomes

<VTfiT da-dha-mi, but du. i .

The

i.

^T

dhfi,

^^ dhat before ^ t and ^tli

^C dadh-vab,

2.

VW: dhat-tlufy.

sg.impv.Par.is ^ffc de-hf (for da-z-dhi) and

2.

VT

and

da, 'give/

107

dad and ^V^dadh as their stems in the weak forms,

(against

^X^dadh

THE PRESENT STEM

^ffj dhe-h(

(for dha-z-dhf).

a.?T
i

mS, 'measure,' and

both Aim., have

mi-mi and f^fl ji-hl as their present stems,
dropping the
before vo^eh
i.
2.
prea. sg.
^f^ jf h-e, fWf^ jfhl-se, pi. 3.

fT

ha, 'depart,

jih-ate

impf.

sg.

i,

^rftrff

2.

tf-jih-i,

'

*.

^T

pi. 3.

ha, 'abandon,' Par"., has

dropping f^I before vowels and

du. <*^)n; jahl-tab,
pi.
jahl-hi

opt. r. sg.

^j^jahi

^y:

3. sg.

in

the

weak

^nTrfTT

^IfRl jah-ati; impv.

2.

forma,

jtfha-ti,

but

W^ff

sg.

*ffTT*l jab-yfim.

C. Fifth or 8u Cla0.
u before
^v or 3F m

i.

Boots ending in vowels

may drop

or
2.

Boots ending in consonants change ^5 u to

Hm^Pfl sak*nnv-dnti.

VT

uv

before

vowels :
3-

^J
D.

ru, 'hear,

^
Seventh

Ir-nu and

or

break,'

na

ff^ hirns,

and
^[ dhu, 'shake/ form the present stems
dhu-nu.

Bndh ClaM.

^rer^afli,' anoint,' ifUJbhaflj,

'injure/ drop their nasal before inserting if

^iprfalj a-ntf-j-mi, i^Rt| bha-ntf-j-mi, ffTftr hi-na-K-mi.

'
B. Eighth or Tail Clue.
kr, do/ takes ^<t kr-6 a*
its strong stem, and as its weak
J^ knr-u, the^ u of which must
:

be dropped before

^ m,

f$

l^y,

kuru-that; but
kur-va^,
Other verbs of this class may

^v:

^tft

kav6-mi,

J^r:

J^: kur-m^; f^T^kiir-jiini.

drop the

^u

before

^v and H m

IV 135

CONJUGATION

108

When compounded with the prepositions t|f^ pari

kr has an initial Js:
and CT^sam, the verb
^R,jd pri-

as in the fifth.

skrta,

This *J>

'adorned/ ^RJTCf sani-skrta, 'put together.'

ia

not original.

Ninth or Kri Class,

P.

i,

fa dhu-na-mi,

<J*ttfij

Jfl jna, know/ and 3T^ grab, seize/ ace shortened

to 3TT ja

^lu,

pu-na-mi, <j*uf*f

'

^Hlfif

and 5J5 grh :

3.

*j*l

lu-na-mi.

'

2.

pu/ purify/

^dhuV shake/

'cut,' shorten their vowel:

ja-na-mi ; *^rftf grh-ija-mi (65).

"^l^bandh/ "bind/ and ?f^manth/ churn/ drop the nasal

qmfo badh-na-mi, Ml|lfi|

math-ni-mi.

The Perfect Tense.

I35*

is formed either by reduplication or periBoots follow the former method, derivative verbs

This tense

phrafltically.

(chiefly causatives) the latter.

prosodically long

initial

There are also four roots with a

vowel (140 a t i) which take the peri-

phrastic perfect.

Bides of Reduplication.
i.

^B

r,

V are represented by ^f a
W kr, do -qi< ca-kar-a;

^[ r,

syllable;

ta-tar-a;
2.

in the reduplicative

'

e. g.

'

':

jjnklp,

tf,

'

cross

'be able':
4

Initial^ a or ^ffS becomes ^BTa;

e.g.

^^ ad, 'eat ':

"^H^ap, obtain*: UIH ap-a (cp. 1400, i).

Roots beginning with ^ i contract ^ i -f ^ i to f^I; but if
the radical
i takes Guna orYrddki,
is inserted between the
ad-a;
3.

^y

rednplicative syllable and the root;

^g:

ff-tqt (for i-is-ufc),

but

i. sg.

e.g.

4. Eoots beginning with or containing

to

^^if,

'desire/ 3, pi.

f^f i-y-eVa.

^ ya or ^ va,

SamprasSrana (cp. 137, 2c), reduplicate with

and

and

liable

^ nr

BEDUPLICATED PERFECT

IV 136

*Rx yaj,

'

sacrifice

*
:

^ui i-yaj-a

ICK)

*P^

'

speak

vac,

^4rr

n-vac-a.

The angular

136*

singular active present

perfect active is strong, like the

and imperfect, the root being accented;

the remaining forms are weak, the terminations being accented.

The endings

are the following

PAKASMAIPADA.
DUAL.

PLU&AI*

JLTHANEPADA,

3.

^Ti-J^

^flftate

TJ^

a.

The terminations with

connecting vowel

initial

consonant are adde4 with the

except in the eight verbs

omitted.
In

The
Par.

2. sg.

3. pi.

it is

Atm.

reiains the

omitted by

many

^i

^ i,

1^

i,

do,'

must be

even in these verbs.

is

most of those

^ n.

In these two dual forma ^F

the two endings

'

other verbs also, and

optional in verbs ending in "^T 5, as well as in

ending in

]f dru,

W kr,

sni, *flow/
'run/ 1J sru, *hear,' ^[ stn, 'praise/
where it
vr,
'choose/
sr,
bhr,
"hear/
'go/
^
^

ur haa been borrowed from the

V?^ thur and 7T^ tor corresponding to the

and Tf^tas.
This ^ i was in origin probably the reduced form of the

3. pi.,

a. 3, da. pros.

^thfts
1

roota like

^T da,

'

give/ and became the

necting vowel in other verbs.

starting-point of

final TflT

a of

as a con-

CONJUGATION

IV 137

The Strong Stem.

Short vowels followed "by a single consonant take Guna
*
'hout the singular
e. g.
wish : lji\ *~Y~^
^fH^ is,
'

idh,'wake': ^J*ftbu-b6dh

vowels take Vrddhi or Guna in the

tnal

in the second,

TO i-y-ay-a
a

W kr,

but^ft^jiv,

'

do

ca-k4r-tha

person singular,

Vyddhi only in the third;

<4| i-y-y-a

or

first

3.

*1<1K ca-kar-a

^ft

ca-kar-a.

e.g.

^^T i-y-^-tha
or ^%^

i.

2.

'live':

i,

3.

'go*

^4l^(

ca-k^r-a

edial "V a followed by a single consonant takes Vrddhi in

id optionally in i.;
e.g.^*^han, kill* : I. ^Cfc||! jaghan-a
'

irjaghto-a, 3. BPSTPI jaghan-a.

ending in *Kf a

ots
Bg.,

and may retain

(or

diphthongs

136 a)
dadha-iha
<^V4(U|

dha, 'place*

dadh-i-tha.

ff

hva or

i(cp.

I. 3.

^ hve,

?[Vt da-dhu,

2.

'

call,' is treated

as Jf

29, 8) take ^St

"^HTa before "^Ttha in 2. sg. (cp.

hu

3. ag.

^^i*^

54^3)Tlie

Weak

Stem.

.
In roots containing the vowels ?, u r, the radical
e remains unchanged, except ly Sandhi
e. g.
'3*^
bu-budh-i-ma
kr ^BOT ca-kr-md
stu
t

3re terminations
led
iy.

beginning with vowels

by one consonant become

"^T^

w;

nd ^T^ar;

while

u,

gr

u,

e.g.M^ nT/lead
'

r,

^[

final ^i, i^T,

^H r

^y, ^ r, if by more than

and ^[ f alwaya become

*:

f%^:

do '

ni-ny-tit
rZ

fBf

ca-kr-i1fc

sri,

str,

IV

REDUPLICATED PERFECT

137

n<a^

strew*:

kf, 'scatter':

radical syllable
(e. g.

^1

V a or

a final "HT

a,

the

weakened.

is

Va

which

*. Roots in

consonant

ca-kar-tii.

In roots containing a medial

a.

^Jt yu-jnav-tit

ta-star-ub; ^Jyu, 'join*:

T|Q^?

III

is

preceded and followed by a single

initial con-

and which reduplicate the

tf^ pat),

sonant unchanged (this excludes roots beginning with aspirates,

gutturals, and for the most part ^v), contract the two syllables
1
one with the diphthong T[ e (cp. Lat. ffcc-io, fec-i)
This contraction takes place even in 2. sg. Par. when
tha is added with ^ I

to

(the strong form being used

'

e.g.

1|^ pac,

cook

tha), 3. pi. t}^;

2.

is

added without ^i);

sg.^ifo^

pec-i-th

MH*!^

(but

papa*k-

pec-uk; 71^ tan, 'stretch*: ?tf*W ten-i-th,

'

b.

when ^T tha

'

^f^jaa (139,

2),

be born,* and four roots with medial 'W a

beginning with gutturals, viz. 1^*^ khan, 'dig,* ^TF^gam, *go,*

*
^rf^ ghfis, eat," ^p^ ban, kill,' weaken the root by dropping
'

the radical vowel:

ja-gam-a, but

9|JJj: ja-gm-il^

^WPf ja-ghan-a,

f^vap,

l^yaj,

^J^ grah,

'sacrifice,'

c^\^vyadh,

'pierce,'

seize/ take Samprasarana.

In the

u-vac-a, but pi.

^T

ii,

j-tSb (for i-ij-iSt)

;

Tfcia

weak

f^

vah, 'carry';

^p^

svap, 'sleep,'

first five

in the sixth f; i-f ^

^T^ uc-tib

c).

'strew,' ^R^vafi, 'dwell,'

C
( P- 135. 4) contract to

133

5|V|liJ ja-ghas-a4 but

but

'

ja-jn-e'; 3. sg. Par.

f^

vad, 'speak,'
also

Atm. ^T%

134, 2
W^l ja-ghn-tib (cp.
*
Five roots beginning with *f va, viz.
vac, speak,*

ja.kf-iib
c.

3. pi.

3. sg.

(for u-uc-tifr)

^UH eu-svap-a

i
;

to

^ u-f-^ u

^1:

^^l^

(67),

3. sg.
i

but

HIIf ja-grah-a, but

vowel spread from contracted forms like sa-z-d (Avestic hazd),

of Bad, 'sit' (z becoming e; op. 134, 2 & and

perfect ateni
I).

d.

IV

CONJUGATION

112

Roots ending in Iff a drop

optionally in

2. sg. Par. (see

1360

it

in all the

138

weak forms, and

an'd 138, 3).

Paradigm* of the Reduplicated Perfect.

'

138.

i.

g^ tnd, 'strike

strong stem

^fitf tu-t6d

weak

TJTf^

tu-tiK

PARASMAIPADA.
tu-t6d-ft

tu-tud-i-va*

Ttu-to'd

tu-tud-^thub

tu-tud-i-ma*

tu-tud-a"

tu-t6d-a

^
tu-tud4the

tu-tud4-dhve

gg^l%ti]-tud4te

PAEASMAIPADA.

ilMANEPADA.
r.

ca-kr-vihc

ca-kr^the
ca-kr^te

Lat

tu-tud-i.

ca-kr-dhve'

3.

REDUPLICATED PERFECT

IV

dhS, 'place

38

strong 3^*1 da-dha;

PAEASMAItADA.

^rre

da-dh-i-ma

da-dh-i-va

da-dhiu
da-dha-tha

1
[t

da-dh4u

;:

^1

da-dh-a*thufc

da-dh-a

da-dh-a*tulj

ATMANEPADA.
da-dh-i-mihe

da-dh-i-vdhe

da-dh-i-dhv6

^rSf da-dh-athe

dardh-i-f e

da-dh-ir^

da-dh-ate
'

lead'

4. v(\ ni,

ni-n,

stron

Wt ni-nii

weak f*R\ ni-m.

PABABMAIPADA.

[I

ni-ny-i-va

f*tf<l*t ni-ny-i-ma

ni-tiy-athui

f^W ni-ny-i

p ni-ny-dtu^

f*f[*

ni-ny-iil>

ATMANEPADA.
ni-ny-i-vahe

'

stu,

'

praise

strong

f*lP*l^ ni-ny-i-m^he

ni-ny-athe

t'ff^rSt ni-ny-i-dhve'

ni-ny-ate

Pl(*l\

tu-st6 r

tu-stau

ni-ny-ir^

weak ?JJ tu -^ u>

PARASMAIPADA.
g5*T tu-stu-m4

tu-stu-ya
tu-stu-v-dthulj

tu-stu-v-itut

j:

ATMAITEPABA.

35% tu-stu-v-e'

3S^ tu-stu-mtfhe

tu-stu-v^he
tu-stu-v-athe
tu-stu-v-ate

Or
Or

ni-ndj-i-tha.

Or

ni-na^y-a.
tu-afciv-a.

CONJUGATION

114

6, fl^tan, 'stretch':
strong

IV

fl?Ftta-taX TflTPt k-tin;

138

weakft^U

PABASMAIPADA.
f

ten-i-vd

^fi|4f ten-i-md

~T ten-tf
ATMANEPABA,
Ttf'rt^ ten-i-vihe
2.

ten-i-ma*he

^fT^ ten-athe

3-

%TI?t
7.

ten-ite

'Rgam/go':
PARASHAIPABA.
gm-ivtf

ja-gm-alufc

ATMAKBPADA.

^'fl^ ja-gm4te
'speak': strong

B^u-v^

PAEASMAIPADA.

weak

IRREGULAEITIES OF THE PERFECT

*39

115

Irregularities.

139- i. JTO^bhaj, 'share/ though beginning with an aspirate,

bllows the analogy of the contracting verbs with TJ e (137, 2 a)
J- .eg- ^WTO ba-bhaj-a, but 3. pi.
5f^J bhej-rifc. Similarly TT^
:

'shine' (medial 5), and optionally ^R^tras, 'tremble' (two

*
'
nitial consonants), and
bhram, wander (initial aspirate,
wo consonants) : 3. sg. A/^8t rej-e ; 3. pi. P. fl^^j? ta-tras-ufr
>r
%^j: tres-ub *W*j: ba-bhram-ut or 9[*p bhrem-ub*aj,

W^

a.

^fHyam,

'reach,'

and ^P^vam, 'vomit/ though beginning

vith^Tyaandfva,donottake SamprasSrana, but follow 137, 2a:

%|% yem-^ ; ^TTW va-vam-a, but %^:

rem-ufc \ -while ^^vas, 'wear/ Atm., does not weaken the root
t all
q4tl va-vas-e.
&T*lr*f ya-yama, but

3. t'T^ vid, 'know/ 'forms an unreduplicated perfect with

present meaning :

%^ ve'd-a, *I know

'

(Gk. o?da, Germ, weiss),

vid-mtf

wissen),

(id-/**^,

'

'

'

^WT

f^

han,
impel/
kill/ revert to their original guttural in the radical syllable

4. t%T

ci,

gather/ ft[

ji,

conquer/

fif hi,

^ITO

ci-kay-a,

a-glxan-a
5.

^R^

.ual pi.:

fVITO

ji-gay-a,

f^^N

ji-glifly-a,

^TT*f

(cp. 137, 2b).

ah /say/

^HIW

is

defective, forming only 2. sg.dual

at-tha,

and

3. sg.

^RTf ah-a; "Wf^* ah-dthub,

6. ^P^arps, 'reach/ reduplicates with the syllable ^HP^5n, in

rhich the radical nasal is repeated with the initial vowel (cf. Gfc.
or. inf. /y-yK-iv)

a the weak forms

n-as-ire.
*

praise

on the other hand, the radical nasal

3. sg.

P.

1!^!

is

dropped

an-tfms'a, 3. pi* i.

The analogy of this ^erb

3. sg. ^|i^l an-arc-a.
la

is

followed

by ^P

arc,

^bhu,

7.

with^ a and

^
^

IV 140

PERIPHRASTIC PERFECT

H6

of reduplicating
'be/ has the double irregularity

retaining

its

*fu throughout

Gk.*-0W<)

(cp.

bft-bh*-v-a

*$f* ba-bhu-v-i-va*

ba-bml-tha

l^m* ba-bhu-v-iithub

^fiW ba-bhu-v-i
*#* ba-bhu-v-4

ba-bhu- v-a

Periphrastic Perfect.
form their perfect
140. The verbs which cannot reduplicate,
in
the
accusative, ^U*< am,
by making an abstract feminine noun
'

and adding to this the reduplicated perfect of JK kr, do/ ^T^. as,
This formation started. with the employ'be, or 3bhu t 'be/
1

ment of the transitive verb ST

cakara/he did going/
the periphrastic perfect

^BTT gamayarn

kr, e.g. *l*1*li

Le/he
is

did go'; but in classical Sanskrit

other
usually formed with ^if^ae, the

The

two auxiliaries occurring only exceptionally.

perfect

is

periphrastic

^RT

almost entirely limited to the derivative verbs in

aya (tenth class, causatives, and denominatives)

*?TO bodbayam

asa, 'he

awakened*'

e. g.

Wl*^r

Hardly any examples of

desideratives or intensives are found in this tense.

&

The

following are the few primary verbs taking the peri-

phrastic perfect:
i.

four roots beginning with a prosodically long vowel

'

as,

it/

l^ik?,

see/

^f^ujjh,
r

ftf as-ain cakre,

a-

the reduplicated roots

^TR

'

ca-kaa,

*&wake (properly an intensive, 134

Vfl?;i*IW jagar-Sm

3- the roots

bhr.'bear/ and, in the Epics,

'

fw^f

shine/ and

A 4) :M*l*

k5a-Si|i cakSra,

'call/ optionally:

"^FJ..

he sat/

'

ji-gr,

'

forsake/ TJ^edh, thrive

asa.

^f

nT/lead/ and

bibhar-am babhuva or

IV

-AORIST

PERIPHRASTIC PERFECT

I4i

ha-bhar-a, 'he "bore';

'

ni-nay-a,

he brought

117

fa^lRTRTTO (a-)nayam

'
;

asa or

4|W|4! hvay-am aea or

ju-hav-a, 'he called.'

Paradigm of the Periphrastic Perfect.

PARASMAIPADA.
bodhayam

as-a

bodhayam

bodhayam 5s-i-ma

as-i-ya

bodhayam

as-i-tha $<r-6a)

bodha^m as-athu^ bodhayam

bodhayam

as-a

bodbayam as-atut

as-a

bodhayam Ss-nh

Aorist.
141. There are two kinds of aorists in Sanskrit, as in Greek.
The First is formed by inserting a sibilant between root and

termination, the Second

by adding the terminations to the root

with or without the connecting vowel ^( a. Both aorists take the
augment (which is accented) and the secondary terminations.
There are four forms of the First Aorist, and three of the Second.

Pirst AoriBt.
B. The first form is made by adding to the augmented root
the suffix ^1 ia, andis inflected like an imperfect of the first

conjugation (-bhava-t)

except in the Atm. x. sg., 2. 3. dual

(where it follows the hnpf. of f?^dvis). It is taken by only a

few roots ending in
h (which become
k before ^s:
and
u, or ^U r, which
63 6 ; 69 a), and containing the vowels ^ i,

^s

remain unchanged;
e.g. f^^ dis, 'point': 3. eg. ^if^^v.
This
form
a-dik-^a-t.
corresponds to /the Greek First Aorist
,

Lat. dixi-t).

n8

FIRST AOBIST

IT

142

PAHASM AIPAD A .
a-dik-s-am

tf-diksa-va

a*-diksa-ma

a-dik-sa-b

i-diksa-tam

^-diksa-ta

*-dik-sa-t

a-diksa-tam

^-diks-an

2.

^rf^^Rf

^^1,
ATMANEPADA.
4-diks-i

3-

-diks3-vahi

a-diksa-dhvam

a*-diksa-thSk

tf-dikfl-atham

^ll^^n

-^f^^ in i*^

^f^^^i

^-diks-atam

^-diks-anta

the aorist of

^duh, 'milk/

a*-diksa-ta
A. Similarly inflected is

of which

a'-diksS-mahi

is

rf-dhuk-sa (S5) :^-P*ar.

the stem

i. eg.

Atm. ^raf^ a-dhnks-i.

The other three form* of the

Firet Aorist-are

by adding to the augmented root the suffixes

-i-f reapectively, and are inflected like

made

l^i-f, ftW
imperfects of the^

veeoad conjugation
Piwr,

(4-dves-am).

only, by a few roota ending in

throughout.
otfeer

^f

The sis-form is used, in the

^f a, which remains unchanged

The s-fonn and inform

vowels than

B,

are used

5,-or in consonants;

by roots ending
both have

in

Vrddhi

thitmgbout the Parasmaipada (a medial Towel has

only Guna
the is-fom) and Guna
throughout the Itmanepada (a medial
wwel and final
r remain unchanged in the
All
s-fonn).
three forma have the
peculiar endings f^ia,
it in the
a. 3.
amg. Par., and must take
ur ID the 3. plur.

IV

FIRST AORIST

143

143-

i.

Second or s-form.
Til,

an example of a root
ending in a vowel :

'lead ,* as

PARASMAIPADA.

2.

a'-nai-s-am

a'-nai-s-va

a'-nai-s-ma

^*ln:

^ft&9^

^ftr?

a-nai-s-Di

a-nai-a-tam

a-nai-s-ta

a-nai-e-tam

a'-nai-s-uli

ATMANEPADA.
v ^-

r.

d-ne-s-i

i-De-s*vahi

a-ne-s-mahi

2.

a-ne-s-atbam
v

3-

a-ne-s-atam
a.

ftf^

consonant
i.

chid, 'cut

:-

off,'

^-ue-s-ata

as an example of a root ending in a

PAKASMAIPADA.

^R^W^

V%7^T

^^7^1

a"-cchait-s-am

^-cchait-s-va

6-cchait-s-ma

a-cchait-s-h.

^-cchait-tam

a-cchajt-ta

a-cchait-s-It

d-cchait-tom

a-cchait-B-ui

2.

3-

ATMANEPADA.
a-cchit-fi-i

a-ccnit-s-vahi

a-ccMt-s-mahi

a-cchit-thah

a-cchit-s-atham

a-cchid-dhvam

i-cchit-ta

a-cchit-s-atam.

a-ccblt-s-ata

2.

a.

'

ending in ^B

do,' as

kr,

,TOTra?:
r-s

-i,

TOW:

similarly inflected

r, is

a*-kar-s-itu

Par.

TfaTnil^-kar-B-Tt,

two forms do not properly belong

borrowed from the second form of the

&c.

The

a-ky-thab, TOfl rf-kf-ta, &c.

last

is

* v *44

FIRST AORIST

120

the s-aorist, "being

to

which

root aorist (148)

not otherwise inflected in the Atm.

Irregularities of the s-form.

144. i. Before the suffix ^s
hecomes Anusvara (cp. 66
T^

final radical (a)

A 2)

e, g.

^n as well

Vfaff a*-mam-sta,

from tFp^man,
'

ram, be glad

hecomes c^t

think,* as well as

'

(op.

42

B i)

(b)

^L-ram-sta,

Wijil

in the verb

^RTfltn^ a- vat-sit (66

as

from

T^

'

vas, dwell,*

B i).

^^dhvam (before which the ?J,s of the

aorist is always lost) becomes W^dhvam when the ^s would
have been cerebralized (cp. 66 B 2); e.g. W*l<j8*(, d-ne-dhvam
2.

The

termination

^TOJt drkr-dhTam (for A-kp-s-dhyam).

3. ^T da, 'give/ VT dh5, 'place,' W\ Btha, 'stand' (which
takes the second aorist in the Par., 148), weaken their vowel to ^i
(for

d-ne-s-dhvam),

(cp.i36

note2) before the terminations of the Atmanepada:

A-di-s-i,

4-

fl<M,

^f^Tf: A-di-thali
f ^-di-s-vahi, &c.

'see,'

^Tx

srj,

(cp.

'create,'

^I^K
5.

2),

du.

a),

^f^a

^[.sprs,

Vrddhi with metathesis in the Par.ji

d-Frak-srt (63 a, note

143

e.

'tonch,* take

g, 3. sg.

HU r^TH,^-eras-tam

A-di-ta

inaiV^

(63 a;

66

B 2),

i-srf-ta, &c.

The

difficult

aoriat of

^J

dah, 'bum,'

owrngtotheSandhi(69a;

and

is
^Vs^nidh, 'binder,'

MS

FIKST AOBIST

121
du.

^^WT^ a-dag-dMm
pl.^WT^T a-dhak-sma, <4|^|Jt| a-dag-dha, ^TOT^ a-dhaksu^ A, sg. ^n*fa a-dhak-s-i, TR^nsTT: a-dag-dhat,

d-dhak-sva, *|^|Jt|4^ a-dag-dham,

'

d-dag-dha

^TV^f?

6-dhak-tfvahi,

^l^l^ff d-dhak-

atham,

^KV^lini^

smaM,

^ ^i m. d-dliag-dhvain (620), 4)^4

d-dhak-if-atam

^-raut-sam
^-raud-dlia
,

3.

du.

Aim.

2.

pi.

a-dliak-s-ata

^n^TH^-raud-dliaTn

sing. I.

-md-dha

^Rpff

^^fcM

^-rut-s-i, 2.

^1^^

pi, 2.

(626),

pi. 2.

-md-dhvam,

^-rut-s-ata.

Third or inform,
145. This form

^s

differs

from the preceding merely in adding the

with the connecting vowel ^i (which changes

The endings

of the 2. 3. sg. are

%^ is,

ij^it

it

to TG^B, 67).

(for is-s, is-t; cp.

Hardly anyParasmaipada forms of is-aorists from roots

in
vowels
occur in classical Sanskrit, but one such, formed
ending
from
purify/ in the older language and inflected in loth
28 ; 150).

'

"3,pu,

voices,

middle

may be taken

as

a paradigm for the active as well as the

PABASMAIPADA.

d-pav-is-am

a-pav-is-va

-pav-is-ma

i-pav-IL,

fE-pav-is-tam

-pav-is-ta

^-pa v-it

^-pav-i s -tam

-pav-i s-ni.

2.

122

IV

PIKST AOKTST

ATMANEPADA.

-pav-is-mahi

a-pav-is-vahi

d-pav-ia-i

t45

4-pav-is-atham

tf-pav-i-dhvam (144,

tf-pav-is-atam

a"-pav-is-ata

2)

3.

d-pav-is-ta

'awake/ as an example of a root ending in a

consonant, does not take Vyddhi in the Par. (142)

PABASHAIPADA.
___^_^.
i.

d-bodh-is-am

i-bodh-is-va

d-bodh-is-ma

d-bodh-ih

4-bodh-is-tam

d-bodh-5s-ta

d-bodh-ia-^m

d-bodh-is-uh

2.

3-

'

d-bodh-it

ATMANEPADA.

^ ^^

^^

r.

i^bodh*is*i

a-bodh-is-vahi

a-bodh-is-mahl

6-bodh-is-5tliSin

d-bodh-l-dhvam

'

ft.

U^ mad,

the Par.:

exhilarate,'

and

'

yad, speak,* take Vyddhi in

JV

I2 3

FIRST AORIST

147

Fourth or lif-form.
146. This form
fixing

differs

an additional

from the preceding

s to

the suffix.

one simply

It is

conjugated

Parasmaipada only, and ia used by not more than six

ending in ^R a. *TT ya, go,' may serve as an example

in prein the

roots, all

'

PARASMAIPADA.

4-ya-sis-am

&-ya-sis-ma

A-ya-sis-va

^U||(4JH
d-yS-sis-ta

i-yS-sis-t&m

Second Aorirt
147. This aorist

is

like an impeifect

formed directly from the

root, the terminations being added with or without

vowel *f

the connecting

a.

an imperfect of the sixth class, the

stem being formed by adding
a to the unmodified root. It

The

first

form

is like

corresponds to the Second Aoriat of the first

Greek

(?-rwr-o-i>):
,

'sprinkle/

The
is as

inflexion of this

conjugation

aorist

follows:

PARASMAIPADA.

d-sica-va

&~sica-ma

^ifti^it

^(Ri^fl*^

^Rj^in

i-sica-b

i-sica-tam

^-sica-ta

d-sic-am
2.

in

formed from

SECOND AOKIST

124

IV

148

ATMANEPADA.
d-sic-e

d-sica-vahi

d-sica-mahi

d-sic-ethara

d-sica-dhvam

^n

a.

d-fiica-thab
3. -<Ttrci!t

d-sica-ta

^iRi^dr'flL

^rflf

d-sic-etam

d-aic-anta

Irregularities.

^Tf

i.

4-khya-t.

^nBC.as,

'throw/ adds
'

4-

'W^

pat,

a :
khya, 'tell/ substitutes ^1 a for
*^P^dr3/see,' takes Guria: ^Rp^c^ d-dars-a-t.

fall,'

duplicated aorists

th to the root

and ^T^ vac,

:

^M^H

*4|(

MS ^ aB-th-a-t

1
.

speak,' form contracted

re-

^|4^x|^ a"-voc-am

^-pa-pt-am,

d-va-uc-am, cp. Gk.

(for

Second Form.
148. The

imperfect terminations of the second conjugation are

attached to the root. This form
corresponds to the Second Aorist

of the second conjugation in Greek:

VaTP^-dha-m, 'I

'

'

placed

^RT^

(*-ftr)i "^raTTct ^-stha-t, he stood (e-a-rrf) ;

4-ga-t, he
vent* (f^) ;
^J^a-bhu-t, 'he became' (^w). A few verbs
ending in ^ffa (as well as *bhu, 'be') take this form. This

WS

is

There
i.

retained throughout
except before the

is

no Atmanepada

3gT da, 'give':--

ur of the

3. pi.

144, 3).

PAJBASMAIPADA.

T^dS-m

J-

(cp.

143 a

"VTR d-da-ma

^T^T 4-dA-va

231

The root of this aorirt

** wr^ idwrtewdas in

i., however,

parobably

^^^4-khyat.

^fT

'

BthS, stand,' with

IV

SECOND AORIST

149
a.

be':

^bhu,

PABASMAIPADA.

^^q^a-bhu-v-am ^T^Jf d-bhu-va

^fl: &-bhu-k
?Pa-bhu-tam

1.

2.

125

d,-bhu-ma

V^H

^H**f a-bhii-ta

3-

Third or Reduplicated Form.

I49 Excepting the primary verbs

7 dru, *run/

and f%f

sri,

tbis aorist bas attached itself to the

go/
in

^RI

aya (tenth class and causativea).

secondary conjugation

The stem

is

formed by

a peculiar reduplication of the root, to vhich

is attached.

The

first

conjugation.

inflexion is like that of

Upwards

an imperfect of the

of forty verbs take this aorist in classical Sanskrit.

Special Rules of Reduplication.

i.
"

^T

a,

^KT

tive syllable

a.

a,

by

The vowel

by position,

is

^S

r,

^ ^
r,

are represented in the reduplica-

i.

of the reduplicative syllable, unless already long

lengthened.

The quantity

of the first three syllables of the

almost invariably

v:

S-ji-jan-at,

a-vi-vis'-at, a-di-dj?s-at, S-dl-dar-at

(from

stem

df), S-du-dru-v-at,

m\ic-at, &-cT-klp-at.

^^ muc,

'

release'

is

thus

a-ji-grSh-at, ft-sJi-sri-y-at,

stem ^|*jjx| a-mu-muc-a

PARASMAIPADA.

i.

a-miamuc-am

a-mumiica-va

a-inumuca-ma

a-mumuca-li

a-niumuua-tam

a-mumuca-ta

a-mumuca-t

a-mumuca-tSm

a-mumuc-an

2.

3-

S-mu-

IV

REDUPLICATED AOBIST

126

150

ATMANEPADA.
a-mumuc-e

a-mumuc5-vahi

a-mumucS-mahi

a-mumuca-thaljL

a-mumuc-ethSm

a-mumuca-dhvam

a-rnumuca-ta

a-mumuc-eiSm

a-mumuc-anta.

2.

3-

Irregularities.

^n?radh,' succeed/ and ^J^vyadh,' pierce/ shorten their

radical syllable, so as to produce" the prevailing rhythm ^lOO5!^
S-ri-rfcdh-a-t, *1 <H ft VR^ &-vi-vfdh-a-t (cp. 133 B 2).
*
a.
^t^dlp, shine,' and ^ftw^mil, 'wink, retaining their long
4. x.

radical vowel, do not lengthen the reduplicative syllable, thus

inverting the usual quantity of these two syllables

^f^^lM<\

a-didip-a-t, ^< f*f *Tl ^n f^ a-mimlL-a-t .

Benedictive or Precative.
150, The

active of this

not occur at

all,

form

ia

very rare, while the middle does

It is an aorist optative,

in classical Sanskrit.

being formed by adding the terminations directly to the root.

The terminations are those of the optative of the second conjugation, with

^e inserted between ^TT ya and the personal inflexions.

The endings

of the 2. 3. sing, are ^TR3t.yas (for ya-s-s), <||^yat

yfis=y5-&-t : cp. 28 145), being thus identical in form with
those of the optative present (131). The Benedictive Far. of
(for

'

budh, 'awake,' would be formed 'as follows

budb-ya-s-am

budh-ya-8-va

budh-ya^-s-ina

budh-ya-t

budhyaH3-tam

budh-ya-s-ta

budh-ya-t

budh-ya-s-tSm

2.

3-

IV

SIMPLE FUTURE

i$i

127

Simple Future.
151* The future
"51 sya*, or,

formed by adding to the stem the suffix

with the connecting vowel ^ i f T^( i-?y, and is
is

Most
more than half

inflected like a present of the first conjugation (bh&v&mi).

roots ending in vowels (except

^H

r)

take

^T

sya,

of those ending in consonants take ^tZf isya.

Derivative vprbs

regularly take the latter.

a. Final vowels andprosodically short medial vowels take

e.g.

Hmffl

'go':

i,

e-sya-ti;

^i^budh, 'awake'

^I^rudh, 'hinder*
kar-i-syd-ti; ^bhu, be*

bhot-sya-te (55);
'

do

'

'

i*

qifvaqf?!
Several

roots take both

forms;

^qjlfn dhak-sya-ti (55) and ^[Tf *affl

2. Derivatives in

fn rot-sya-ti ;

e. g.

<^[ dah, 'burn*

'

da,

'

give

_
*
dS-sya-mi

2.

e.

g.

tHv^

cor-aya,

steal

*
:

PAKASMAIPADA.
__.

j.

d5-sya-vaf

,_

j.

da-sya-majgt

^l^ftJ

^I^^J

^l<3l

da-syd-si

da-sya-that

da-syi-tha

da-syi-tat

da-sy-dnti

ATMANEPADA.

3.

dah-i-sya-ti.

coray-i-sya-ti.

^T

^fq^fn bhav-i-syi-ti.

1W aya retain their present stem, dropping

TJ a;

only their final

Gunaj

da-sy-^

do-syi-vahe

dS-sya-se

dS-sy-^the

^itn7l

^i^c)

da-syd-te

da-sy-^te

dS-sya-dhve

IBEEGULAEITIES

128

IV 152

Irregularities.
have

b. x. Several verbs
(cp.

144,4):

"Jj^dra', 'see/

'touch':

^JP^spra,
nya-ti (63 a),
a.

^ ra"

s^fa

ta^fn

instead of

^^srj,

^H

'emit,'

ar before IJT sya

W^
1

srp,.'

creep/

drak-sya-ti (636), ^TOfTT erak-

srap-sya-ti, *?p?rf*T BI rak-sya-ti.

A few verbs strengthen the root with a nasal before J?T sya
nas, 'be lost

nas-i-sya-ti

4>f^$|(7| nank-syati as well as

ITOljuajj, 'sink*:

3- ^GC. vas, 'dwell/

qd^ft

vat-sya-ti

changes

4|^^f71 mank-sya-ti.

^s

its

to 7^ t before

ff1"^1 '

?5

sya

(66 B i).

"

^^

4-

seize/ takes i^T instead of

vowel: ti^tnqfn grah-i-sya-ti (cp. 160, 3

^i

as

its

connecting

a).

Periphrastic Putnre.
152. It is formed by adding the present of the verb ^RJ as,
'be/ to the nom. masc. of an agent noun in
The
7J -tf (101).
nom. sing, is used in all forms except the third persons dual and
plural, in
is

which the nom. dual and plural appear.

omitted in the third persons.

About

in use.

The auxiliary
The Parasmaipada only is found

forty verbs, chiefly in the Epics, take thia

form

of the future.
.

?T tr is added,

much

in

well as

with or without

the same way as ^f sya.

i,

to the gunated root,

But roots ending in ^S

gam, 'go/ and f^han,

r,

as

'kill/ reject the connecting

"

yowelj

kr: ^rfiftu kartasmi

(but

gantasmi (but

^iRimf^

qRuilfa

kar-i-sya-mi)

gam-i-sya-mi).

be*:

PARASMAIPADA.
bhav-i-tasmi

bhav-i-ta-svab

bhav-i-ta-smat

IV

PERIPHRASTIC FUTURE

154

3.

129

bhav-i-taai

bhav-i-ta-sthat

bhav-i-ta-stha

*iftu

<HfofllO

Hfo?ITT*

bhav-i-ta

bhav-i-tarau'

bhav-i-tarah

2.

3.

e-tasmi

e-ta-svah

nmftr

iprra:

e-tasi

e-ta-sthab

e-ta-stlia

e-tarau

e-tarah

iprr
e-ta

Conditional.
'

would have/
153. This is a past tense of the future, meaning
a
past, which is
It is formed by turning the simple future into

an imperfect of the first conjugation (abhavam).

rare
even in the Par., it is still rarer in the Itm. It
Extremely
Examples
is to be met with chiefly in the Epics and the drama's.

inflected like

from $bhu,' be': (fat.Hpim ifiTbhav-i-syami) -wfimn^

&-bhavisy-am, WftUj: a-bhavisya-b, -n^tfq^q, a^bhavisya-t,
are:

&c.; Atm.

^Rft^

e-sya-mi)
alsy-e,

a-bbavisy-e, &c.;

Ti.'g

s-m: aisa-, lif

'

''-

( fut -

?&-*>>

&c.; Atm.

&c.

Fasnve.
takes the terminations of the Atmane154. The passive, which
the
the latter only in the forms made from
pada, differs from
the
of
in 3. sg. aor. From the Atm. of verbs
present stem and
'
he
binds'
;
iflSfr naVya-te,
it differs in accent only
:

fourth class

'he
nah-ya-te,

is

bound.'

IV

PASSIVE

130

154

Pefore adding ^T ya, the root undergoes the following changes

1.

* g-

Final

'

jffa,

'

know

2. Final

t% ci,

Sfr

^ u are

and

129, 8) remains or

TTPPf jfia-y^-te

TT gS, 'sing* (or

pz-yd~te;

I-ya-te;

a (or diphthongs

^JJT

'collect':

gai)

becomes X **

tTT pB, 'drink

H^

lengthened

^VWft ci-y-te;

*
:

gi-y-te.
e.g.

^BTsini,

'

'go :
'hear*:

i,

srii-y^-te.

3. Final

^J r

becomes

after a single consonant

ar

consonants,

e. g.

W kr,

'

do

'

TT^
^smr, remember *: ^cfft smar-yi-te.
;

falft

f^

ri,

after two

kri-y4-te

but

4. Final

^E F is

changed to f^ir aud, after

labials, to
'

e.g.

^1

kf, 'scatter

sfir-y^-te; but

*$\*$\ kir-yi-te; ^T

strewr*

str,

pf, 'fill* (the

only example): TJjfa pur-y4-te.

tj
Roots ending in a consonant preceded by a nasal, lose the
nasal;
e.g. *T^bhaflj, 'break' : 9TOft bhaj-y-te.
5.

6. Boots liable to Samprasarana

(137, 2c) take it;
yaj

f^

grh-y^te

ij-y^-te

^f^svap

^
:

vac

^fl{

7. Derivative verbs in

the strong radical vowel ;

H^

e.g.

grab

sup-yA-te.

1R aya drop the suffix while retaining

^<ej cor-aya ^H?t cor-yate
^m5^ kar-ya-te.

e. g.

WT^ kfir^ya (from W kr):

The passive of
^bhu,

*3*Bft uc-ya-te

*be,'

would be inflected as follows

PRESENT.

5?T^

g?rw%

bhu-ya-vahe

bhu-ya-mah^

^%
bhu-y-ethe

g^Tt
bhu-y^te

j^r
bhu-y^-dhve

PASSIVE

IV 154

IMPERFECT.
-bhu-ya-mahi

-bhu-ya-vahi

iL-bliu-y-e

"il^MMH.
a-bhu-ya-dhvam
3-

a*-bhu-y-et5m

a"-bbil-ya-ta

6-bhu-y-anta

IMPEBATIVE.

thuy-ai

bhu-ya-vahai

bhu-yanaaahai

bhu-yd-sva

bhu-y-etham

bhu-y^-dhvam

2.

OPTATIVE.

*j^T<
^u-y-^ya

bhu-y-evahi

bhu-y-^thalj

bhu-y-eyathaon

bhu-y-^ta

bbii-y-^yatam

bhu-y-^dhvam

Irregularities.
a.

,.

^Hkhan,

'dig/ has either

*&&
khan-y^-teor

*lW

Tf^fS tan-ya-te or
kha-ya-te; 7!^ tan /stretch':
an Atin.
has ^rra?ji-ya-te, 'is born' (properly
gp^jan, 'beget/
of the fourth class

cp. 133

coinlIiaild ''

UT^.Ss/
a
eis-ya-te (cp. J344 )a.

2).

has either 1 ^ 1

sSs-ya-te

132
3.
T

IV

PASSIVE

XT hva,

va

(or^

'call' (or

^ hve), has

155

136, 4);

*tf\ hu-ya*te (cp.

'weave/ ^i^T) u-y-te.

ve),

Aorist Passive.
155. The Atm. of this tease supplies the place of the passive
except in the third person singular, which has a special
form.

Here the augmented root adds the

Guna

quires Vrddhi of a final vowel and

^t a
a

is lengthened) followed

^y

'do

is

e. g.

'

sru, hear
-

'
:

^WSTft

^^WTfa

'

which

^ i,

single consonant

hy a
'

inserted ;

suffix

of a medial
;

re-

vowel (but
after ^5ff a,

d-srav-i

"8?

kr

T^ pa d, walk
g^muc/ release':
miTf^ ^-jfia-y-i.

^-kSr-i

vis/enter^ V5T5|a-ves-i;
IfT JB5, 'know'
a.

The

formation

i.

^^ rabo,

'

seize/ shows the nasalized

the root: %Kf*iT a-rambh-i.

(

irregularities in this
form of

following are peculiarities or

3.

pf,

has

fiU,'

1^

C P-

^TffT a-pur-i

^^

I54 4)- 3- *n^gam, 'go,'

rac, 'fashion/
a ^^TfiT a-gam-i, ^1?^^
slay/ do not lengthen their

^nfV a-vadh-L
V\M4

4. Verbs in

rop-aya, causative of

a-rac-i,

VI aya drop the suffix (cp. 154, 7)

ruh/ mount

PABTICIPLES, QEBU1TDS,
Z.

vadh,

'

^I^tft

a-rop-i,

AND INFINITIVE.

Active Participles.

156* The stem of the present and future participles Par. is

formed with the suffix ^at
(cp. 85). The strong atem is obtained

by dropping the ^ i of the 3. pi, pres. and fut. Par. hence

verbs of tie third dus and other
reduplicated verbs
( X 34 A, 4) have no nasal in the
stem
of the pres. part.,
strong
:

while the fat. part,

Thus:

always

has

^RT^ant

as its strong stem.

ACTIVE PAETICtPLES

157
FBES.

3. pi.

PKES. PAKT.

Fur.

Pur. PABT.

3. pi.

(strong).

bhavant

bhav-isyaut-i

*nY*4l(^

^fl^I^l

"bft|fn

%cq^

kii-n-ant-i (9)

krinant

kre-sy&nt-i

kresyint

jiihv-at-i (3)

jiihvat

ho-syant-i

hosydnt

bhavant-i

a.

(strong).

The

(i)

strong stem of the

bhavisyant

'

pres. part, of

^f^

as,

slay/

is

be,' is

'

sdnt

(3. pi. tll*h s-Ant-i)

that of

^^han,

^1?

"wf^ ghn-ant-i)
157. The reduplicated perfect participle (89) is most easily
formed by taking the 3. pi. Par., with which the weakest stem
.

(3- pi-

practically identical (only that "^ r must be changed to

which, being always followed by a vowel, appears as
is

^s

^s).

In

forming the middle and strong stems from this, the final vowel
of the root (changed to a semivowel before
us) must be

^^

restored, and in verbs which, after dropping <3^

syllabic, f[ i must be inserted

ur,

become mono-

3.

PLUK.

ca-kr-iifr

WEAKEST STEM.

cakr-iis-a

STRONG STEM.

cakr-varpsam

MIDDLE STEM.

cakj--v^d-bhilj

o|4JJj;

q*jgm

^*Js?Mtt*^

babbu-v-ulj

babhu-v-tls-5

babhu-^tns-am

babhu-vdd-bhi^

ten-ilk

ten-iis-S

ten-i-'vams-am

ten-i-vi(d-bhib

On the declension of participles in ^fc^at, see 85

of their feminine stems, 95 a.

(*J^|[i

on the formation
Cp. 131, 6.

MIDDLE AffD PASSIVE PARTICIPLES IV

134
a.

The

participle of the present perfect of

(3-pkf^P
ftj^F vidtis-a";

vid-tfy),

ace.

sg.

f%^

'know-*

vid,

does not take the intermediate^!:

fq^itf ^vid-vatna-am

inst.pl.

insfc.

ft g^Rf*

vidv^d-bhift.

Atmanepada and Passive

II.

Participles,

158. Present and Future

Participles Atmanepada and

Passive are formed with the suffix
mana, which is added

UTT

after dropping the 3. pi. termination

bhva-mana,

&

fut* *i ft uq*t

bhavifyd-mana

The second conjugation

Atm. ^pfH

jtihv-ana (but

pres.

\ <jj

^*im

anomalous

huyd-mana).

suffix

of the 3. pi.

The

Pass.pres.^WTf

^ft^^I^

in the

e.

g.

^f^

pres.

hosyd-mana, Pass.

root "^fP^as,

'sit,'

takes the

'sitting.*

would be formed vith the suffix

added after dropping the termination

is

Atm. ;

Atm.

^JTT an4

f^f Ina: ^fre^T as-Tna,

159- The Perfect

^1*1 Sn^, which

takes

fut.

A to. pres. WRIT

%-nte:

babhuv-ir^ :

f^TR

ire

babhuv-Siui.

It hag,

however, become obsolete, only a few instances of

viving in the sense of substantives or adjectives;
e.g.

it

sur-

anujjc-ana* (from ann-vac, 'having repeated '==) 'learned.'

160.

na
TThe^

suffixes
i. "*r

Perfect Passive Participle is formed with the

and the much commoner 7T ta.

na, which

is

taken by primary verbs

only, and is attached
is used
by a good many roots ending in

immediately to the root,

the long vowels

a, ^1,
u,
and especially in td ;_*.

g,

^Jur)

(which becomes

^fT mla/ fade

5
:

t^ Tr

or

^TR mla-na;

iftn/eKng': ^NlT-na;
^lfi,'cut': ^f lu-na ; Wstr/strew':
r, 'fiU'
P
pur-n^l (cp. 154, 4*
bhid
18R[
stlr-^; |
v
;

'

cleave

TO^

bhin-n^,

IV

PAST PASSIVE PARTICIPLE

r6o

*.

^
mm-na

'

nud, push,' and foe vid,

135

'

find,* optionally take

or *Jrt nut-ta*; ftjl vin-na or ft^f

flta

vit-ta".

T na reverts to the
^
e.
'break':
original guttural
Wf bhag-na; 3J^TV
g. H^bhanj,
bhuj, bend
?W mag-na
*pT bhug-na JFHT^majj, sink
The

b.

final of

a few roots in

that take

'

'

f^f^

tremble

vij,

a. 7\

ta

is

f^ vig-na.

'
:

attached to the root with or without the connecting

'

vowel

'

'

e. g.

fSfTT

'

conquered

ji-ta",

fallen.'

tjf?T?f pat-i-ta,

When

attaching the suffix immediately, the root has a tendency

to be weakened in the usual way verbs liable to
Samprasarana
(137, 2c) take

it,

is

(63 a

is-t

64)

'

sleep

f^. tan,

*.

VT

dha, 'put,'

6.

^T

d5,

^T
c.

is

1fa(

pl-t

^^ svap,

WT

Lat. sta-tu-s)

<rra-r<f-ff,

stha,

gam,

'

kill

f?f

ha-t^C.

doubly weakened:

give,' uses its

f^T

hi-ta* (for dhi-tit).

weak present stem

After certain verbal prepositions

t-ta;

^Tff uk-t^

sacrifice

^I^yaj,

'

drink

pa,

sthi-t^ (Gk.

*Rf g-**

dat-ta.

it,

f^TT

'

HT

'

e. g.
*

speak

vac,

weakened to f^i or even

'

'

'

go

*JH sup-ti

'stand':

to

cases

T
a final nasal is in several cases lost

i,

'

some

in

^f

<[<

dad

datt^C is

^-rl

weakened

e.g. ^irfr a-tta (for a-datta), 'taken.'

Severalroots inTR^am, instead of dropping the nasal, retain

and lengthen the preceding vowel

e. g.
3fi*^

kara,

love

9
:

cfil^l kan-ta.

d. ^9(^ dhvan, 'sound,' follows the analogy of 3R^kam, &c.

^TTfT dhv3n-t^ while a few others in ^IP^ an use a collateral
form of the root in
a;
e.g. Tl^khan, 'dig' *Tffi kha-t;
:

*
3TT?T ja-tdi.
^*JJan, 'be born
3. ^TT i-ta is taken by a considerable number of primary verbs
which end either in double consonants or in single consonants
:

On the peculiar

Sandhi of roots ending in

W h, cp. 69.

IV

PAST PASSIVE PABTICIPLE

136

161

not easily combining with ?^t, and by all derivative verbs (which
'
'
a or ^RT aya before it) 9 e. g. Jf^F sank, doubt
drop the final

'

scratch

fl^ Hkh,

*rf^n safik-i-ta ;

'

Ip-sa, desiderative of

"UP^ap,

kar-aya, causative of

W kr/do

a.

The full form

of the root

obtain
*

fwf^RT

likh-i-tiC

'

t/Ujfl

ips-i-td

fc*(f\H kSr-i-ta.

is

'

usually retained before ^j?f ita

'

but ^T^ vad, speak,' and IT^vas, 'dwell,' usually take Saxnpra*
sarana
^fc^fl ud-i-ta, >dftfl us-i-ta ; -while I|^ grah, seize,*
always takes Samprasarapa and the connecting vowel f^i instead
:

of i;

b
Vjftll grh-I-ti (cp. 151 4).

161.

the possessive suffix ^fT^vat to the past pass,

By adding

part., a new form of very common occurrence is made, which, has

*
'
the value of a perfect active participle ;
e. g. "BHT ky-ta, done
:

having done.

onsct^ krta-vat,

vert, the copula being omitted;

^T

krtavan, 'he (has) done it';

?fc^

a finite
ttfl41*l. sa tat

&4q?ft

sa tat kptavatl,

It is generally used as
^BT

e.g.
?Tc^

'she (has) done it' (cp. 89, foot-note 3).

162. The Fatnre Passive Participle

7TO

is

tav-ya, and

irffa an-iya.
in sense to the Lat. gerundive in -ndus.
suffixes ^f ya,

i.

Before the suffix ^T

*. final

ya

^(T a becomes

TJ e

e. g.

da

^T

formed with the

They correspond

'

d6-ya,

to be

given.*
b. final

Vrddhi
*

ne-ya,

^ ^i take Guna,^u, ^T uGunaorVrddhi.^ffr,

e. g. f% ji
%*J je-ya, 'to be conquered
nl
'

"

i,

to be led

*
;

^ hu

^W

hav-ytf,

to be offered '

bliu

TW bhav-ya, 'about to be'

kr ^SpJ kar-ya, to be done.'
medial ^ and ^ u followed
by a single consonant generally
;

c.

take Guna, ^J a

changed;

'

e. g.

is

f5?f

sometimes lengthened,

bhM

%^ bhed-ya,

^g

remains

'

to be split

un-

IV

FUTURE PASSIVE PABTICIPLE

164

yoj-ya,

^R

but

be joined

to

vac:

'

'
;

ipj s'ak

^ppf

be said*; ^f^drd:

||**| vac-ya, 'to

be

a.

'

possible

s'ak-ya,

to

137

^ff

dfs-ya,

seen.'

7^

Before the suffix

China, being treated in the

tavya, the root, if possible, takes

same way as before the 7TT ta of the

f^Tji: %7T^je-tavya,'tobe conquered';

*lfmee| bhav-i-tavyk, that must be 5 *R^ gam TfT^T
*
gan-tavyfc, to be gone
^ldty da-tavya, 'to be given*
<^T da

periphrasticfut.(iS2);

'

^bhu

'

'

f*f<^ bhid:

Jl^cq bhet-iavya,

^H4

3. Before the suffix

ci:

e.g. f^T

*qiTlx4

'to be done';
.

an-iya, the root takes Gima;

that

must be

'

^^lubh: ^n*tT\q

The ^RI aya

of the causative

^ bhu

be gathered';

cay-anlya, 'to

'

*i^^lf bhav-amya,

*to be split.'

W kr ^^1^^ kar-aiilya,
:

lobh-auiya, 'to be desired.'

is

*liq*4 bhav-aya

rejected;

'

bhav-anlya,

Gerund

III.
163. The

simple verb
in

TJ tu).

to

is

or Indeclinable Participle.

used for forming this participle from the

suffix

It is

be supposed.'

3TT tv-a (an old instrumental singular of a stem

most easily attached to the root by being sub-

stituted for the 7f

of the passive participle

'done': BiflT kr-tva,' having done'

e. g.

Wff kr-tri,

HWuk-td,' spoken':

'

uk-tv5, 'having spoken'; 3f7f ga-ti, gone

*
:

<9r*ni

*TOT ga-tva/ having

gone.'
tf.

The

suffix of the causative,

'

^tf^fl

cor-i-ta,

^RI

aya,

is,

however, retained

'

stolen/ but

-<t<n(WI

cor-ay-i-tva,

having

stolen.'

164.
^T

ya

If the verb is

instead of

WT

compounded
tv5

sain-bhu-ya; from

with a preposition

from ^bhu,

T^vac,

it

takes

'

be,*

^?n bhii-tva,

but

'speak/ xjpenr iik-tva,but JTt^T

INDECLINABLE PARTICIPLE

138

prauc-ya; from
scended

from

';

The

a.

'cross/

tf,

*? pf, 'fill,'
4Jlj^

suffix of the causative,

the final ^f a) before ^T ya

ti|t(

^14404

if

IV 165

ava-tir-ya, 'having de-

sam-pur-ya.

TRI

aya, is retained (excepting

the radical vowel

is

short

e. g.

'

sam-gam-ay-ya from tJl*t^ sam-gam-aya, cause to

but fo*|l*5 vi-car-ya from fq-qii/bl vi-c5r-aya,

assemble';
*

consider.'

165.
tya is added, instead of ^T ya, to compound verbs
ending in a short vowel ; e. g. fa <fl I ji-t va, but ftftttl vi-jf-tya.

The analogy of these verbs is optionally followed by roots

ending in *^n or J^m, preceded by ^Sf a, which may drop the
a.

nasal

if it is

dropped in the. perfect participle passive (r6o,

'

a-gam-ya or ^OTTST a-ga-tya

'

'
:

Jj<q<f pra-nam-ya (65) or

*

?f^ man, think ':

*rar -ma-tya (part. ITTf ma-t^) f^han, 'kill

pra-^ia-tya (part.

or
or

2)

'

l^gam, go -9U|<
TT ga-ta") T^nam, bend
e g.

na-t)

"ifTf

TRH9

^R? -man-ya

'

(part,

^T -han-ya

fr

-ha-lya (part. fTf ha-t^i) ; TT^tan, 'stretch':

-ta-ya (cp. 154 a r) or ^cfW -ta-tya (part. 7T7T t&-t&). But
kram, 'stride,' has only ?fiT -kram-ya (part. 4i|^1 kranta)

^khan,
154 a

'dig/ only

^TRI -kha-ya

(part.

*rRT kha-t4

cp.

i).

V^

166. There is also a rare indeclinable participle in

am.
It is most easily formed by
adding the suffix to that form which
the root assumes before the
e.g.

^ sru

C*TOTft

of the 3. sg. aor. passive (155)

<t-srav-i, 'it

was heard ')

^TR^ sr5v-am,

'having heard.'

IV.
167. The

tn-m

infinitive

Infinitive.

(=Lat. supine)

(originally the ace.

is

formed by adding |J^

sg. of a verbal noun) to the form which

1
Otherwise the gerunds of the Bimple and the causative verb would
b* identical.

TV

INDECLINABLE PARTICIPLE

68

139

the verb assumes before the TTTta of 1he periphrastic future (152),
or the 7f3l tavya (162, 2) of the future part. pass.;
e.g. TjTT stha:
(Lat. sta-tum),' to stand';
'

'

bodh-i-tum, to awake

^bhu

*[\^budh:

*tfqQ*^ bh&v-i-tum,

be

'to

'

'

kr

to do*;

^4^kar-tum,

to see

'

^^ vah

^J^drs^ 5^^d*4s-tum(i5i&

vodhum

q'lj*^
'

fiodJhum (69
^ftjj*^

carry

i),

^T^ aah

'

to bear

&),

'

6), 'to

(69

^J^

cur

^Tl^fag*!, coray-i-

tum, to

steal.'

DERIVATIVE VERBS.
Cansatives.

I.

l68. This, the commonest

formed

class of derivative verbs, is

with the suffix ^RI aya in the same way as the tenth class (125, 4),
c

and

similarly inflected

is

'

cause to lead
'

vid,

f^R[
'

W kr,

'

know

e. g.

make

7|^^

ved-^ya,

of the verbs in

e. g.

^im

nay-aya,

cause to

know

make

^^

'

sad,

give

a insert

^p before

the causative
*

'
:

stand

^|l|i( da-p-aya ; ^TT stha,

'
:

sthS-p-aya.

The

6.

3[T da,

n<4^

*KTT^T kar-ava, cause to

'

suffix

'

set.

*A\<$*4 sad-^ya,

Most

a.

'

'
:

lead

^f\ nl,

'

'

sit

'

causative suffix

is

retained (as in the tenth

class)

throughout the conjugation excepting the (reduplicated) aorist

(which is connected with the causative in sense only cp. 149).
:

Irregularities.

1WT

gla, 'languish/ ^^T mla, 'fade,' ^TT

the radical vowel before ^TO paya
shorten
sna, wash/ optionally
i.

IfT

jfta,

'know,'

V^T jlia-p-aya,
UTTO
a. A few roots ending in other vowels than^TT
jaa-p-aya or

'

f%T

ji,

'

conquer

adhi, 'read

<fec.

<*|M^ ja-paya, cause

'

'

VUUMtl

take tf^J paya

to win

adhy-apaya, teach

*
;

*
;

^i

with

'

r,

'

go

DERIVATIVE VERBS

140

ar-paya, 'put'j

OH<

ruh, 'grow':

IV

169
as

ro-paya, as well

^tfT roh-aya, 'raise.'

3.

Y^hu,

makes

'shake,*

^TO dhu-n-aya,

'shake'; ift prT,

'

'love': iffan8!' prT-n-aya, 'delight'; aft bhT, fear

*
:

tffaf^ bhi-

'

B-aya, as well as the regular *f(^(^ bhSy-aya,

4.

^P^labh,
1

^^dams',
5.

^*l*4 dams'-aya (cp. 133 A4).

bite,' retains its nasal:

^^ han,

'

denominative stem ^u fl^I

kill/ substitutes the

'make slaughter

gbata-ya,

frighten/

t*lH<4 lambli-aya ; wliile

'take,' inserts a nasal:

of*'

Desideratives.

II.

169. Desiderative stems are formed by adding

^ sa,

reduplicated in a peculiar way, the suffix

seventy cases, but with the connecting vowel

Thus

nearly thirty others.

'desire to

to live/

to the root,

directly in
i (i. e.

about

ftf i-sa) in

'

^ bhu,

becomes ^giSf bti-bhu-sa,

ji-jlv-isa, 'desire

be,'

be/ but ^ft^jiv, 'live/ RUJjflfem

Desideratives are inflected like verbs of the

jugation (p. 93).

The accent being on the reduplicative syllable, the

first

con-

root as a

rule remains unchanged, but

z.

before fl'sa, final

^|? become

4^

ci-ci-sa

ti-tir-sa;

2.

before^

T takes

notatall ;

it

^ and^ u
i

are lengthened, while

ir or, after labials,

'

stu,

^ mr,
medial

praise

'die':

ci,

gather

I,

?J|Tq

lfif$i

^T u,

tu-stu-sa ; 7j tf, cross

mu-mur-sa.

^f must take Guna;

so in one case,

lie

'

^ u does

'

e.g. *ft st,

fq

e. g.

^Br and

'

ur;

'

isa, final i;

also,

^P

1!

ftfllfa

si-say-isa

medial

and medial

'

crush

flfi

*
:

si-w-isa;
>

'beautify*:

5?^ nrt/ dance': finrfS^f ni-nart-iea

^ftft^ su-sobh-isa

vi-vid-isa, as well as

ftf^TO

f^V

vi-vit-w.

'

vid,

know '

DESIDERATIVES

IV 171

Special Ruleg of Reduplication.

^f

i.

170.

^IT S, and

a,

(55; 690);

flHCT
a.

^ u)

'

dah, burn

^S

*[ bhr, 'bear'

of roots

reduplication

r after labials,

f^TO di-dhak-sa

'

^ft$ bu-bhur-sa.

containing

fqfq^l vi-vik-sa (63 6)

'

du-dhuk-sa (gg

all desideratives,

^f

reduplicate with

The two

desiderative

69 a);

Thus

ruh,

'

':

except those from roots containing ^3 u,

i-

vowel that take the

1

^ i: ^P ^ as>
tt^t^ ic-iks-isa.

internally with

reduplicate

'
;

is

^f duh, milk
Vow': ^^^ rti-ruk-a.

or three roots with initial

s-is-isa

^3 u

and

normal je. g. f*P^ vis,

f
budh, know
^Jc?T bu-bhut-sa (55) ;
enter

u,

in the

WTstha,* stand 'rf^Wti-stha-sa; ^^srj,' create':

9.

represented by

ur, standing for

e. g.

si-srk-sa (63 a)

The

? are

^^f

reduplicative syllable (but

reduplicates with

^H

111 ?.

t^.

see

*sat/

obtain,* forms its stein

by contraction

fTJJ ip-sa.

Irregularities.
their radical
171. i. *PHgam, 'go/ and ^p^han,' kill,' lengthen
vowel; while ^f^man,' think,' lengthens the reduplicative vowel

as well

f^Rreji-gain-sa (beside R*fRi8| ji-gam-isa)

jf-gham-sa

(66 A a)

lfl4li41

mi-m&m-sa(66

a.

^n| gran,
Sampra&arana:

'seize,

U^f

t^T^T

prach, 'ask,'

'go/

^^rabh,

^J^svap,

ji-ghyk-sa (55; 69

prcch-isa, JJlpg su-sup-sa.

3. ?[T da, 'give/ >*T dha, 'place/

foHt*

a),

'sleep,' take

ft^f^q

HT ma, 'measure/

'graap/ ^R^labh, 'take/

A 2), 'reflect.*

^S

sak, 'be

first

two

syllables of the

df-t-sa,f%TO dhi-t-sa (for df-dh(a)-sa

pi-t-sa,

f^T^

ri-p-sa,

Rim

li-p-sa,

55),

f^WT mi-t-sa,

fl^ si-k-sa.

pad,

able/

stem in such a way

of the root
consonant
retain only the reduplication and one
contract the

pi-

as to

pfci, gather,' f^Tji, 'conquer,'

4.

IV 172

INTBNSIVES

142

revert to their original guttural

ci-ci-sa);

foqTU

f%nfa ji-gi-sa foxU4l

;

5. ^n^ghas, 'eat/ changes its

f^ ban,

kill'

(cp.iyi,l),

fa^O^

ci-ki-sa (beside

jf-gliani-sa.

^s

to?^t:

ji-ghat-sa,

'be

hungry.

III.

Intensives (Frequentatives).

172. These -verbs are meant to convey an intensification or

frequent repetition of the action expressed by the simple root.

Only monosyllabic verbs beginning with a consonant are liable to

be turned into intensives.

Hence

neither verbs of the tenth class

nor roots like ^ff^ ad can form this derivative. About sixty roots
(less than half the number found in Vedic literature) take the
intensive in Sanskrit, but forms of

The
has

it

rarely occur.

stem, which takes a peculiar kind of strong reduplication,

two forms. The

to the reduplicated

one adds the personal endings immediately

stem (accented on the

first

syllable in strong

forms), being conjugated in the Parasmaipada only, like a verb

of the third or reduplicated class
(p. 96)

from

'

bhu,

The

be/

e. g.

'ft*ftf?f b6-bho-ti

^ ya,

other adds accented

same

in the

way as the passive (154), to the reduplicated stem, being conjugated

in the

itmanepada

only, like the passive (p. 130);

e.

g.

bo-bhu-y&-te from
*.

The

first

^bhu.
intensive may optionally insert

before termina-

tions

Stems
beginning with consonants in the strong forms.
in
consonants
do not take Guna either before this
ending
I

or before terminations
beginning with vowels;

'know'; ^%f|j v -ved-mi or

ve~vidmafr, imper.

^R^lfa

^f^^ftr

v^-vid-Sni

e.g.

fSf^ vid,

v<$~vid-I-mi,

but

^Rf:

hu,

'

call

JJlft-

o-mi or *THg^f*| j6-hav-I-mi,

qftgqifa j6-hav-Sni.

IV 174

IRREGULARITIES

143

Special Rules of Beduplication.

The reduplicative

173.
II a

syllable takes

e. g,

f%^nij

cleanse

*H%fof n6-nek- ti

'

*rtfafr ne-ni-yrf-te

^ plu, 'float

Guna and lengthens

'

^budh,

know

'

tft nl,

'
:

dHflvTUTi bo-budh-i-ti ;
'

be hot
Ml^&lc) po-plu-ya-te ; 71^ tap,

':

lead

'

dM^Tl

ta-tap-ya-te.
A.

Boots ending in ^SP^am repeat the nasal instead of lengthening

the vowel;

kram, 'stride

e.g. ^gT^

^H

Roots containing

b.

and the root;

drJ, 'see*:

e.g.

<^0^^

1
:

^**ftf?l cai-kram-i-ti,

r insert f^i

between the reduplication

5
mr, 'die

*i^*|R| mar-i-mar-ti

dar-i-drs'-ya-te Jc^nrt,' dance':

;

nar-i-nrt-ya-te.

Irregularities.
'

174-

awake,' reduplicating with ^JT a (as from

*J gFi

gar), forms the stem

TT*T

character of a root (134

of the verb

and

is

^iifr? ja-gar-ti,

3. sg.

which has almost assumed the

]"a-gr

A 4)

used as the only present stem

3. pi. 4114(171 ja-gr-ati.
'

a.

^^

dah, 'burn,'

and 3R^ jabh, snap at/ reduplicate with

*

a nasal, while
^T^ car, move,' changes its radical vowel as well :
dan-dah-T-ti and ^^({j7) dan-dah-ya-te
;

jan-jabh-yd-te ;
'

b.

T|^

pad,

go,

besides reduplicating with a nasal, inserts 1^1

*

after it

i|TlM^|t) pa-n-i-pad-ya-te

plicates as if (173 b)

vowel

is

i,

it

contained

which, however,

dAr-i-drS-ti (cp. 134

A 4).

is

^K

while j^T drS, run/ redur (only that the inserted

long by position)

DENOMINATIVES

144

IV.

175-

large

175

Denominatives.

number

of verbs, inflected like those of the

a-conjugation (p. 92), are derived, with the suffix *f y&, from
nouns, to which they express some such relation as 'be or act
like,' 'treat

^u

'

as/ 'make,'

are lengthened

(cp. ifi4, i).

to>

Examples

^T*faf

Before the

desire/

^T a often
are

is also,

suffix, final j; i

*HTO namae-yd,

'pay homage
regard as a master' (svSmi) ;

'

svSmi-ya,

gop5-yJ, 'be like a herdsman (go-p5) to/

rajS-ya, 'play the king' (raja);
as a tree
.

(drama)

and

but sometimes becomes

tpfal putn-ya,

gTRFT

'

protect

>;

di-uma-ya, 'rank

'desire a son

'

(putra),

Denominatives which have the causative accent

(d-ya) are
-

reckoned verbs of the tenth class

by the Hindu grammarians.

Such are

H*RI

mantitf-ya, 'take

counsel'

^?

(mdntra), ^ftf*J

kirt^ya, 'celebrate^ (kirtf,

'fame');
varn<-ya, 'depict/
'
'
c
'
describe (v&na, colour
'
)
kathii-ya, tell how/ relate
1

^^

(ka-tha-m/how?').

CHAPTER V
INDECLINABLE WORDS
Preposition!

176. Owing to the cases

having a more independent meaning
other Aryan
languages, the number of
prepositions is

than

qnrte small,

and

P 8tp0

their use
itionfl1 '

is

very

Md

th

li

mited in Sanskrit.

dele t^
define
the general; sense
of. the case' to

They

are

not 'govern,' but

only

which they are added.

PREPOSITIONS

177

Of

the dozen Vedic postpositions (also employed as verbal pre-

fixes) Sanskrit preserves only three in

TT*J anu, 'after,' and Trf?!

about,' after the accusative.
i.

'

145

'

a. ^BT a,

'

'

from

or

up

common
(Gk,

pra*ti

use

irpori),

'towards,'

before the ablative.

to,'

a. The following are also occasionally met with, nearly always

^rfSj abhi, against (ace.)
following their case
pura"s,
'

'

'

'

before"' (gen.)

^ffa

'

Eng. under),

over

a*dhi,
'

within,*

between

5^C

'

(loc.),

**RT^

anta*r (Lat. inter,

(loc.,

rarely gen.)*

Prepositional Adverbs.
177- The loss or obsolescence of the Vedic prepositions in the
true sense is compensated in Sanskrit by the increasing use of
1

'

ungenuine prepositions, that

is

to say, those which cannot

be

attached to verbs and the origin of which from cases is still for
the most part clear.
They are employed with all the oblique
cases except the locative and the dative ; with the latter case no

word

prepositional

is

ever connected in Sanskrit.

are given in the following

they accompany

list,

without

'
;

the latter also

*M*ll samiyS,

'near'

TrfWTt

'up

to,' 'till'

Instr.

b.

of

abhi-ta^,

around

'

'
;

M^UI p^trena, beyond

f*lnm

'

on both sides

tfntarena,

'

regarding

sarv^-talj, 4J4J41d! eamanta-tab,

'

'

Ace. ^rcnj antara and il^lX^I

a.
'

These adverbs

grouped under the cases which

'

between,'

nikasa and

Mf<H: parf-ta^, ^rfo:

b+i^dt ubhayi-ta^,
;

'

'

^TTT^yavat, during,

(alsoabl.).

^5 &ahd,

^)4j4^sammj tn^^saka^a, ^llxS^sar-

'

dham,

(together) with'; f^PTT vina/ without,' 'except' (also ace.,

rarely abl.).
c.

Abl. All the adverbs used with

this case express

some

modification of the fundamental ablative notion of separation :

L

PREPOSITIONAL ADVERBS

146

'before' (of time):

i.

UT*5 prak*

^Nfaf

arvak, IpO" puri,

'after* (of time)

fl.

*Hfl <*i an-antaram,

urdhvam, if<*\ param, TJ?7f: para-tat, M\fll

'

noun meaning

prabhrti (originally a fern,

*

ontaide,' out of

3.

tra

^H?t rte

d.

some

'

'

^f^J banffe.

apart from

'

')

"^wi any-

(also ace.).

Oen. Nearly

the adverbs used with, this case express

all

relation in space

I.

1 '

in presence

before,

of

"^%

agre,

HT" piua-tafc y^nnq, purds-tSt, THITV^C

4J^^H sam-aksam. a. 'after': M^J l<\ pascat.

^TEnTt agra-tat,
praty-aksam,
3.

4.

ptfrena,

commencement

'beyond':

M<fl: para-tab,

M^l^paras-tSt.

4. 'above,'

'

over/ 'upon

':

the former also

^H!\ upari (also ace.)

'

with regard

^JV^fl l^adhas-tat
the sake of.*

With

and
'

to.*

5.

the gen.

is

below

*
:

^W adha^ and
W%

also used

krte, 'for

178. The case-notions of the accusative

(

whence

and locative ('where

)*

nouns meaning

**Th

C whither*), ablative
are often paraphrased by

'

proximity/ such as ^rf5?RI

f*WZ

upa-kantha,

ni-kata,

?EnmT

sa-kSs'a,

sam-ipa, tfRJ parsvi (*side').

'towards,' 'to/ 'near'; in the

antikrf,

^frf^I

VJM4Q4

sarn-nidhi,

In the ace, they mean

abL, 'from*; and in the

loc.,

'

near,' 'in the presence of

in each case governing the genitive.

^nfr^f^rt *T^E 'go to the king';

For example:

'beside
praised

me/

'near

Nala in her

he withdrew from Baghu '

me

TT^T:

^f^ 'W TH^:

'they

presence.'

Prepositional

O6rnnd.

179. Several indeclinable participles are used in the sense of

prepositions
x.

with ace.

^dpv

ud-dis'-ya,

'pointing at

'

towards/

PREPOSITIONAL GERUNDS

180

'about,' 'at,' 'for'

^H^RT a-da-ya,

'

'

nl-tvS,

leading

'

with

'
;

147
1

gybi-tya, 'taking,

^JfhTT

^(VJBT'^

^W-

adhi-stfia-ya,

"

ava-lamb-ya, H|(4|AI a-sri-tya,

sorting

to'='by means of

^UMgKJ

re-

S-stha-ya,

tjc^n muk-tvS, M(<tfU3Q pari-tyaj-ya,

varjay-i-tva, 'putting aside '=' except*

^tfrvcci

adhi-kr-tya, 'putting at the head '=' with reference to,' 'about.'

9* with abl.

a-rabh-ya, 'beginning from *=' since.'

'W^WT

Conjunctive and Adverbial Particle*.

'

*
l8o. 1VJf anga, in exhortations =* pray
'Vy J^ P^y do
'
a. 'how much more?
it/ RMJj) kim anga: i. 'why, pray?
r

'

^RT a-tka

i.

new

introducing something

a sentences' now,' 'then/ 'afterwards.'

iti,

'also.*

if

4.

f
:

beginning of
the headings of

= 'here begins' (opposed to ^ft

books, chapters, sections,' now*

'here ends').

at the

a. in

connecting parts of a sentence =' and,'

3.

^W

'

fll*Ufl*l^lfij 'ifroqifil

il^<q*V

I do not follow them, I shall go to Yama's abode.'

atha kim, 'what else?'
:

x.

or else,'

is

'

'

atha v5

= 'it
or.'

so,' 'certainly,*

'yes.'

if

^
TOT ^T

coiTecting a previous statement

'

3. adding a corroborative statement, or

for instance*: *|U141 tufa^qWcl 'thus it is well

or rather,*

so'='so

but.'

said.'

^TOt

atho, 'then,' 'afterwards' (see <3 u).

VqW anyac ca,

'

and another thing

'

'

'

and besides/ more-

over.'
1

'moreover, 'besides/

^RT^aparam, 'further,'
^fft 4pi:

I.

connecting

wise,' 'moreover,'

'and'

'on one's own part':

(like *T ca) parts of

(^1^

a gentence=* like-

'both

and'),

^RTOUft friNm*
'

'

(on his part) went away/

3.

even,'

'

though

a. 'also/

'Damanaka

TRtf ft

also

'

even

CONJUNCTIVE AND OTHER PARTICLES V

148

i8<

a child'; ll<A!4M(lf ekaklapi,

though alone.*

4. 'only,' 'but

*J^n*lfH 'but a moment.' 5. 'all' with numerals

f all the four castes/
In the above fm

(of time):

senses ^rfjj api always follows the

word

to

which

it

belongs. 11
the beginning of a sentence as an interrogative
and with the optative to express a wish or preference;

is also vised at
I

-article,

ft *HJ?I

'

is

your penance prospering ?

would that the time had come*;

/
*

I would rather abandon

'

nSma, perhaps

^W^6lam,

'

than thee.'

life

^ift

TW

api

(see TTT nama).

'

enough,' construed with the instrumental, gerund

'
or infinitive, expresses a prohibition ^Rf
away with fear

H^T

cease reproaching

me

'
;

'

^TW THftvftjp^

'do nol

awaken.'
*

'

i. ia used after the exact words of quotations,

^f?f iti, thus
With verbs of saying it supplies the place of inverted commas
and of the indirect construction in English
:

'he said to me, I will do thy bidding

or 'he told me that he would do
my bidding.'

It is similarly used to quote

thoughts, intentions, knowledge,

though not uttered:

*one should not despise a king, though a child, (thinking=)
because he is a mere human being ';
'a

J
gift which is presented (thinking* it ought to be given =)
fiom a sense of duty'; *
knowledge) that he reads the book of the law, ia not a cause (ol
confidence in him).*

'here ends/ at the end of books,

chapters, sections, acts
'here ends the third act.'
f:
of/

as regard^' 'as for'

^Ivif^fTT ffft

'as for (doing it) quickly,

it

(would

CONJUNCTIVE AND OTHER PABTICLES

180

be) eaay

as for (doing it) secretly,

149

would require consideration/

it

(See also f^fi^kim and JTOT tatha.)

J^
sense:

iva, being enclitic, follows the word to which it belongs in

i. Mike':
"TO TftT ^<IT*iltd 'this man looks like a
a. 'as if/ 'as it were':

thief.'

'I see, as

were, Siva himself before me.'

it
*

'

somewhat
5

an hour/

4.

angrily.'

3.

'somewhat':
*

'

almost

quite':

5. 'just,

almost

tJJ^f+J^f

^f^ftR^

'just

little';
*

6. 'indeed/ 'pray'

'quite soon.'

with interrogatives

TL,

*f*li3S1

),

what,

TlBinVni*^

?'

an old particle of frequent occurrence in the Veda, meaning

with TV^
preserved in Sanskrit only in combination

is

'and,'

and in ipft

kirn (q- v.),

^ft

fnf3^4 ^"y^l^ll

not an ornament to lovely figures

is

indeed,

wohl

(German

n6

(for

tho (for athau, 'and so'), 'then/ and

nau, 'and not'), 'not/

'

nt4i a common particle in the Veda, meaning and,' also,'

or/ survives only i. in combination with irfTT and ftwj
JTRpf
9
much
'ho\v
kirn
more/
the
'on
\ita,
contrary
pratijjta,
fci^jd
^37T

how much

'

less

a. in

fq^_^^ (=utrum

the second part of a double question

'

whether

an)

It is also

or.'

frequent

a*

which

it

an expletive at the end of a line in the Epics.

ev4

TPT

is

a restrictive particle following the word

*

emphasizes. It

may

'quite,' as well a
fltress:

tpff

t^T 'quite alone';

'

that very/

myself; fl^T
^pfa the whole earth/

^TfTft

'

'

'just,'

tathaeva, 'likewise/ 'also/

'only/

'the

the same

%^

TFTR^ev&m, 'thus/ *so*

not do

'
!

very sight';
'

'
;

*l<*f^

caeva/and also/

naeva, 'not at

means/
'

exactly/

sometimes merely by

^^^fl

'

'

death

often be rendered by

in various other ways,

TpW^'so

belt';

all,'

sure

TT^NT

'by no

CONJUNCTIVE AND OTHER PARTICLES V

150

iftRt kAo-dt

180

*< kd-d+f^[ cid),

nonne)='l

(Vedic neuter of interr.

used in questions
expecting the answer 'yes' (Lat.
'

hope

'

4%| BT WTT <i^i^^*fI^Ti

'

DamayantT, Oking?

I hope you have seen

With negative='l hope not' (Lat. num) :~
'I have

not done you any injury,

I hope?'

^TH^kama-m

(ace. of

adverb meaning 'at

concessive particle:
a.

sure';

^Hf 'desire'),

primarily used as an

frequently employed as a
'indeed/ 'certainly/ 'forsooth/ 'to be

will,' 'gladly,' is
x.

granted/ 'supposing* (generally with imperative),

followed by adversative adverb

is true

yrr'it

but not/ 'rather

i^Kkf-m:
particle

(Lat.

:_*|TFHHJ> f*J, ffmft, or

yet'; ^TRHr- T ^'certainly
^ na).
(cp. ^T^varam

but/ 'although
than

'

'what?' a. 'why?' 3. a simple interrogative

not to be translated, and
expecting the answer 'no*

num).

i.

'

4. 'whether?

in double questions, followed by

'

or simply ^fl, ^fT, or

Combinations of flU^kim with other

particles

^herefore?'^
'

'

we

I Bonder ?

'

perchance ?

'

fiRft

however/ -1fi|ti?fi|,

5 'but/
'

i.

'

very/

^ft 'weeping bitterly'; ^ 'nay,

S*: 'how much more/ 'how much
'^tl ^T^ ^Qft^u'even each

f*W^

(is it so)

more/-t*g ft^T, 1*
^^*1^iq
f

'

less

-when the four (are

combined)

fW kU (quidom)
foUows the word

it

i.

T^R

emphasizes:

rendered by stress merely:

one day a

tiger did

how much

'
!

'indeed/ 'certainly/ 'to be snre/

be snre the rogue deserves

calamity/
'

'why,

'

vehemently T ftwft

singly (leads) to ^ruin,

more

the foUow-

nxoreover/-p|

Sometimes

!?|f^

come/

he

f^ ^V ^HPfW

'

a.

ft* may

'

they say/

we are told

'
;

CONJUNCTIVE AND OTHER PAKTICLES

i8o

'there lived,

j:

named

it is

aaid,

151

a devotee

Kartavirya.*
'

SFTFR^kr-ta-m (nent. of past part), done,' is used (like

with the instrumental in the sense of have done with*
'

'away with doubt.'

'

%^

'

only

^Rft 'not only

'

T^fftfiT'he merely sleeps.'

but.'

SR kva, where? if repeated with another

question, expresses

great difference, incongruity, or incompatibility:

"qinMftM^r

Sfl

*rf?TJ

'where

the race sprung from the

(is)

sun, and where (my) limited intelligence?' i.e. 'how great is the
discrepancy between the glory of the sokr race aad my powers

of description.'

^f^ kh&lnt

'indeed, ''surely/ often merely emphasizing

i.

the preceding word.

2. 'pray,* 'please,' in entreaties:

*

please give
3, with gerund ='

enough

of,'

\f^<3l

'do not' (like

f ^^

'do not weep.'

^f^

me an answer '( German 'doch').

'not at

^WR^ flam):

all,'

'certainly not,'

I hope not.'

ca, enclitic (=T, que), 'and,' 'also':

'Govinda and Rama.' In poetry the particle

is

occasionally

'

^f ^T^ff
When more than

misplaced
1

next.

^f |4J^ ^f in this world and in the

two words are connected, the conjuncthe last only, as in English.

commonly used with

tion is

^ ^

for

'

i.

'

both

and.'
*

though

yet.'

3*

%< ced (ca+ld),

a.

on the one hand

no sooner
'

if,'

never begins a sentence or half-line

'but
irf^yadi, 'if,' does).-*RT
if not
(elliptically) =' otherwise
'

'

on the other/

than,'
(as

if.'-

'

'

tion, otherwise

you

done after deliberaeverything should be

'
come to repentance.' %?| cen na, if

will

CONJUNCTIVE AND OTHEB PARTICLES V

152
not

'

'

(apodosw)

(be) otherwise.'

STTcJjatTt:
'one day.'

7W

f^TJ ^fa"

i.

if it (is) to be, it (will)

*nf5f %ff ^fl^VII

'if this (is

'at all,' 'ever.

^iig 'not

td-tah:

it is)

objected,

not

180
not

(so).'

a. 'possibly,' 'perhaps.

'by no means

at all/

3. 'once,*

'never/

';

'thereupon,' 'then/ *ia*dfl"

tatas tatat='what next,' 'pray go on' (with what you are
'thence.'

i.

a.

saying).
*

7TOT t&-tli&:

i.

'and' (=^).

'also,' 'as well as,'

IWf

be done/

'thus,* 'so,'

a. 'likewise,'

accordingly,

3. 'that is so,' 'yes/ 'it shall

'so also/

T^TTf!

'similarly.'

tatha_api,

nevertheless.'

TRTT f^

'for so

(it

is)/ 'so for instance/ 'that

'

to say/

is

JT<5

namely. '^Tf^rfTT tathajti, 'yes/

tA-d (neut of pron. 'that'):

i.

'then/ 'in that case/

a. 'therefore/ 'accordingly':
'

to hear of

fll^c^ ta-vat

'while/

we are

princes

therefore

'

a.

'till'),

4iqc^ 'how long/

so long* (correlative to

i.

'meanwhile/

3. 'in

just/ 'at once* (with imperative

4.

we have a curiosity

war/

the

'*

first

= before

place/

first/

doing anything

l^iii

else ) ;

Vi*n
or*C pray come here at once/ 5. 'already/
'even' (as opposed to 'how much more/ 'how much
less').
*

6.

'

only,'

not a

merely.

human being/

7.

at least

'

'
:

IT

aiq*Ugift she

is

at least
'

'

8.

(concessively) 'indeed/ certainly/ it is

true' (followed by
'but/
&c.). 9. emphasizes <a notion (like
?J
TW): 'as for/ 'as regards/ 'only/ 'just/ 'quite/ or to be rendered
by stress only.

^TTOtr-

'scarcely

when/

'

if

JTHI^ not yet/

tA

(never commences a sentence) : 'but/

sometimes
or ^T, or a mere
expletive;
1J

=^

'

however/

it is

combined with *T or repeated in the same sentence.

'but not/
*T
na toe va
7f
1J

'but rather/

Tt

is

even found

^^fq

to/ never

CONJUNCTIVE AND OTHER PARTICLES

So

"

at all/

'

however.

yet/

Tit; <J

'

'

but.'

If 7J

yet not.'

although

f u6,

indeed

<J

153

'

not

with indefinite pronouns: 'no

'
:

*f

^t^ft

('

not

T fafaq/ nothing '; *T SRf^t nowhere ';

f if repeated amounts to an emphatic
never.'
'

any'=) 'no man';

*

positive:

was) not

*[

THf *nfV^f ^JJT

not even/

naapi,

*f*[

na-nd

'

'

not

i.

in questions expecting

answer (Lat non-ne) =' surely ': *\*{%

priyalj, 'surely I

was there (who

^f naeva, 'not at all/

'

*ufn

flfnclt 'no one

'every one was thoroughly satisfied.'

satisfied,' i.e.

am thy

heloved?'

an affirmative

flW

?t

nanuaham

te

with interrogative pro-

a.

'

nouns and imperatives='pray* f*J ^fft fTPL pray who are

'
f
you ?
fl^fyrilH^ nanuucyatam, pray tell/ 3. in arguments :
:

'is it

not the case that?'='it

may be

objected'; followed by

'

'H ^fl

***|?l

to this the reply is/

atraucyate,

meaning by name' (e.g. 1^J|

has
the
'Nala
TT*T
following senses as a particle:
by name'),
i. 'indeed/ 'certainly/ 'to be sure': *TOT
TRT fann/ 1 have
I

|*f nama, besides its adverbial

'

indeed conquered/ a. perhaps' :

'you have perhaps seen a righteous man/

interrogatives='pray'

^t TRI TTTTT

matter

much"

ever so

if/

so rich/

^rftf

*TW

potential =' perhaps/

strongly than ^jft

'

i.

am

^ ^WT T^J TTO 'let him

nA, now/
^1J,

be ever

emphasizes a preceding word more

1^

TW

'

surely*

dear to thee/

'

^1

is

at the beginning of a sentence with

a.

alone.

surely I

fTTO^ 'who, pray,

with

4. with imperatives =' granted/ 'no

favourite with kings?*

'

3. ironically,

with interrogatives

=' pray

'

*
:

^?t ^J 'who, pray I

in double questions expressing uncertainty/ (either)

'can this be

BhTma or Dhanna?'

or'

CONJUNCTIVE AND OTHER PARTICLES V

154

3^1*^ nu-xUL-m, usually the

word

first

'

probability,' 'undoubtedly,*

assuredly

a sentence

in

^f

*|3> IT

180

'in

all

^Wtfflir

'

^tyxi^r assuredly, I think,

Nisadha/

it

is

not the fault of the king of

^t nd (nd+u) in the Veda meant

Sanskrit simply =' not* (cp.
^J cd).
'

'

i.

'I

highly/

am

T^

*<Ah*li

'and

'

'

greatly/

*Tt

most

'in
f^rci^ *T*rf7l

f%

Von

it

the

1!

3. 'nothing but,'

only lack the horns.'

but lack

trary,' 'but.'

x.

of mortals

only*

f*TOT%

4. 'but,' 'however

1
:

'they (are) thoroughly versed

intelligence.*
f

p^biak

life

'

it

in all
learning,

a. 'at the most*:

greatly obliged.'

thirty (years).'

'

very

entirely/

'

(lasts) at

'nor/ hut in

not,*

a.

'again.'

gift qif:,

on the other hand,'

'

on the con-

or simply ^ift, 'again

and again/

repeatedly/

JTRi: prayah, ITRnit praya-s'at, ^Tf^HT prayena x. 'for the

*
generally/ 'as a rule/ a. in all probability/
:

most part/

'

i*

'certainly/ 'assuredly/ 'indeed/

pressing consent: 'very well/

a. ex-

3. expressing assent: 'so

it

is/

yes

*T mi,

prohibitive particle

(=Gk.

S-'

TT

W ma sma

and$^

maevam

similarly *TT

*TT

WRT

is

employed

1^5

in the

ffJ

or *TT

same way.

with potential or

for heaven's sake!'

elliptioally

WtV Tf^P

=' would

'heaven forbid (that

'do not

Both *fT

are used elliptically-='not sol'

TR^ 'not

only not': ITT

used with

rf), generally

imperative or unaugmented aorist: *TT

'God

don't

\;

forbid!'

that not/ 'if

it

should be)

the warders/
:

x.

'every

moment/ 'repeatedly/

'

'

incessantly

CONJUNCTIVE AND OTHER PARTICLES

i8o

*fFF!).

(often repeated:
*

'

now

one time

at

now,'

^nr y&-tah:
'

whither

'
;

'

i.

153

on the contrary/

a.

at another."
(often =' where/

'whence*

often= ablative of the

relative

^ ya)

sometimes
'

a.

wherefore/

for which reason/ 3. 'because/ 'since/ *for'

(often introducing a verse in support of a previous statement). 4. 'that/ after
questions or before oratio recta f^l
:

'what misery

*N! yi-tha
commands/

'

'

'

where/

a.

if/

3.

'

when/

since/

4.

'

'

<JUUIHM*4Rl ^:
(=f^): <||7| wft
Bhima shone like the lightning/
i.

'as

as your Majesty

a. 'like'

'the daughter of
'
instance/ 4. *in order that

3. 'as for

order that she shall think of no other ruan than thee/

that*

TTJ

no

is

i.
:

'Jt^FHTt

'

fulfilment of desire

*PT yi-tra :

*J

greater than this, that there

is

^TT ^f^t ^WT

he

^T

fV ^ifl^rfiT

so

5.

I shall so

con-

'

him/

that/ introducing (like ^T^ yd)

a direct assertion, with or without l^fiT at the end : t^ciiflf
*
TI^TT in proportion
1TOT you told me that / ^RTT ^RTT
trive that

will slay

6.

W[

as

'

the

so/

more

the more/

'

fl4|U|| tad yatha,

'

that

as

(is)

(follows)/ 'thus for instance/

-

that/ mtroducing direct aflsertions (like Gk. OTI)

with or without ^fit at the end <4rikq
c
you must say, I have slain my beloved here/ 9. (so) 'that':
fl Vtl ^fW W^'how (is it) that you do not know? 3. in
'
order that
'*&
fill *fW
yi: what can be done

^R^ y4-d :

i.

'

'

*$

^9%

in order that the king be not angry

'

4.

'

inasmuch as/ because/

'

since/

*rf^

yUi,
f

rather/
tingly/

or':
a.

although/

'if

(cp.

%^

c<*d).--

rf?[

*T:

x.

'or else/ 'or

^tj^l^f^ TT ^HT^r^ unwittingly

sometimes

or wit-

'

however/

^4^1 fn

yadUpi, even

if/

CONJUNCTIVE AND OTHER PARTICLES

156

^TRRt, ya-vat
'while/

'till/

i.

(with correlative

'as soon as.'

intended action

a.

m^<0

long as/

'as

'meanwhile/ 'just/ expressing

^iqf^+ii ^|qi*llfacq UTdt<l<!!4lRf ?TT*C

'having resorted to this shade, I will just wait for her.'

i.

yavanna:

180

'while

nofc '=r'till.'

a.

<4

SR

sometimes=* if not/

when,' 'no sooner

TTTTTt. scarcely
i.

'in

which manner,' 'as'

what account/ 'wherefore/ 'why':

'on

than/

(corr.Ttaf).

*US\ftm* 'hear why the kings do not appear.'

'

'

(generally with corr.?fa)

since

far away, teach this spell to

WI<Tl
so that

^HY%f ^ft
no blame

^mni

^^if*f

in order that

W^vatr
of

iva:

he

my eye

Hf%cTT

my

<ga$Jrl

'because/

beloved even
*

also/

4. (so)

'a device has

will be incurred/

that

'

may

been contrived

5. 'in order that'

THST

ffl-^^n *Rrf?T 'I will become his pupil,

be inspired with confidence/

used at the end of compounds in the sense

*jnf^mrta-vat, 'like a dead man/
like/

is

than* (^,

'the better thing (is)

or ^pr:

?J,

MiHllliV

lit.

(and) not'=r

being generally added to the

f HfTWTPTn^ ^PRr

'better

death

than association with the base.'

TT va, enclitic (Lat. ve), following its word (but for metrical
4
reasons sometimes precedingit) i.
r/ a. 'either or not/ 'option;

ally*

they

may

^un^tg

TT gi^:

optionally

make

'for (a child) that has cut its teeth,

(the offering)/

3. 'like/ 'as

it

were'

(=^):^rm^fiifSK*<ftfliM^
her to have become
changed in tfppearance like a lily blighted
f
with cold/ 4. with
:

^T
1

^HPT f%

mterrogatives='pray
qrrafr
is the use of a blind
eye?' *TT

'what, pray, (with=)

either

^f

^^vara-in Wna,
'better

*T

3.

'since thou seest

when

a/ whereby/

*f
5JJTJ ?faf

or/

_ TT

CONJUNCTIVE AND OTHER PARTICLES

i8r

^ vai, used in the older language as a particle emphasizing

preceding word, is

common in Sanskrit

^TW^satya-m
'justly/

but'

true

is

3. 'true/
(7J,

i.

amere explet

'truly/ 'certainly,' 'indeed.'

ej,

a.'righl

4. 'very well* (in answers). 5

'it is so.*

f?R

poetry as

TWlf^)-

^ ha, an enclitic particle, which in the older language

slig]

emphasized the preceding word, is in Sanskrit a mere explet

mostly occurring at the end of a verse.

f^
the

hi, never at the beginning of a sentence, but generally a

word: i. 'for/ 'because.' a. 'to be sure/ 'indeed':

first

IC

'thou art indeed his dear friend/

3.

=' pray ':

^fflf <^f^T pi'ay* show
how, pray, shall I know the gods ?
4. often used as a mere expletive, especially in order to a^
interrogatives or imperatives
4

'

'

a long vowel in 'poetry. The particle

times occurs twice in the same sentence.
a hiatus or to obtain

so

Interjections.
l8l. ^rf%T ayif "used with the vocative or supplying its p]

'

friend/ 'prithee':

*lnO^I*J l^l^*

^rf^T

'prithee

garden of love/
^Rj aye: i. a particle expressive of surprise, occurring ch
in dramas ^Rj *14d*fl%*TT Ml HI 'Ah,Vasantasena has arriv.
us

go

to the

2.

sometimes used like "=nfa aa a vocative

ho '
are, exclamation of address
'

'

ahaha, expresses

i.

joy,

'alas!

ha

'

I have

particle.
'

'

sirrah

'

fallen into a

'
:

deep

qi

a. sorrow, alas

mire/
"^fijt

aho, exclamation of surprise,

or blame,

joy, sorrow, anger,

commonly used with the nominative

pn

INTEBJEOTIONS

158

181

'Oh, the sweetness of the song!'

*

are praiseworthy

Ah, Eiranyaka, you

used especially
?T?^ Ah, BO indeed

(cp. 24) is

PW

CT

to express

'

it

was

sudden recollection

!
'

ah. (cp. 24) expresses joy or indignation, ah

*

Ah, you who

'

m, woe
or

fT

^J

'

'
:

TRfl ^rf^T-

'

slight

alas

'

'

your guest

often

combined with fV^J dhik

ha dhik.
'

'

'

often
diftia (inst by good luck '=) thank heaven
with
*='
to have cause for joy or congratuprosper
^a^vrdh,
!

f^ftJl

'

lation':

f^m *lf

5joTi R(^|^*1

^i5H

'your Majesty

is to

be

'

congratulated upon your victory

f%P{ dMk, exclamation of dissatisfaction, reproach, or lamenta*

f
fie !' woe
It is regularly used with the accusative, but
the nom. gen. voc. also occur
f%T^ ^i^^tj shame on you
'
^7T bata, expresses i. astonishment
ah ' 3. regret
alas
'

tion

'

'

'

It

is

also

combined with other

interjections in

the same sense

^1

^TTft bataare, ^fft ^T,

^7f.
*
f
'ft: bhoh : i. usually an exclamation of address
sir
ho
*
listen!
Though a contracted form of an old masculine singular
'

'

vocative (bhavas),
persons,

and

is

it is used in
addressing female as well as male
connected even with the plural number. It is

often repeated:

ft *ftt ^ftjTTT: 'listen, Pandits !'

a. it
sometimes occurs in soliloquies^' alas '
'
'
bravo
a. with imperative=
^T^ adliu ; i. well done
'come': 44|<(^H|: qi|f:
let
!

'

^7^ ^nhlT^'come,

be played for as a
I wiU go/

'

stake.'

3.

well

'

with

x. per. pres.

'if

I live, I shall undoubtedly see him.'

c

i.

hull*

a. 'farewell!'

Damayanli

VI

INTERJECTIONS

82
Ix4xita:

i.

159

exclamation of exhortation

come,'

fff

we< fc <* fo come, I

?t

a. expresses grief:

listen.

pray
hurry: 'ohl* 'ah!'

will

tell

thee*

*pj

^1

3. joy, surprise, or

'alas!'

'

'

^T ha expresses z. astonishment or satisfaction ah a. pain

alas
^T ffllRiH alas I am undone.' It is frequently accom:

'

look,*

'

'

pray

'

'

panied by a vocative; and is sometimes used with a following

'
It is often combined with WH*{, f%P{ or
=' alas for
I

ace.

CHAPTER

VI

NOMINAL STEM FORMATION AND COMPOUNDS

Vominal

A.

Sterna.

182. Declinable stems, though they

often consist of the bare

means
rc*>t (either verbal or pronominal), are chiefly formed by
:
kinds
of
two
are
mvSLxea
These
to
roots.
added
of suffixes
or those added directly to roots (which may be comwith verbal prefixes) ; secondary, or those added to

primary,
pounded

stems already ending in a

x.

Primary

suffix.

derivatives as a rule show the root in its strong

'

'

*
knowledge (fo^[ know '). In meaning
abstract action nouns
they may be divided into the two classes of
in sense to infinitives) and concrete agent nouns (cognate

form

e. g.

%^ vd-a,

(cognate
e. g.
in sense to participles) used as adjectives or substantives
'
man, think '); ^fa yodh-a, m.
JlfTf ma-tfc f. 'thought'
;

(^^

'

'

fighter'

Ogt^yudh,

tions of these two.

concrete sense
4

'

eye

e. g.

Other meanings are only modificaThus abstract substantives often acquire a

'
'
to mean
nay-ana, n. leading comes

fight

'),

*RR

(the organ that leads).

*.

VI

PBIMABY NOMINAL SUFFIXES

l6o

When the bare root is

remains unchanged;
^pi^ytidh,

f.

'fight,'

e.g.

m.

used as a declinable stem,

fi^dvfs, m.

'fighter.'

only at the end of compounds;

Boots ending in

^ u, or ^& r

Many

9(T a are

'enemy

-duh, 'milking' (81),

shortened to ^T

members

of

(80);

of these stems are used

a,

and those in

are always modified hy adding a ?^t

are oiily used as the last

usually
9

(hater)

^g

e.g.

it

182

i,

these sterns

compounds;

e.g.

su-kr-t, 'doing well* (cp. 187 b).

primary nominal suffixes connected with the verbal

have
already been sufficiently dealt with, viz. those of
system
the present and future participles: lR^at (85; 156), ^fPf ana
b. Several

and JTPT mana (158); of the perfect: TRi^vams (89; 157); of

the past passive participle (i 60) 7f ta and "f na; of the gerundive
:

^(*lW an-Tya , Tfc^ tav-ya , and ^T ya (162). The formation

of stems to which the primary suffixes of the comparative and
superlative,

f^TR^ Tyains and

istha, are

added has

also been

explained (88; 103, 2). Of the rest, the following, in alphabetical

order, are the most usual and important :

^a

s ubstanti ves and

jt

^emit*);

mih);

ifR

'

adjectives ;

^Sf megh-i, m.

bhag-^C,
'

e . g.

^nt sa*rg-a, m

'cloud'

(lit.

m. 'share' (^T^hhaj,

creation

'discharger':

'divide')

fTRT

'

pleasing,' dear (ift prl, please *). The substantives are

1
almost exclusively masc. j but "**! yug-tf, n.
yoke (Gk. fvy-o-v,
priy-it,

'

Lat. yug-u-m).

^P^an: masc. agent nouns and a few defective neuter stems;

e.g. TT^raj-an, m. 'ruler,' 'king' (90, i); ^TflL ah-an,
'day' (91,
*

The Utter part,

(i8a, a),
*

n.

2).

but the whole

The firri part of *T^

ya, of thee two suffixe* is secondary

employed as a primary suffix (i6a, 3).
tav-ya ig probably derived from the old infinitive

iya and

IB

ending ?|% tave (App.III, 135).

VI

PRIMABY NOMINAL SUFFIXES

1 82

ana

rs,

neut. action

*ll^l

'see'),

nouns

'
r

e. g.
<5Tiff

d&g-ana, n. sight

bh6j-ana, n. 'enjoyment*

'enjoy'); also agent nouns ;

n.

l6l
'

(^J^bhuj,

e.g. '*U$*f vah-ana, 'conveying/

'vehicle'; very rarely with -weak

vowel: CTHKT kyp-ana"

('lamenting'), 'miserable/

f^ is,

^H^ as,

^3^ us:

concrete meaning (cp.Ss)

*

light

neuter action nouns, often with

e.g.^TC{vc-as, 'speech*; aiftf?^

'

'

jy6t-is t

VJt^ dh&n-us, bow/

fem. action nouns, also agent nouns (adj. and subst.),

'
and a few neuters of obscure origin
e. g. Wft krs-f, f. 'tillage ;
:

'bright'; tnflG pSn-f, m. 'hand'; Tffa aks-i, n.

suc-i,

^ffi
f

^ifei ^sth-i, n. 'bone,' ?[f%C dddh-i, n. 'sour milk' (cp.

*eye,

99. 3)-

u:

agent nouns, adj. and subst., the latter being mostly

but
masc.,
including several fem. and neut.; e.g. Tf^J tan-u,
'thin' (Lat. ien-u-i-s); on^r bah-i5, m. 'arm' (Gk. fnjx-v-*) 5
^5

Wn-u,

f.

nna

'jaw'
adj.

4j|l*J

jan-u, n. 'knee' (Gk. ydv-v).

and masc. neut.

subst.;

e.g.

ftVu

4
'

young'; fif^M mith-und

(m.)

n. 'pair/

i|pi

t^r-una,

sak-una, m.

bird.'

fem. f mostly corresponding to m. and

a-u, 'body'; independently formed:

^F

f.

^^

tx-u,

in

^ u;

e.g.

'

cam-u,

army/

'bride/

?l ta :
ordinarily forming past passive participles
appears, in a more general sense, as Ihe suffix of a few adjectives
'
and substantives ; e. g. IjVcf n'l-trf , 'cold,' ^ftlVK as-i-ta, black* ;

besides

'

'

m. messenger/ ^ff hds-ta, m. hand/

1
ti: fem. action nouns;
e.g. *jf?f bhu-tf, 'well-being

du-ta,
f?f

'

(Gk. <u-<ri-r)

however,

masc. (owing

'

;
TTrffl jfla-tf, 'kinsman/ is,
to its concrete sense designating a male

^rrf?T ja-ti,

birth

being),

PRIMAEY NOMINAL SUFFIXES

1 62

3 tn :

chiefly

forms the stem of

infinitives in

VI 182

3*^ -turn

also a few masc. and neut. subITJ*^ gan-tum, 'to go

*
m.
stantives
thread,*
tn-tu,
^7T he-trf, m. cause (fi& hi,
TF^f
e.g.

'

'

'impel')

vas-tu, n. 'dwelling* (Gk. oa-rv).

n*g

tr ; masc. agent nouns; e.g. 3Rg kar-tf, 'doer'; also

names of relationship, fern, as well as masc.
ma-tf
e. g. +1
ig
7[

f.

'mother/ frjJ pi-tf, m.

^T tra, m, n., ^fl tra f

means
tra,

f.

expressive of the instrument or

'

g. TJT^f pa-tra, n.

e.

cup

{'biter

^"^

^S[

daips),

{JC^I ma-tra,

tha, m. n ., ^TT tha,

*

<1JiB|

m.

f.

e. g.

^f d4ms-

measure' (Gk.

f.

^( a>-tha, m.

ford

n,,

TT na

aim/ object

^||V|| ga-tha,

f.

f.

IpUT

sre^-ni, f.

^|

'son
*f

nu
?
;

^nj

m. f.;
'Hne/
m. f.

adj.;

v4r-na,

e. g.

m. colour

song/

e.g. "BTOT
*

'

*
;

tfif par-n^, n.

wing

irf^T ag-nf, m. 'fire* (Lat. ig-ni-s);

e.g. HT^J bha-mi,

?|^[ dhe-nd,

ma,

'thirst/

f.

tfs-nS,

t*f ni,

'

'

besides ordinarily forming past pass.

participles (160, i), also adjectives and substantives;

krs-na, black

fie-rpo-i/).
'

'

'

'

ti.

tir-th^,

f na

')

m^n-tra, m. 'prayer*

'

(^?^ man, think ')

^T

drink

(TTT pa,

m. "tusk*

'father' (101).

m.

f.

au-niS,

m.

'cow/

subst.;

m. 'smoke/
If^ man, m. n.

m. 'light/

%ftl

e.g. rft*T bhi-ma, 'terrible';

dhu-ma",

chiefly neut. action

nouns

e.

g.

k$r-man, n. 'action/ HH^brtfh-man, n. 'prayer'; "KX**^ ad'man, m. 'stone' (Gk. aK-pov), 9t$j*v. brah-m^n, m. 'one who
prays' (90, 3).

fa mi,
bhu-mi,

m.f., ^ft

f.

'earth';

nd,

f.;

e.g.

<fiX

^ift bhu-mT,

f.

ras-mf,
id.;

m.

4HYJHI

'ray;'

laks-mi,

f.

prosperity/

^ yu, m.;

'

e.g. *TSJ man-yii, 'anger';

^fl

myt-ytS,

death/

VI

PRIMARY NOMINAL SUFFIXES

82

?; ra, adj.

m.

n. subst.;

ru,

adj.; n. subst.;

e.g.

^1

ug-rd, 'terrible*;

^W abh-r, n. 'cloud.'

m. name of a god;

rud-ra*,

163

e.g.

*ft^

bhi-rii, 'timid';

^pBJ
**

as'-ru,

n. 'tear/

va,

adj.
a,

m.

subst.;

m. 'horse'

e.g.

*f$ ar-va,

all

(Lat. sal-vo-s);

(Lat. eq-uo-s).

van, adj.; m.n. subst. ; e.g. iffa^ pi- van, 'fat';

m. 'stone' (90, 4) Tl^ par-van, n. 'joint.'

gra-van,

a.

Secondary nominal Suffixes:

a, adj.;

m.

n. aubst.:

forms adjectives,

chiefly with initial

Vrddhi, expressing the sense of relation to or connexion with the

'

ni|cr manav-a", belonging to man* (^J

of
these
have become substantives in the mas-c.
manu). Many
e. g. 7Uf4f manav-a", m. human
and, as abstracts, in the neuter
being'; q^ifii^ vaisvamitra, m. 'descendant of Vis'vamitra
primitive word;

e.g.

'

'

tn^R

pauvus-a, 'manly/ n. 'manliness.'

When

formed with

Vrddhi, these derivatives always take ^T in the feminine.

^W a : forms the fern, of adjectives which in the masc. and
neut. end in ^f a

'

'

4i|dl kant-a, beloved (97)

^ITV ani: forms the fem. of the names of deities ending

^ a;

e.g.

e. g.

^^lllH

in

indr-Sm, 'wife of Indra.'

^U41 ayana, m.:

forma patronymics with initjal Vrddhi;

descendant of As'vaJa.'
'

e.

g. ^ii^|^i|t|i as'val-ayana,
i; i,

m.: forms patronymics with initial Vrddhi

e. g.

'JH^fTT

manit-i, descendant of the Manits.'

Similarly formed

is

^ETnCt^T

$ar ath-i,

^*^ in

charioteer'

^i:

sa-rdth a, 'driving

forms, in the sense of

stems ending in
hala, n,

(9T^T

'

^a;~ e.g.

on the same car').

from

possessing,' adjectives

^TftPl. bal-in, 'strong,'

from

TO

strength

(87).

forms the fem. of masc. stems

in consonants (95), or with

made with

suffixes

ending

tr (101 e), often to those in

^u

SECONDARY SUFFIXES

164

VI 182

when formed with Vrddhi) ;~re. g

'
'
goddess
dev-a", god '). Cp. 107.
l^f ina : forms adjectives, chiefly expressive of direction and
'
made from words in
^f^aflc ; e. g. *M-41*I prftc-iua, eastern
(98

or in "W a (always

c),

'

(^

dev-i,

'

(TTT^prfific, 'eastward').
*

V^ *y* : forms general adjectives ; e. g. Mf*Tl*J parvat-iya,

1
mountainous 5 ff^frf tad-iya, belonging to him,' 'his.'
ka 5 forms adjectives and diminutives ; e. g. 1*IHF1S dnta-ka,
c

'

with Vrddhi, ^TTf^fi varg-i-ka, * belonging to the rains

ti) ; Vl ^qi raja-ka, m. 'petty king/
putra-ka, 'little
The fern, of such derivatives (in a-ka) is often formed with

ending

-,

^W!

ifca

gf^TT putr-ikS, 'Httle daughter/

forms adjectives with a temporal meaning
e. g.
*
3LT1 1 nu-tana, 'present/ y<lfl*l purit-taua (f. I), 'ancient.'
*OT tama : forms superlatives and ordinals
e. g. ut-tam^,
e. g.

WT tana

'

'

highest

'

hundredth.'

aata-tama\

TTTtara: forms comparatives ;

ITT ta,

e. g.

^^TT ut-tara,

'higher.'

^f tVa, n. form abstract substantives with the sense

conveyed by the English suffix knees'; e.g.
dev^-ta,
*

f.,

'

^n*f

%MI
q^W

'

divinity ;
amrta-tvrf , n. immortality ' ;
paiicatva,* five-ness' (i.e. dissolution into the five
elements), 'death.'

tya,

adverbs ;

adj.;

m.

n.:

-~*-&f*m

forms nouns from prepositions and

'

nl-tya,

constant

'

^R?^ ^pa-tya,

'

n.

off-

spring'; ^*ii(ei

^ tlia, adj.
*

ama-tya,m/ companion' (^f?ITaina/at home').

forms some ordinals from cardinals
e. g. ^RT^
;

catur-tha^ fourth,'
** bha ** form8 the
*

*****

fW

vrsa-bhi,

names of animals ;

e.g.^Hgarda-bhi,

bull/

ma, adj. forma some superlatives, partly from

prepositions,
*
and some ordinals ;
e.g. ^|^r ava-mtf, lowest,' ^T^H madhya'
ia\ middlemost ;
panca-ma, 'fifth/
:

T^f

VI

SECONDARY SUFFIXES

183

165

adj.: forms, in the sense of 'possessing,' derivatives

from substantives (except such as end in

'

agni-mt, maintaining the (sacred)

*RJ maya,

adj.

a)

e. g.

fiery.'

t^ I), 'consisting

^
'

fire

of;

'

e.g.

mano-maya, 'consisting of mind, spiritual.

forms adjectives
^T ya, adj.; m. n. subst.

in the sense of

'relating to/ masc. patronymics and neuter abstracts with Yrddhi,

as well as oidinary adjectives without Vrddhi
*

neck

relating to the

^H^N^I

Aditi';

e. g.

Sfa|gra"iv-ya,
'

'

(iTl^l griva)

^if^ffT 5dit-ya", m. sou of

saubhag-ya, n. 'good fortune* (from 4J4f'|

fi^ei

su-bbga, 'fortunate');

pftr-ya, 'paternal*

pitf,

(ft^

'father').
"^

ra,

forms comparatives from prepositions and ordinary

adj.:

'

adjectives

^1^^

e. g.

a"

va-ra,

lower

'

f
;

\JJ5T

dhum-ra^,

grey

(from

^R dh-Qma,
m.

fT lay adj.;

smoke').

forms adjectives and a few diminu-

subst.:

'

tives

e. g. CiftlHI
'

bahu-la%

abundant

kapi-U
'
;

^PV

('

monkey-coloured '), brown/ W1T1T

vrsa-la^,

m*

'

'

little

man/ man

of low

caste/ 'Sfadra/
'

^?^vat
offspring'

^P^

adj.

van

possessing

';

H <*

e.g.

^q^ praja-vat, 'having

'cloudy/ m. 'wind/

i+it^c^ ntfbhas-vat,
forms in tbe sense of

masc. substantives;
epithet of Indra;

'

'

possessing

adjectives

^PW

^
forms adjectives meaning 'possessing';

and

f
e.g. 41MC| lx niagha*-van, 'bountiful/ m. an
1 tfthar-van, m. 'fire-priest."
e. g.

^HJ-

in, 'glorious/

183. The above lists practically supply the rules of gender

These may be summarized as followR.
for the Sanskrit noun.

Speaking generally,
I^T, 5Bf u, are

all

stems ending in the long vowels ^ff

feminine; stems ending in

a,

?^t, *^n,

may

a,

be

VI

GENDER
masculine or neuter; stems ending in

or

^ u may

184

be of any

gender.

Feminine are all stems formed with the suffixes ^HT a, v

^F u, ?TT t5, TT tra, f*T ti.
A. Neuter are all stems formed with the suffixes ^tva, ^ru,
of a living being) "V^a^
J^is, ^5^ us, and (unless the name
*

a.

and (unless meaning an agent) ^J1 ana.

Masculine are (in so far as tbey are not used adjectivally)

va, ^Jyu; **nV^
stems formed with the suffixes 7f ta,

c.

all

ayana, f[
cf.

^ nu, fi?
also
e.

(patronymic),

Masc. or
if

mi,

"8R

ka,

H bha, ^T la.

fern, are stems formed with the suffixes f^T ni,

also stems

^ tr;

formed with the bare root (neuter

adjectives).

Masc. or neut.

^ tha, T na, ^T una, H

ma, ^t ya,

"^ ra,

WT

an, "JT^ man, *f^ van ; also the adjectives

^T Ina,|^r lya,

n,

If<^ mat,
/.

fc^

Masc.,

tya, ^f tra,

formed with X*l * n

'

>

7TT tana, 7TR tama, TT^tara, Tf^I maya,

fern.,

or nent.

are stems formed with

or

^ u.

Compound*.

Verbal Compounds

are

formed by combining roots

with some twenty prepositions and a few adverbs.

The
pound verb is conjugated like the simple verb. Thus
'to go,'

tu

vat.

B.
184. X.

^T a

are stems formed with the suffixes

com-

combines with ^f^ sam, 'together/ to

'to go together/ 'unite*

The compound

;
3. sing. pres. ^HI^Ri sain-gacchatL
root can be used to form nominal stems by means

of the primary suffixes .enumerated above

(182, i)
sarp-gam-a',

&

Tbe

prepositions

following:

e.g.

^ROT

m. 'union. 9

.*^ft

ati,

which are compounded with roots are the

'beyond*;

WfV Sdhi,

'upon';

VERBAL COMPOUNDS

VI 1 84

^JRP

VT

167
'

'

^Tft a"pi,
away
1
'on'; ^Brf5T abhi,' against'; ^RT ava, 'down'; ^SJT a
'near'
"d,'up'; ^Riipa, *upto'; f% nf, 'down
f*ra>fs, 'out';

'after';

between';

anta*r,

pa,

'

'

towards

prtfti,

'

pra, away
'
;

T|f^ p&i, 'around'; IT pr, forth '; JTf?T

*
*
f% vf , asunder ' ;
sto, together."
;

^^

A few adverbs are

of verbs
Tn<^ tira"s,
6.

'

dha,

^bhu,

put,'

be

tiro 'bhavan, 'they

'let

\T

e. g.

frt^^^fSfl

tiras-kurvanti,

'

put

conceal

aside,'

disappeared*

dha, 'put in front,'

kriyantam,

with ff kr, make,*

aside,'

'

HlO'W tiro-dha,

abuse';

'

'

across,'

'

compounded with a limited number

a] so

^tl,

'honour';

them be honoured*

e.g.

'

fTjO^^I'^

with BF kr and

puiiis

y^f^^^l^

^Hft^avls,

they

puras-

'openly,' with

with

^R^as and ^bhu, 'to appear'

e.g.
avis-karoti,' he shows'; ^u fq ^ tTl qs avir-asit, he

kr, 'to manifest,'

kr, 'to adorn.'

appeared'; ^IflH, ^lam, 'enough,' with
s'r^d, an old word meaning 'heart' (Lat. cord-), having acquired
the character of an adverb, is compounded with \TT dha, 'put';

and similarly
1

?rar

and

iista,

i,

*TO^

'go,' respectively;

^M^HlA

l*ltgt(t|

^ u becomes

namas-kftya, 'having

stam-ita, 'set* (of the sun).

may

Note. Adjectives or substantives

kr and ^bhii, before which final ^U
final

ace. of

W kr, 'do,'

*i^'iiT+f srad-dadhami, 'I

e.g.

l>ut faith,' 'credit* (Lat. credo);

adored'

^^H. ^sta-m,

n&nas, 'obeisance,'

'home,' are compounded with participles of

^ u;

e.g.

a,

^HI

vasi-kr, *red\ice to subjection,'

be compounded with

^R[ a, or

vasa,

m. 'control

<nTi^ vas'i-bhu,

becomes t^ I,
1
:

S^Hw

'become sub-

tfftj^Bfl parikhi-krta, 'turned into a moat* (H(\^II

parikha). The sense of these verbal compounds implies a trans-

ject'

The

giving

preposition TIT & reverses the sense of verbs of going or

e. g.

^JPR^ a-gam,

'

come

'

'

^1^1

a-da,

take.'

VI

VERBAL COMPOUNDS

68

formation

thus

^ffcfl+Jfl

jewel/ but <|+J4f ratna-bhuta,

compound

mean 'turned

ratni-bhuta would
'

185

into a

being a jewel/ as a nominal

(188, i c).

II.

Nominal Compounds.*

185. The power of combining two or more words into one,

which belongs to all the Indo-European languages, has been
more* largely developed in Sanskrit than in any of the others.
Not only are long and complex compounds here in constant use,
but they also take the place of the analytical modes of expression

which prevail in the other cognate tongues. Thus Kalidasa

describes a river as 'wave-agitation-loquacious-bird-row-girdlestrrag-ed/ while we should say: 'her girdle-string is a row of

Com-

birds loquacious because of the agitation of the waves.'

pounds being therefore of great syntactical importance in Sanskrit,

it is necessary to distinguish and classify the various kinds, in
order that the meaning of a Sanskrit sentence

The most convenient

understood.

classes of Co-ordinatives, Determinatives,

may be

clearly

into the three

division is

and Possessives.

Determinatives, so called because the former

member

The

determines

Dependent and

(or qualifies)

the

Descriptive.

Possessives are secondary compounds, consisting

latter,

are

of two

kinds,

chiefly of Determinatives turned into adjectives.

a. All words making up a compound except the last, ordinarily

appear in the form of their uninflected stem those with two atems
using the weak, and those with three, the ^middle stem (73 c).
;

The

last

word, in the case of Co-ordinatives and Determinatives,

retains, as a rule, its usual

substantive,

an

its

gender

form and

inflexion, as well as, if a

while, in Possessives,

it is

variable like

adjective.
*

E.g. ^i^rar. deva-dasak,m. servant of a god, or of the gods

'

VI

NOMINAL COMPOUNDS

86

169

^SlfiUj^U svSmi-seva, f. serving a master' V<al1 raja-karma,

n. duty of a king
J 1 1 *1 *V sa-nam an
bomonymous nom. m,
;

'

'

f.

'

n.

{MfsT),

Co-ordinative (Dvandva) Compounds.

1.

l86, These consist of two (or more) nouns, far less commonly
in sense by the copula
adjectives, very rarely adverbs, connected
Dvandva, the name applied to Co-ordinatlves by the Hindu
grammarians, means pair or couple.'
'and.'

'

'

Compounded substantives are inflected iu the dual or plural

according as two or more objects are denoted, the gender being that
of the last member;
e.g. f^jAI^H hasty-asvau, 'an elephant and
i.

1
{g^-^ll? hasty-asvaJjL , elephants and horses.* When,
however, the parts of the compound express not individuals but
as
categories, the Dvaudva is inflected in the neuter singular

a horse*

'

a collective;

Names

'l^ll^ei*^

e.g.

gavaasvam,

of objects associated in pairs

by way

kine and

horses.'

of contrast are often

'

combined

in

Dvandvas

aho-ratra,

members

siderable

e. g.

fcu^l^lt

siipha-gajak,

lions

and

M |<*|4|*l|<J[r<n fiSrameya-maij&raV dogs and cats'

elephants';

of

in the
e. g.

m.

n.

'day and night

compound

is

2
.'

not limited and

^cj|Mq*n^jili i^|^tllJ
s

The number
is

often con-

deva-gandharva-

monusauittga-raksasat, 'gods, heavenly musicians, men, serpents,

and demons.'
a. Adjectives

(including past participles) are comparatively

seldom compounded as Dvandvas;

e.g. ^TH^(V4U[ uttara'
'
daksina, north and south
UD^^H sltausna, cold and hot ;
'

'

sitaasita,

"white and black

Cp. Lat. su-ove-t*uriliA.

3
';

*<ii4n

Cp. Gk.

ghanajtyaia,

COORDINATIVE COMPOUNDS

170

Bini8m

'dense and extensive* (forest);

VI

186

krta^krta, 'done and

'

undone
*JHl^nn mrtaajata, dead and unborn/
Two past participles are sometimes compounded to express
immediate sequence, the relation of the second to the first being
;

&

often translatable

by as soon

as*

e.g.

&l& drsta-nasta/ seen

and vanished *=' vanished as soon as seen

1

di ed as

soon as born

'

uprooted and replanted

3.

SU'dJVfl jata-preta,

HjngifiHfciOfMcT ut-khata

'

and arisen/

'

+ prati-ropita

'

'
;

tJjTifi^a suptautthita, having slept

having jiist arisen from sleep/

Examples of the rare Dvandvas composed of adverbs are
*
sgytfm-pratar, 'in the evening and morning ;
i.

e.

'

by day and night/

complex Dvandvas, made up of compounds of
are met with;
e.g.

1TO*^ div5-naktam,
a. Occasionally

another

class,

vyaklrDa-kesara-f-karSla-mukha, 'having a dishevelled

jaws/ consists of two possessives (189),

mane and

terrific

b.

Of the numerous Vedio Dvandvas consisting of the names

member being in the dual and separately accented,

of deities, each

only very few survive in Sanskrit:

1

Mitra and Varuna ' ;

and Earth/

^11^1^^

dyava -prthivyail,

Heaven

In cases other than nom. voc, ace. the final

is

memberjmly
C

inflected:

f^flM^^:

mitra-varunayot and

dy5v5-prthivyo^.
4

mother/ and ft^ pitr, 'father/ as the first

Dvandva of relationship, assume the form of the

mStr,

member

of a

nom. aing.; ^ncill^nO mSta^pitarau, 'mother and father J

pita-putrau, 'father and son/

Mitri and DyivS are Vedic duals. This

type of compound was
porhap* OTiginally due to the juxtaposition of
e. g.
elliptic duals (c) ;

Mitri/the two Mitras' being -'Mitra and Varuna/

i
a nnmenl Dvandva (< two and ten in
which the
')

TOTO dvi-da^a

old dual.

first

number is an

CO-OBDINATIVE COMPOUNDS

VI 187

The masc. of co-ordinate

pairs of relations can be used alone in

the dual so as to include the female;

*

parents';

"3^0

-svaSurau

l
.

e.g.

IslTdO bhratarau

Dependent (Tatpnrusa) Determinatives.

a.

187.

fflflO pitarau

=' parents-in-law *; tpft putrau=

'son and daughter' (as well as 'two sons');

'brother and sister

171

dependent determinative

is

one in which tbe

first

member depends on the

last, tbe syntactical relation of the former

to the latter being that of an attribute (noun or pronoun) in an

oblique case. Tbe compound maybe a substantive or

according as the last member is one or the other.

an

adjective,

E.g. flf^^m tat-purusa, m. 'the man of him,' 'his man* (an

example used by the Hindu grammarians to designate the class)
;

'

'

thinking oneself a hero ;

'
'
with
endowed
virtues (upajta is a past part.)gunaupeta, adj.
In dependent compounds the first member may have the sense
of any oblique case, but that of the gen. is by far the commonest.

frn, sura-manin,

i.

Ace. The

a verbal nature

last
3
;

adj.

member

^^^

is naturally always

an adjective of

jaya-prepdu, adj. 'desiring victory*

a desid. adj., cp. 170, a); ^*ftXf varsa-bhogya, adj.

'to be enjoyed for a year'
(bhogya is a fut. part, pass.); *Jf MI<T
'
come
to
the house
grh^Jigata, adj.
(agata is a past part.) ;

(prajpsu

is

'

<u)*UUH grama-prapta, 'arrived at the village*.* (A past part.

more commonly placed at the beginning, when the compound

is

1
8

Cp. Lat. Boceri~sooer et socrus.

Cp. Gk. &St\<j>ot and Lat. favtrei -' brother and sister.'
Cp. Gk.

I irtr(5-5a/xo-r,

horse-taming/ Lat. jU-dex,

'

pointing out the

law, "judge/
4

The

past part. *I7T gata,

'

gone

Tatpurusae in the sense of 'relating

hasta-gata, held in the hand/
'

to,' is
to,'

often used at the

'existing in*;

end of

DEPENDENT DETERMINATIVES
becomes a possessive;
a reached village.*)
a. Instr.

e.g.

VI

MltH4l*4 prSpta-grama,

lit.

187

'having

^itl^ masa-purva/ earlier by a month *$

'

like (his) master' (cp. 199, 2<r); ^Rfft*T alpauna,

'
'deficient by a little '='almost finished' ;
^rf|f?Talii.hata, killed

svSmi-sadrsa,

byasnake';

^^Tdeva-datta/ given by the

gods' (cp.

^<J-doroff)

commonly used as a proper name with an auspicious sense (Dieudonne') and often denoting an indefinite person=' so-and-so/
3* Bat. ^H^l^ yupa-daru, n. wood for a sacrificial post
'

'

'

fo<*^fa
adj.

vis^u-bali, m. offering to

Visnn '; H^f^TT prabhu-hita,

'advantageous to the king.'

A,bL

4-

^lHfn1

^^^ bhavad-anya,
5-

Gen. M<*3vi

vySghra-buddhi,

f.

svarga-patita,
'

adj.

'thought of

(its

from heaven

fallen

m.

man

'king's

being) a

a^'va-kovida, adj. skilled in horses

in the

*.

house';

'

*
;

'

'
;

^fWRT

grha-jata, adj.

born

purvahna-krta, adj. 'done in the fore-

Some dependent compounds retain the case termination in the

governed noun
TO.

^l^iAfl

tiger.'

LOC.HVOT uro-ja, adj /produced on the breast

'

from you.'

difFerent

rSja-purusa,

adj.

as a proper

another*;

V^TO dhanam-jaya, adj. winning booty/

name; ^<hl^ parajpnai-pada, n. 'word for
'

e. g.

q,^^fa

v5ca-pati, m. 'lord of speech' ; ^l\|fS<

m. as a proper name.

yndhi-?^iira, adj. "firm in battle/

A, If a root forms the last

o change except that ^ff a

add

^t

(Cp.

member of a Tatpurusa it undergoes

is

shortened to ^T

a,

while

^ ^ u,
i,

'

ia);- e g zp(^ vara-da, adj. granting

1
); f^Tftl^visva-JH adj. 'all-conquerl^'jJT^V^e
182,

^TOU; karma-kr-t, adj/ doing work/

AMh* end of a dependent, ft|^

ing';

'laborious/

visesa,

of/ Le. choice/

'pre-eminent';

m. means

similarly

'

special

^RR: antaiu,

n.

VI

DEPENDENT DETERMINATIVES

88

difference,* generally

ticular';

n^fq^H

e.g.

<^;m^\

dour*;

sometimes

other,

m. 'extraordinary

tejo-vis'esa,

par-

special/

splen-

desajuitara, n. 'another country';

'

\ipayajintai a, n.

means

173

a special means

'

*U*Uni

bhasyaantara,

'

particular conversation.'

n.

^nj

d.

at the

artha,

end

and

dat,

m.

'

object,*

purpose,'

loc.;

e.g.

cpTOWfaj.

is

often used adverbially

and

of dependents in the ace.

less

commonly

in the

damayanty-artham, 'for the

sake of Damayantl.'

Descriptive (Karmadharaya) Determinatives.

2l>.

j88.

member

descriptive determinative is one in which the first

describes the last, the syntactical relation of the former

to the latter

expressed in three ways

i.

By a
i.

e.

may be

Noun (in apposition)

'

e.

g.

T^rff

rajajsi,

m. king

'

"

sage,*

This relation

being that of a predicate.

royal sage

??ffanf

stri-jana,

m. women-folk.'

thus sometimes compounded with a proper name

'
OcMinister Raksasa.'
e.g. 'limttliJ^Kfl amatya-Baksasa,

a.

A title is

casionally the

proper name comes

first;

e.g.

Sandili-mStr, 'Mother Sandili.'

ft.

The apposition often expresses a comparison

jalada-s'yama, adj. 'dark as a cloud';

4

cold as ice ';

as

the

f^RlfiiH

hima-rf'U'ira, adj.

^reTRWJC^W jalaantas-candra-capala, adj.* fickle

moon

reflected in the water.'

When

both members are

substantives the object with which a comparison is made is placed

e.g.
not at the beginning of the compound, but at the end;
'

pumsa-vyaghra, m.

'human

'roan-tiger,' Le.

*TPfI^
'honied speech'; HT<^M^ pada-padma,n.
tiger';

like foot.*

tiger-like man,'

vafc-madhu, n. 'speech-honey,'
c

foot-lotus,'

i.

e.

i.e.

'lotus-

DESCBIPTIVE DETERMINATIVES

174
c.

Vt

88

The past part.

iJTTbhuta, become,* 'existent,* is often added,

in the sense of 'being,' to an appositional substantive (which is
'
thus turned into an adj.);
e,g. d*fl*J?f tamo-bhuta, existing in

a state of darkness
184

6,

'

'

being a jewel

Vf^JJl ratna-bhuta,

'

(cp.

note).

By an Adjective ;

m.

'

black
^il^nfMtn nilajjtpala, n. 'blue lotus'; +i^|j madhyaahna, m. 'midday
*?v}*J|Jf ardha-marga, m. 'half way';
a.

snake

e.

g. &<*!I*IH krsna-sarpa,

*;

vartamSna-kavi, m. 'living poet."

a. Those compounds in which the
adjective is a

numeral

by the Hindu grammarians treated as a special

Dvign.

(in

They

two-cow').

are generally neuters or feminiues

fa^*

e. g.
expressing aggregates ;
f. 'the three worlds.'

T)

T^n^T tri-loki,
adjectives

by being turned

tri-guna,

n.

are

class, called

or

tri-loka, n.

They may

also

become

into possessives (189);

'the three qualities';

e.g. RlJJUT
adj. 'possessing the three

qualities.'

* 5?purva, 'previous/

is

put at the end, instead of adverbially

at the beginning, in the sense of

e-g.
c.

1^4 adj. 'seen

At

becomes

before,' after past participles

before.'

the beginning of a
descriptive compound *1Q^ mahat
^TT maha, while at the end TTT^rajan, ^T^^ahan,

^t% sakhi, ^Jpr

become TT^T, ^nf ^RT, TT^T (m. n-)

g.^rtTTTWt 'great k^ng qmrnp^punyajtham,
day'; flRm^: "dear fnend ; ^^^(^ ardha-riLtra,

respectively ;

'ausiacious
ni

'

j-atri,

'

e.

midnight.'
4f

are

S^d

*
anyo-(a)nya and M^^^ para^s-para, one auother,
& kind of irregular
compound in which the nom. masc. form>
Syi|iacfcical J uxt aposition, became generalized
'

sing.

3-

By an Adverb

(inclusive of particles

and prepositions) ;

VI

DESCRIPTIVE DETEEMINATIVES

189

m.
*J^*l su-jana,

e 'g-

'highest tforld';

'

honest

man

';

^UTITfl a-jffSta,

175

^RdtsTlqi adhi-loka, m.

'unknown';

adj.

q^TlTft

'

'

nql evaiji-gata, adj. thus faring/

yathaukta,
of
tf* Compounds
this kind, .when used in the ace. neuter as
adverbs, are treated by the Hindu grammarians as a special class
adj. 'as stated

Avyayi-bhava

called

<i

('indeclinable state').

Such

are
*

anu-rupam, 'conformably'

^vii^fo

'

'

ability

tlfal^n, sa-vinayam,

jivam, 'for

3.

according to

yatha-b'akti,
'

politely

<qiq^|c(^

yavaj-

life.*

Possessive (BaLnvrilii) Compounds.

189. These compounds are essentially adjectives agreeing with.

a substantive expressed or understood. They are determinatives
(generally of the adjectivally descriptive class) ending in substantives,

which are made to agree in gender, number, and case

-with

'

another substantive.

Thus -=1*5111^ bahu-vrihi, m. much rice/

becomes an adjective in the sense of 'having much

rice

(an

example used by the Hindu grammarians to designate the class).

^Every kind of determinative can be turned into a possessive;
e-

^toOU'i

as a foe

indra-s'atru,

'foe of Indra*

adj. 'having

Indra

4f)4JM<J4|i*J bhlma-parakrama, m. terrible prowess

'

of terrible prowess

adj.

m.

'

'

three-footed

(Gk. rp^Trod-, Lat. tri-ped-)

cast* (tnukha, n. 'face');

'

'

PlM^ tri-p^d, adj.

^vD^^I adho-mukha,

1f$1

sa-bhSrya, adj. 'accompanied

by

adj.

'

down-

a-putra, adj. 'sonleas';

his wife* (bharya);

^Nr^

tatha-vidha,adj.'of such a kind' (vidhi,m.);

adj. nom. m,f. (dvo-^tv^), Mil-minded,' 'dejected.'

In the Vedic language possessives were

distinguished from
determinatives by accent ;
e. g raja-putra/
king's son '; rajrf-putra,
A.

adj.

having kings as sons.'

b. Possessives often

come

to

be used as substantives or proper

names

e.g.^^J su-hrd,

^TOWTT^ satja'-sravas,
name

c.

of a

man

189

'good -hearted/ becomes masc.' friend'

*

the

VI

POSSESSIVE COMPOUNDS

176

adj,

nom. m.

of true fame/ becomes

(cp. *Ero*jcX^s).

Possessives are often very intricate, containing several other

compounds. Thus [(vlcl-tso'bha)-stanita-(viliaga-si eni)]-(^aftciguna) is based on an appositional descriptive consisting of two

main parts. The second, kaffct-guna/ m. girdle-string,' is a
Tatpurusa. The first is an adjectival descriptive in which the
i

'

'

Tatpurusa

'

vihaga-s'reni/ 'row of birds,'

is

The

ksobha-stanita/ 'loquacious through wave-agitation.'

is

a compound Tatpurusa,

in

vTci-

described by

which 'stanita*

is

latter

qualified by the

simple Tatpurusa vici-ksobba/ 'agitation of the waves/

^flnr

UUfJfc^uft fitaufna-kiranau, 'moon aud sun,* is an example of a

Bah uvrihi which is used as a substantive and contains aDvandva.
It is in reality a kind of contracted Dvandva ('the cool and the

hot-rayed" for 'the cool-rayed and the hot-rayed').

with a past participle at the beginning are

d. Bahuvrihis

syntactically often equivalent to a gerund or loc. absolute

tyakta-uagara, 'having the city left'

nagaram tyaktvS, 'having

*

tyakte, the city being

e.

left

the city/ or

e. g.

TTC

Wni

left.

Bahuvrthis based on appositional descriptives often imply

*
e.g. V|'l{^ l*|4j cajudi^nana, moon-faced* Mijtl

a comparison;

'

padmajksa

(f.

i),

lotus- eyed/

Inversion of the natural oider

does not take place here as in descriptives

qp$i< kalpa,

m. 'manner/ and

(cp.

TTpSf praya,

188, I

b).

m/ chief part/

are

used at the end of Bahuvrihis in the sense of 'like/ 'almost

1
;

e.g. in*racQ<!H

amrta-kalpa, adj. 'ambrosia-like

prabhata-prSya, adj. 'almost dawning/

In the same position M^.

para and M<41 parama, adjectives meaning 'highest/ 'chief/ used

as substantives, signify 'engrossed in/ 'intent

on*

(lit,

'having

VI

POSSESSIVE COMPOUNDS

189

as the chief thing

cintS-para, 'immersed in

ft*fllM<

e.g.

177

thought/
tJTMl matra,

f-

f.

'

in the sense of
'

men

bearing

means

enemy

'measure,'

is

used at the end of Bahuvrihis

'

e.g. *u*l*H^n i\|t namamatra nara^,

only
the name only.' At the end of past participles it
;

'as soon as

'

e.g.

4kl4*U^9 ^TJ* jata-matrai satrap, 'an.

come

as soon as (he has)

into being.

It

however,

is,

generally employed as a neuter substantive in this -way ;

'

for

its

measure

water alone'

(lit.

).
'

h. 4||f^
*

'

first

m. and

adi,

U*lf3| prabhrti,

f.

TIW adya,

beginning,'

(used as a substantive), are employed at the end of

'

Tiihis in the sense of

primarily as adjectives

'

and the

and

rest,'

and secondarily

so forth,

J*

etcetera/

as substantives;

(the gods) Indra

(deva) Indraadayal?,

'having Indra as their beginning'); ^cq lf^

'beginning thus* (i.'e. with these words)='and so on.'
(lit.

yO J

puro-gama,

l**

=' leader,

^4 purva, gT^^PC purat-sa ra

Indra.'

Ijj3f

and the

it\Jdi, n.

'preceding'

e.g.

and ^T-^5TT

of Bahuvrihis;

e.g.

'

smile,'

e. g.

are similarly employed in the sense of 'preceded, led,

or accompanied by';

by

Bahu-

'

'

rest'

e. g.

'that which has water

ftre

a^ BO

^ se d

Rfld^H 'with

adverbially at the

end

the accompaniment of a

'

smilingly

^^*nl*i\ttl\^ bahumana-purabsaram,

'

with respect,'

respectfully.'
'

/.

in

Words meaning hand' are placed at the end of possessives

fUJ sastra-pani, 'weapon-handed,' 'having a weapon

in (his)
one's hand
J^^^ti kusa-hasta, with kusa-grass
'

'

hand.'
/.

The

suffix

1^ in

is

pleonasticaUy added to

duty,' Sftsr

'house/

sila,

\nl dharma,

character/ *TTWT mala,

^f^TT aobha, 'beauty/

*JT&

garland/

irWT

varna^ 'colour';

s'ala,

e.g.

VII

POSSESSIVE COMPOUNDS

190

fa. vara-var^-in, 'of excellent colour/ The adjectival

ka is similarly often added, especially to unusual finals,

suffix qi

as to

words in ^S

r,

to feminines in

the feminine to words in

f^in

^I

(like

1^

e.g.*jn*ig*nl

nadi),

and

in

mrba-bhartr-ka,

'

whose husband

is

dead '; 4mflT|t|t sa-patnl-ka, 'accompanied by

his wife.'

CHAPTER VII
OUTLINES OF SYNTAX
190. As the

great bulk of the literature consists of poetry, the

syntactical- arrangement of the Sanskrit sentence is primitive

undeveloped, as compared with Latin

characteristic

is

and Greek.

Its

and

main

the predominance of co-ordination, long com-

pounds and gerunds constantly taking the place of relative and

other subordinate clauses, while the oratio obliqua

Another feature

is

entirely

the comparatively rare use of the

finite verb (frequent enough in the Vedic language), for whici
past participles or verbal nonns are very often substituted. There

absent.

is also

is

a marked fondness for passive constructions.

feature of Sanskrit syntax is the

special

employment of the locative

absolute.

The Order
igi.
is:

The

first,

of Words.

usual arrangement of words in a Sanskrit sentence

the subject with

its attributes (a

nominative); second, the object with

it); and lastly, the verb.

its

genitive preceding

its

adjuncts (which precede

Adverbs or extensions of the predicate are commonly placed

near the beginning, and
unemphatic connective particles follow

THE ORDER OF WORDS

VTT 192

^H M^t SRTO

first word;
e.g. *r*ra^[ ^ft
Janaka went in haste to his own city/

the

When there

a vocative,

is

170

it generally

comes

first.

'but

Instead of

the subject any other word requiring emphasis may be placed at

the head of the sentence
e, g. \|^H 9RTT *4d+tt f
lftg4|9(
1
at night you must not enter the monastery.
;

A. The subject, if a personal pronoun, is not expressed -unless

emphatic, being inherent in finite verbal forms. Even the general
subject 'one* or 'they' is often indicated by the verb alone;
'
e. g. WTTc(/ one should say ; "WF* they say '=' it is said.'
'

b.

The copula

expressed,

cedes

its

is

^Ra

'

is,'

unless the tense or

mood has

to be

In that case the predicate pre-

generally omitted.

'

noun ;

e.

g. ij\n<!ll

predicate bears any emphasis,

the night

Tlf^

Hfft is

If the

(is) cold.'

used, not *nftq

e.g.

TT
is

distinguished by knowledge, penance, or birth, is (certainly)

to be respected by the twice-born/

c.

word

Just as attributes precede their nouns and the qualifying

conies first in

compounds, so a

relative or other subordinate

clause precedes the principal clause, which regularly begins with

lit. 'of whom
a correlative word;
*TO
e.g. ^TO

^n,

VT

wealth,

of

him power/

i.e.

'he who has wealth has powwr.*

Similarly

The

Article.

nor & definite

properly neither an indefinite
(119),
But TPR 'one' and
article in Sanskrit.
'a certain,' may sometime* b*
to
used
express
being frequently
'

IQ2. There

is

*faf *soW

(no) may, when referring

'the' ; e.g
to persons or things just mentioned, be rendered by
'

translated

by

a.'

Similarly *T

'

the king' (of

that

'

whom we are

speaking).

VI1

OUTLINES OP SYNTAX

l8o

X 93

Vumber.
i.

193.

end
Singular collective words are sometimes used at the

e.g. 'teftsil stri-jana, m.

compounds to form a plural;
womenfolk '=' women.' Such collectives ate sometimes them-

of
'

selves used in the plural

e.

g. <*Tt*6

or WtSfiT* 'the world/

'people,.'

a. The dual number is in regular use and of strict application,

the plural practically never referring to two objects. It is therefore invariably employed with the names of things occurring iu
pairs,

'the hands
such as parts of the body;
e.g. ^<xH 4l^{V
A maac. dual is sometimes used to express a male

and the feet/

and female of the same

to others

*j|*|4^

the place of

heard?

^^

'thc parents

p. 171).

The plural is sometimes applied

writer as a mark of great respect,

3.
or

c,

fnaO

e.g. ^HTcfJ

class;

of the universe* (see 186, 3

and 3*^1*0

by the speaker

and *JflW taking

e.g. 5T7f +i*tRj: 'has

In this sense the plur.

of the dual (cp.
193,

m^U

'

'

feet

is

your Majesty

employed instead

insults

your Majesty('s

feet).'

Proper names are occasionally

used in tho same way; e.g.

ifft
the revered teacher Samkara.

4TlU(^i<Nl4l* 'thus

(eays)

6,
to

The

i. pers. pi. is

sometimes used by the speaker referring

*) instead of the singular or dual

himself (like our editorial 'we

(cp. 193, 2);

sotoething';

ftftfij^l+i; 'we (=1) too ask

g&|: 4JJHd*l'what shaU we (=you and I)

e.g. 44|4{fif
fijj

do now?*
c.

The names of countries

*

of the

are plural, being really the

names of

'in Vidarbha*
(Berar). In the singular the
people often danotea the king of the country.

name

VII

i<)4

**e uned in the plural only:

Some now**

(96, i)

Tim I*

*n.*

Me

'

Iflm

f.

'

'
s

1Bt1frf*

the raina '=' the rainy season

'

ijfnT.mu.'wifc.*

Concord*

ronroyd
case, person, gender, and number
194* Thi' rule* of
in gear ml the name as in other inflexional languages, but the
following Hjat'Ul point* may le noted:

at'*

lake the place of a predicative

The nominative with^fll may

z.

of calling, considering, knowing, &c.;

ace. governed by verl
^ft f"ltlf itnow me to be a Brahmin* (instead
'

Whe

a*

* dual or plural verb

refers to

two or more subjects

penou U

theflrit
preferred to the second or thu-d, and the second
1
e, g.
third
the
*T T^fPT: *y^ and I go.
;
percun to

WHf

dual or plural adjective agreeing with masc. and fern.

associated
itibntantive* In put ia the rnasc., but when neuters are
3.

with m**cul$ne* and

in the

fetnittinew,

neuter

(sometimes
'

singular)

cha,

*,

dice

g-

^fl^l^^^l Wti

(ak^), *nd drinking

*

* Wrf

vitl)L

*if$H\Fi *i^tl^'^ tbe

'

are reprehensible in
"

kinp

clipped wings, a withered tree,

and a poor man are of equal

dried-up pond, a toothleM wrpeat
<>0 the world.'
account (aeut, ring.) to (th *y
.

intakes the
Ocraaionilly aa attribata or predicate
jaatural

ttead of

ha grammatical gender ;

e,

g.Wt Ra^-n1i "Piv^iM*

(fern,) have
*thlnkiag (wac,)
been reduced to iaktag no food/
a demonstrative pronoun agrees vith
<?, Aa in Greek and Latin,

of thee the subjects

Win: WWr:

iU predicate In gettden-e.g. *tft

Ibe

be^ counnl*

^?ft ^W:

'<his (maao.)

(maac,).

of a
participle uaed in place

finite verb,

which should agree

182

CONCORD

vn

i 95

with the subject,

may be attracted in gender by a substantive
if in close
proximity with it;_e.g. tf
f3nf
thou (masc.) hast become

predate
4-

m^

(neut.)

A singular collective noun is

my

friend' (neut.).

necessarily followed by a singular

singular subjects require a predicate in the
dual, three
or more
require it in the plural.
Occasionally, however, the predicate agrees in number
with the nearest

verb.

Two

W^VT^'Kantimatl,
life

(are) at

your mercy

subject, being mentally

the rest;-e.g..

this

kingdom, and

'

my

very

(sing.).

Similarly, the verb which should agree with a

single plural
may be attracted in number by a noun predicate in its
immediate Proximity;
tn es e fleven

subject

kingdom.'

Pronoun*.
195-

1-

Personal,

a.

Owing to its highly inflexional character

Sanakrit uses the nominatives
of personal pronouns far less
frequently than modern European
languages do (cp. 191 a).'
*. The unaccented
forms of
and
(109 a) being
enclitic, can be used neither at the
beginning of a sentence or
metrical line (Psda), nor after
vocatives, nor before the

?^

^RR

particles

'

'

(not%)

house or mine.'
yOUr H nOUr>
?^'
(with which

*?
thou

it

(f'

*""*) ** P

lite

often alternates even in the

fo

of

WH

same sentence),

takes the verbin the

3. person ;_e.g.fvnf
your Honour say >
The plural TOr: (f.
J^W:)
in the same
way; it frequently has a singular sense

*TO>hat does
i.

construed

(193, 3 a).

compounds of T*IH>re Oftfln used in the drama

Two

:-^R^T^

PKONOTJNS

*95

jfrj

atra-bhav5nrefers to some one present, either the

person addressed
or some third
person='your Honour here' or 'his Honour here';
'

TSWTP^tatraMbhavBn,

tia

Honour there/ referring to some one

Both take the

the stage, can only be used of a third

person.
verb in the 3. sing.

off

Demonstrative. . ipj and ^RT^ refer to what is near

or present=* this/ The former is the more
emphatic of the two.
Both are often employed agreeing with a
in the I. or
a.

subject

'

pers. sing, in the sense

e.g.

of^here
a devotee stands ' ; ^^(Ifl here am I ;
'here comes your son/ ^RJ *rm 'this person'
used as an equivalent of *!/
'

3.

H* TO?ft tTOf?T

'here

'

is

frequently

6.
and ^tH refer to what is absent or remotest that/ ^f is
the more definitely demonstrative of the two, being, for instance,
the regular correlative to an antecedent relative. It has the

It has often (like Lat.

following special uses.

'well-known/ 'celebrated';

known charming
*

the aforesaid

In this sense

city/

e.g. ?IT

it

e. g. ^frf

may

the sense of
*that well-

It is frequently also the equivalent of

'

'

ffle)

Tf^t

4JH(

^R^ I (being) such

(as just described).

often be translated simply by the definite

*the' (cp. 192). When unaccompanied by a noun ^|

supplies the place of a personal pronoun of the third persoti=
*
he, she, it, they /'but with a certain amount of emphasis when

article

used in the nominative

same
when

O^WH and

"W^fY are employed in the

way as personal pronouns of the third person). Finally ^T
*
repeated means various/ 'several/ *all sorts of*; e.g.

WQ?(

'he read various treatises/

^nf^f JTrff 91I4
little
3. IPoftseuive. These pronouns (116} are comparatively
used, as the genitive of the personal pronouns is generally em-

In accordance with the sense of t^c^ (195, r c), its

derivatives Xl^\l bhavad-Iya and *URf* bhavat-ka are used
ployed.

as possessive pronouns of the second person in respectful address*

VII 196

USES OP THE CASES

184

THE CASES.
Hominative.
as
196. The nominative is far less frequently used in Sanskrit
the subject of a sentence than in other Indo-European languages.
Its place is very commonly supplied by the instrumental of the

agent with -a passive verb ; e. g.%^lft JNtK^WNltil ftfTifl

'
'
*
a certain field-watcher was standing aside (lit. by a certain
field- watcher it

was stood

aside').

used predicatively with verbs meaning

*
to be, become, seem, appear/ as well as with the passive of verbs
e. g.
of calling, considering, sending, appointing, making, &c. ;
.

The nominative

is

%*f *jFlTr
JRJTt **TW

WR 'the dog was turned into a tiger

by the sage.'
b.

The nominative followed by ff*f may in certain circumstances

take the place of the accusative (Bee 194, i).

Accusative.
197. Besides

its

ordinary use of denoting the object of transitive

verbs, the accusative

x.

is

employed

to

express

the goal with verbs of motion;

e.g.

'he went to Vidarbha.'

. verbs of
going, like inland ^TT, are very commonly joined
with an abstract substantive where either the corresponding

become/ or merely an intransitive verb would

*
be used in English; e. g. ^1 ^ftfif 4(1(71 he becomes famous
9
'
death ).
(lit. 'goes to fame '); TV^Ef 1pQgf?T he dies (lit. 'goes to

adjective with 'to

'

'

e. g.
a. duration of time and extension of space
'he learns for a month*; {ftO!*! J|4(Rl 'he goes (the distance
;

a Yojana' (nine miles).

3. the object of desiderative adjectives in *J (cp. 169) and of
some compound adjectives beginning with prepositions;
e.g.

of)

ACCUSATIVE

VII 198

'

am

185

desirous of crossing the ocean

'

'

devoted to DamayantT,*
4. the cognate object of intransitive verbs in the case of sub-

and the analogous adverbial sense in the case of

e.g. 3ftl*U^ *j4l*t 44j 'may he rain (L e. grant)

stantives

adjectives;
all desires

quick gait

'
;

ifVgT J

1^IH

'

us go quickly

let

(originally >

go a

').

Double Accusative.
198. Two accusatives are governed by
verbs of calling, considering, knowing, making, appointing,
1 know thee (to be)
choosing;
e.g. ^Mlf^f 1ST
i.

Mwfn^mt/

the chief person.'

a.

verbs of speaking (ff,

^R^, ^f|)> asking

fal ^,

JTHsNl),

(^-^1^),

instructing

winning (f%), milking

("J^f),

begging

fining

e.g.

(^);

'the bird addressed a speech to Nala';

*

he should ask tme evidence from the twice-born

e asks Bali for
s

fine

/ what she commands me

them a thousand (panas)';

the kingdom from Nala

(i.e.

a.

;
*

m^tl^ia ^H^q<^ he should

fSfW IW i^i*^ 'having won

'
;

the earth*

<(i(lf*l

iiV^R^^

'

they milked

extracted) gems from the earth.'

qKTC 'tell,' *%<^r 'make known/ and ^(T-t^^

'enjoin,

never take the accusative of the person addressed, but the dative
(or gen.).

3.

verbs of bringing, conveying, leading, dispatching;

'he brings the goat

to

the village

e.g.

'
;

'having sent SakuntalS away to her husband's

house.'

ACCUSATIVE

l86
4. causative vfcrbs

Veda

to learn the
it

may be

e. g.

,-

'

TW ^JJUIIMtlRl

if stress is laid

VII 199

put in the instrumental

(the direct ace.),

on the agent

?rf

^O^K

BSma

he causes

W^i

'

he should

cause her to be devoured

by dogs.
the causative meaning has faded, the dat. or gen, of
the person is used instead of the ace.; this is generally the case

When

a.

with ^Hlfrr 'show' ('cause to see'), and

hear'),

and always

^fT^R

'make known,'

withal

'tell* ('cause to

'tell' ('cause to

know').

In the passive construction the direct ace. (the person or

or thing)
agent) becomes the nom., the indirect ace. (the object
b.

remains
the

e, g.

Veda

<J*Tl

'

IfT^!

7ft

^^

'

'

WH9(
k

Bali

BSma

*|U||uft

is

caused to learn

her
dogs are caused to devour

'
;

asked for the earth.'

IiurbrumentaL
199. The fundamental notion of the instrumental, which

may

'
be rendered by 'by or 'with,' expresses the agent, the instrument (means), or concomitant by or with which an action is
*

performed;

e. g.

^rttWt.

TOS said by him *=' he said';

it

'he was killed with a sword';

'

in this
x.

there is

no one happier (201, a a)

1

world than he who has converse with

The foil owing are modification s

expressing

A the reason
account of

'

*bf , through,

^BT f*i^

a friend.
of the instrumental sense

by reason of/ 'because of/ 'on

f

e. g.

*T*T??t^pT^r through your favour

HmPl

'I luiish

'by the thought of a tiger

=
*

(op* p, 172, s);

of) pleasure**

g^fnPTT

you

for that fault';

<

bcftUBe he thought

it

^i

was a tiger'

under the delusion of (the existence

INSTRUMENTAL

VII t99
b.

accordance

nature
in

'

'

in conformity with

by,*

'

'

e.

g.lT^WT by

* *W ^W ^5* 'he goes by (acta

'

'

187

;
3TTWT by birth';
accordance with) my opinion.*

c.
e- g.

the price

^H^ajTH
'

rupees

'

('

ft<ft*l*M<Q tpjfflf^/ a boot sold

^uoiii

^RITT

T%^ <K<fM

always save himself even at the cost

d.

time within which,

'

of '=)

in

e. g.

'

with/ by means of '=) for/ at the price of*

^ftrft

for

done

is

31^14 ff^ ^f^ qiit^

man should
Ms wealth.*

"a

of his wife or of

anything

a hundred

('

by the

lapse

^RJ?t *gnuninar

is

learnt in twelve years.'

e.

the

way, vehicle

is effected

e. g.

which motion

or part of the body Tjy

qo*H

^Tf^Nr

WTCTt <tmU

in

tion

what

direc-

(lit.
by what road ') have the crows disappeared ? ^(fe^J
*
f
'he goes on horseback' (lit. by means of a hon ); ^t
'

he carried (uvaha) the dog on hia shoulder.'

of:

/ *in respect

with words implying superiority, in*

feriority or defectiveness ;

e. g.

to these two (abl.) in valour

tpTWf aTf^^ ^t^l

1
;

yjill.

inferior

*fVf!*l

fortunate man, you excel your ancestors in that (deverfaca)

n
*

'

*
;

blind of an eye.'

of/ 'with'

with words meaning

need

or TIM,

tively or with a negative), or

(with or withont
use of

life

to

me'

'

do ')

e. g.

*W

^IMm^

(gen.);

Mtn,

servants* ; flfc TOT

Majesty's feet have no need of
'what is to be done with that cow?* f* ^

^W *****

we

(to do) with this

'away with' and

'

Similar

^W^

is

'

enottgh

do not
'away with rising^* pray

the use

of

ofgW

(ot 180):

rise.'

your

fWW ^k*i

INSTRUMENTAL

188
'

!*

with/ at

with verbs

VII 199

of rejoicing, laughing, being

pleased, satisfied, astonished, ashamed, disgusted

'a

013

tl

low person

<jqf?T
'
Tfa he laughed at

'

9 *

off

is

satisfied

qnyn^

e. g.

even with very little*

it.

'

by with verbs of boasting or swearing

^Rf jpfr I swear by Bharata and myself.'
:

'

4fHM*ll

the

/.

'

obje<rt (victim)

'

with ^JB^ sacrifice

e.

Rudra/
Here we have the real
*
sense surviving from the time when
^I^meant worship

lW?l *he sacrifices a bull to

'

inst.

a god (ace,) with

(inst.)*

The concomitant or

a.

sociative

sense

is

^J,

{IT 1

mented, by the prepositional adverbs

1

^*f*V with, which are used

'

(like

with

generally supple-

^,

^THsfo and

e. g.
separation or antagonism is implied;
'the father went with his son 1
finrtf

^ R^R^M:

*
agreement with a fiiend

in

a fight with him/

to erpress

^T

^T ft^ ^R

This sense

when

in English) even

is

'dis-

'

^P^

he engaged

also applied

circumstances

the accompanying

or the

manner in which an action is performed e.g. <fft

^ft*t ^RTt *that pair lives in great aflfection';
;

with great pleasure.*

A. with the passive of verbs which
ing, joining,

have the sense of accompany-

endowing, possessing, and the opposite;

1

^f^n'accxmipanied by you; \pTif ^Rift

or destitute of wealth

'
;

TTT%^

f^WZ

e.g. <flt||

f^Wt TT

possessed

'

bere'ft

of life/

with adjectives
expressive of identity, equality,

c.

**lnim*ji

to Indr*';
*

tl *f

^ill, ^TpTi ^JWT

vm ^fW: 'Hke him';

or

'

e. g.

V*

3j7b<y
if

i not even
equal to the dust of my feet/
naed with these
adjeetivea (cp. 202, 2

d).

^?f :

equal

%
The

genitive

VII 200

DATIVE

l8g

Dative.

2OO. The

dative case expresses either the

generally a person, or the

A. The
x.

purpose

of

indirect object

dative of the

indirect object,

an action.
used

is

with transitive verbs, with or without a direct

object

Aof

promising

^ JJJU^H'l tell you the

<*\SJ^|fii

b. of sending,
casting

e. g.

TR-3J, JTlTMRT), showing

f^TpET ft <<^lfd 'he gives a cow

<*

Brahmin* ;

or

(jtft*

^, WTO, <3MM4(

(^f^

giving (?[T, ^Ipfa), telling

to

the

truth.'

aft^

messenger was sent by Bhoja to Raghu';

'
they cast (47) darts at Eama.*
with intransitive verbs meaning to please

3.

e- g.

long for the kingdom

servant.'

(^i^(

govern the
3.

^^

m&j
*HW/ it pleases me

^"ys!
0"^^

^ ith

Le

J9MIC!

1 <WTil

31*1*1

^^

I do not

when compounded with prepositions

T*ft 'salutation to

e.g. ^!U)^tl^

'

health to thee

'
;

<l^l^ ^f?d

'welcome to her Majesty.

is

'he goes for

(=to

(=

authority for the instruction of

principles of morality
;

Rama'

for

which an action

to

e. g.

*J7G<i

obtain) salvation';

(=

your Honour (has)

full

to instruct) niy sons in the

'

y*!^*

^\<4

obtain) fruit';
'

')

*hail to

very often equivalent to an infinitive

'he worships Hari for

fight

^^ ~

ace.)

done, and

(=' to

^^

desire

he is angry with his

P(i4\|%| gn^ft

B. The dative of purpose expresses the end

ia

injure

'

with words of salutation;

GanesV;

^'

'

5^

&Jad

3R:>

fa^),

Wfi^dt he

'

au Devoir.

started for a fight

v ** 201

DATIVE
This dative

is specially

be

tend or conduce to

fit for,'

<n^ulfM

e.g.

the

taken by verbs meaning

'

'

1*

weak leads

g-

e<

(j|^, ^f-tR^, *MJ[)*

'piety conduces to knowledge.'
in the same way, but are often omitted;

T^T^

*rat|Y

Hff?T 'the combination even of

to safety'; ^(|j^|l(||4|

(serves) for the protection of

a.

'

(=to

It

Sfjjp[*(/ your

'be able/ 'begin, 'strive/ 'resolve/ 'order/ 'appoint';

1?1

^WT ^nitKHl^qqiltnil^K^

win over (akarsanSya) the warrior

an oath';

to (take)

'

this story

his life*;

11(4) <$<f *i(q\!||^f

fl^MU]!^ ^rf^

(a-disya)

5Rq\*t

was able

to

'he began

try to find her';

*I will

'he has resolved

on abandoning

^fdfa^tffl

HJ^lf^Jm 'having charged

his daughter with the
reception of tbe guests';
: 'he was
appointed by the gods
x

for the destruction of

a.

weapon

protect) the distressed.*

The adverb

(=to

destroy) Bavana.'

'

'

'

-**i*^ sufficient

is

used in the sense of

able to copo with/ 'be a match for '

;~e. g.
'
Hari (is) a match for the demons/

^8^

be

tRl^*i

Ablative.
2OI, The ablative primarily
expresses the starting-point or
source from which
anything proceeds. It thus answers to the
question' whence?' and

^*5

E-g. ^Rf^
from thia forest';

may in general be

**Tf

XTPmmT

'

translated

^l^^lf^

^^T

'I

by from/

wish to depart

'ruin results from sin'

did not fiwerve from his

porpose' (ni&aysd);
:
'he heard of
thedeatii of his son from his
iff
relations';
'reer from her
bonds';

^%^

^ff^nf ^TT^
yq1lf4qj

f^ff

act

tfTTf ^fT

1^*1^ Resist from

'R^TR^' protect me from

hell.'

ABLATIVE

VII 201
The

a.

source of apprehension is put in the ablative with

verb* of fearing

(3ft,

^ft^ud-vij)

'you are afraid of the hunter*;

1

a Brahmin should always shrink from marks of honour.*

b. Verhs expressing separation 'from* naturally take the abla-

tive

TO3ft

e. g.

fo*HRW

parted from you

'
;

^TT

words
deprived of her husband's place* (such
also take the instr. cp. 199, 2 6). Allied to this use is that of
'and she

is

'

'to cheat of

as to separate from);

(= so

to cheat a

Brahmin

e.g.

of his he-goat.'

the abl. expresses the terminus a quo, it is employed with

all words meaning "far/ or designating the cardinal points;
c.

e.g.

As

%t m^ltl/far

'the mountain

from the village'; 4JI*II<1 Tg^f f*tf%*

(is) to the east of the village.'

time after which

d. Similarly the abl. also expresses the

4f^&

anything takes place;-e.g.

time ; ^VU^l^ after a week.'

su^iq/seen

after

The abl.

also expresses the following senses

original meaning:

connected with

motive = on accounted/
'

i.

the cause, reason, or

cause

a long,

'

'

of,'

'through/ "from

1
;

eats the flesh through greed.'

e.g.

flWl^ 1TO

This use of the

its

'be-

*1"^*iTd 'he

abl. is especially

tva ; e. g.
common, in commentaries, with abstract nouns in
of its
because
is
fiery
tf^fti f%|'4| l*V WH^BII^ the mountain
'

smokiuess.'
9.

(The

instr. is also

employed in

this sense: 199, I a.)

comparison:

*. with comparatives*

(=' than') or words with a comparative

learned
I
<l*Tt f^^tli,: 'ESma is more

meaning; e.g^Hfa^ ^
than Govinda' ; l^ft ^T1!^ HfflRL 1*!^ 'knowledge is superior
to action.' In thi$ sense it is used even with positives (=*in
comparison with') ;

ABLATIVE

192
wife is dear even in

^i^ft

world';

comparison with

(i.

VII 202
whole

e. dearer than) the

^<fUlfU! J<&fr g>^*tl^fM ^nifa 'hearts

more tender even than a flower.'

harder even than adamant,

b.

with words meaning 'other

VnC. f*W);

e.g.

or 'different'

*Hfa^

a&mi<^*ft

(V*T, \jA\,
'Govinda is different

from Krsna.'
c.

Allied to the comparative abLis that used with mnltiplicative

'

words like

treble/ &c.

double,'

e.

g.

M^^fl ??&*

*J<*H^

1
a fine five times (in
comparison with) the value.

Genitive.

2O2. The primary sense of the genitive is quasi-adjectival, since

qualification of another substantive means
belonging to or
'

its

connected with/

may

It

the preposition 'of.'

generally be expressed in English

"With substantives the gen.

possessive, subjective, objective, or partitive sense;

3^V

'the king's

man ';

cealment of Baksasa's

<J^**^*l^(^*j

wife,' (i.e.

'by you');

by

used in a

is

TTV

e.g.

*nnT: 'y ou* con-

m$*U

7TOT: 'by

the supposition of her' (Le.

'supposing it was she');
TTT*^ 'the foremost of the wealthy.'
i.

a.

The gen.

is

used

with

a number of verbs

in the possessive sense with

have power over/ and with

:
'

be master of/

$^Ts, TT-^

^, ^

'

'

be/ fa*17t

'

exists

e. g.

'I shall be master of myself;

'

I have a book.'
in the objective sense
(concurrently with the ace.)
-I

* nm b,''^

these

'I will

men

'

imitate ';-e.g.

have mercy on you

remembers your favours';

imitate BhTma.
1

with

VII 202

GENITIVE

193

the objective sense (concurrently with the loc.) with verbs

meaning 'do good or harm to' (BtHR
VHF,
c. in

'trust in

(foi:

^),

^^,

'forbear with'

Benefiting his friends'

'how have I done her an

faO;

*|4*1<3 *J*lSl

or

'expect of*;

speaks thus of

'ije

guiltless'

% 'forbear with me.'

injury?' "qiJM

with verbs meaning 'speak of

d.

t**l

e.g.

fl

me

am

be expected

may

q7i 'anything

e,g.
I

though

of that fool.'
fc.
frequently (instead of the dat. of the indirect object) with
verbs of giving, telling, promising, showing, sending, bowing,
'

pleasing, being angry;

granted safety to

him

e.g.

1TOT rn$U*l4

'

(tasya)

'

you ? <H4JT*lf^4j^ ^t*f I

(mama).

f^fi

'Zf^

'the sage

^l-qn

(is)

*l^nV

I have

TW *docs he please

not very angry with me*

'

sometimes (instead of the

/.

or satisfied

'

e. g.

mfM^^ffl ^lai^in,

with logs/ So also the past part,

with' (instr.).
a.
a.

The gen.

ia

meaning be

instr.) with verbs

tjjt

4fire is

*fuU of

'

(gen.), or 'filled

frequently used with, adjectives

allied to transitive verbs;

e.g.

filled

not eatiated

3R7 ft*ufVt\

^H*fl

old age
b.

is

destructive of beauty.

meaning 'dependent

'dear
on,' 'belonging or attached to,'
*

to

'

;e. g. TITRra:

(tava);

^c^^^l^

^T

mft*R:

^TW f*W^f

that

remedy depends on you

l^WftT

TfcC^R^r

'

'give

him' (asya) ;
up whatever you have taken belonging to
to
dear
is
kings?'
who,
pray,
TJUt flRi:
'

CP

meaning 'acquainted with/

oustomed

'versed or skilled

e. g
to* (concurrently with the loc.: 2O3/) ;
wiih
are, indeed, onversant

the ways of the world

*;

^ilWI^K

^^*^

unskilled

Edited by Foxit Reader

Copyright(C) by Foxit Software Company,2005-2008
GENITIVE
VII 202
For Evaluation Only.
9

in battle

SnTRT^' people

yftfl) ^*tt

accustomed to hard-

ships.'
'

d.

'

equal to

or

B<jj<3

e.g. IJ^Tr

199, ac);
3.

like

meaning

'

(concurrently with the instr.

IJW

'Rama

Krsna/
equal to

is

The gen. expresses the agent with passive participles :

a. past participles

meaning

having a pres. sense, formed from roots

'think,' 'know,* 'worship*;

'

e.g.

'

of =) approved of kings
'you are known to the hermits

thought

b. future participles

to be staying here.'

(which also take the instr.: 199)

e.g.TT

'

(jTOr) %^ff ?fT* Hart should he worshipped by me.'

4. The gen. is used with adverbs of direction in 7R^-tas

177^); e.g.CT?re ^ninTt 'to the south of the village';

sometimes also with those in Tpf -ena (concurrently "with the

(cp.

ace*};

5.

^^f^TTO 'to the

e.g.

The gen. of time

is

north of this* (asya) place.

used in the following ways

numerals similarly used

repeated within a stated

a. with multiplicatives (108) or other

it

how

expresses

often anything is

fM^ he
'

^Tff PK^*I

period ;

e. g.

sacrifice

three times

a year

should offer

*a Brahmin should perform

penance a
b.

the funeral

least

at

one

severe

the

abl.) in

year.'

Words denoting time

the sense of 'after*;

some days';

fava

are put in the gen. (like

'

e.g.

after

*RlM<JIC3f (kati-payaahasya),

t*l<q<3 'after a long time"

ft<4fl

is

also

used alone in this sense.

c.

noun and past

paression of time,

part, in the gen. f

'to-day
father died'

(uparatasya).

absolute (205, 2).

accompanying an ex-

have the sense of 'since';

(is)

e.g.

the tenth

This construction

is

^W

^9C?t

month since our

akin to the gen.

GENITIVE

VII 203

6. Two genitives are employed to express an option or a

ence between two things
e.g. qtl*l^
*|WtSf

-,

*of vice and death, the former

*

between you (the long-lived) and

is

differ-

*WR

called the worse*;

*^ s *& *ke

only difference

India.*

Locative.

203. The

locative denotes either the place where an action

occurs, or, with verbs of motion, the place whither an action is

The former

directed.
at,

on,

sense

may

by, with, near/

among,

corresponding to Lat. in with

-

in that tree*;

the latter by 'into, upon*;

and

'

t%^3 'inVidarbha'(i93,3c)
f

'

(Benares)

I ^iU

**

T^

3 lfruit < is

encamped on

had such

*f*nflrf^
'

*
;

<**un,

Been on

(= close

birds live

^ Wli"

kill myself at your door

loo. in

where ? MfaHHdftUU3% PiqtfPn

'

'

ace. respectively.

are examples of the ordinary use of the

The following
the sense of

abl.

variously be translated by 'in,

**

&* tpees>;

to) the

Ganges';

neither, among gods, nor Taksus, or among

menejtber,
been seen before *j WfT Mi if 'by
a

beauty anywhere

my side.'
A. When

the

loo.

means 'among*

it is

oftenequivalent to *

partitive gen.(2O2)
to me.'
(=of) all the sons Pamais dearest
'
dwells or stays is put in the
one
whom
'with
A. The

person

loc-

;-e.g.

c.

The

(=Lat.

'

'reft he

loc. with the verbs

lives with his

**

9
tOTft' stands and

'complies with
versatur) expresses 'abides by/
-

mother's
comply with your

d.

VII

LOCATIVE

ig6
The

effect 'of

used to express the

loc. is

tnrfi'

^Rfr

^ifar ^irt f^t

fate

^^

ifl

'

a cause;

203

e.g.

the cause

prosperity or decline of men.'

.

The

loc.

expresses 'contact with verbs of seizing by

(WT

fastening to fa*%), clinging or adhering to

e.g.^WtS
leaning on f relying on or trusting to;

by the hair'

ICTWt ^JIT 'taking by the hand ';

of trees

ft^|Rlf?f

'

'

f!*JJ&S

'

'

'seizing

*<WlitiTO: *JT* 'a hero

4lPMdlJ reclining on the roots

'he fastened a noose to the tree

not addicted to vices

^J^l^t

UJg

he

trusts in his
'

ft^^^

iU<3rfvi) Isigf^
on his bent bow.'

enemies

*
;

the gods fix their hopes of

victory
/,

The

loc. is

used (concurrently with the gen.: 202, 2 c) with

'
acquainted with/ versed or skilled in ;
'

'

adjectives
e.g.

meaning

<uTt^4]7)

TT%
g*
in

f^T* 'Eama (is) skilled in the game of dice'

'

^TT ^*4*(!. we (are) expert in acting/

The loc. is used figuratively to express the person or thing

which some quality or state

is to

I look for everything in

be found;

him >

e.g. ^|

(cp. 202, 1 d)

;
'

recognized as sinful in a prince

'there is no harm in (giving) advice to

Slfaf*! 'hunting
|*

the

afflicted.'

Similarly,

(is)

when the meaning

'

the loc. expresses

in the sense of

of a

word

is

explained,
'

'

e. g.

VfllMl

^flf

kalapa

used) in the sense of peacock's tail.'

It The circumstances in which an action takes place are ex-

(is

preaeed by the loc.;

*ia fortune*;
*

e.g.

TTRf^

'in case of distress

f^MI^T ^JJHl^^fWl

multiply.'

xap3e the loc.

if it

a predicative
participle,

it

HT^g

('in the presence of '=)

there being opeziings, misfortunes

expresses the reason

'

'

In the

last

were accompanied by
would be a loc. absolute (cp. 205, I a).
;

VII

LOCATIVE

204

197

The loc. of time, expressing when an

/.

action takes place,

The

place

loc.

e. g.

q$!4J

in

'

f^% f^%

/.

e.g.

'

'

is

only a special application of the preceding sense

'
the rainy season
f5f^l*n*^ at night ;

every day.

expresses the distance at which anything takes

^?ft Stlfn

*1^W

"^RVnaNfai'f

'the great sage

lives at (a distance of) a yojana and a half from here.

204* The loc. answering to

used with verhs

the question

'

'

whither ?

is

always

of falling and placing; concurrently with the dat.,

with those of throwing and sending (200 A I ft) ; and, concurrently

vith the ace., with those of going, entering, ascending, striking,
"bringing, sending;

^fl* MMld 'he

e.g.

on the ground';
same begging

fell

'

having put

howl

he

(it)

'

'
J

^^*J^ftf teunt placing his hand on

is frequently
'

in that

his breast

'

'

(W

do,

'the

jfiah

used in the sense of putting);

'

darts arrows at his

entered the river

'

enemy

4fd$ft

T^t Mf^^H
'

^HlM^f^fa T'f^ Mf^lff* he set out for

7f Rl^^ldl^*!^ he struck him on the

a neighbouring town '

"

;.

head.'

Secondary applications of

this loc. are the following

person or object towards which an action

directed or to which it refers =r towards/ 'about,' 'with

a. It expresses the

'

is

regard to

9
;

e. g.

lUlUI*}

^TT $$(

HT^PTt

'the good shoAV

^f\^

'be
compassion towards animate beings'; 3TO ^fo^qj
courteous to your attendants ';
(q^^$t 'they are disputing
about a field/

^%

b.

Concurrently with the dat (and

geii.)

it

expresses the in-

direct object with verbs of giving, telling, promising, buying,

selling (cp,

promised

200 A

(it)

a; 202,

to Indra

himself to a rich

man'

imparts knowledge

'

iff);

e.g.*ugtai^ nlq^ltt 'having

*

!H<H fl*)*l VRfff having sold

fi|d<f?f 3^* TTTl| f^WT^'a teacher

to an intelligent pupil.'

LOCATIVE

198
c.

Concurrently with, the dat. (200 B

vii 205

i, 2), it

may express

the aim

of an action with words expressive of striving after, resolving on,

matting for, of appointing, choosing, enjoining, permitting, of being

able or

fit

for;

e.g.

4l4o3Vlk

*[Kil SJ^J

for the appropriation of all property

(him) to a task'

husband';

4*ff(U qtj'S he appointed

K*n+1HJ cf^

jrf?ff

'an enemy prepared

'

'

'she chose him for her

^*l^*ltK^&Mil J^U^

'he

incapable of

is

supplying food for us*; 3<8l*l*4UfM TRffi "flRtl^ ^SRt 'the

sovereignty even of the three worlds is fitting for him.'
predi-

cative loc. alone ia capable of expressing fitness

'

sovereignty befits

dowed with worldly wisdom,

liberality,

e.

g.

*iqU"

man who

and heroism.

is en-

The

loc.

sometimes used with verbs which do not in themselves imply

an aim, to express the object gained as the result of an action;

is

e. g.

^4fill ?f*?T

'

3
flftft

!^

he

kills

the panther for the sake of

(obtaining) his skin/

Nouns

<f.

expressive of desire, devotion, regard, friendship,

confidence, compassion, contempt, neglect, aie often connected

with the

loc. (as is also the gen.) of

sentiments are directed;

'my

love

is,

e.g.

indeed, not towards

'I have no faith in you';

*

e.

Sakuntala';

if

'neglect of duties, however small, should not be indulged in/

The

loc. is
'

similarly used with adjectives or past participles

'

meaning fond of/ devoted to,'

e.g.

the object to which those

'

intent on,'

*ti4;4q<n *3f^I% TTT* 'women

and their opposites

(are)" intent

on their own

pleasure only.'

Locative and Genitive Absolute.

205. i. The locative is the usual absolute case in Sanskrit,

and has much the same general application as the Greek genitive

LOCATIVE ABSOLUTE

VII 205
and the Lat.

ablative absolute

went by*; ^itj

^V||^
he departed*; <BR^f

4'^M f^S $as ^

e.g.

^f ^[7f: 'the

^ifn

199

cows having been milked,

when

?rf%T +Jm4Jl<l) 'she gives ear

I apeak.'

The

a.

predicate of the absolute loc. is practically always a

'

participle
is

the only exception being that the part.

^R^ being/
^l4folf4U: WIT f,fan(\

frequently omitted; e.g. *R*f

'
how (can there be any) interference with the good in the

^ff%T

performance of their duties, when you

b.
is

The

'

part.

(are) their protector?

'

^R^ being

(or

its

equivalents

q<f*4M and

often pleonastically added to another absolute part.

'at sunrise,

become
c.

feltt)

the owls

e.g.

had

blind.*

The

part, is

when

when a past pass.

when the part, is ac-

subject is of course always omitted

used impersonally;

it is

also omitted

T^

companied by indeclinable words likelpp^, fTf, V^H?

e, g.
'when consent had been given by him'; Tpj
?l*U4^lJJl^
'this
lfft
being the case' (lit. 'it having gone thus*); 7RTT SSl!
^rf^t or ^i^T*l(%?t 'this being done.'

d.

The

and the noun *ti^

particle Tpf

compound) may
'no sooner

than,' 'scarcely

scarcely

(as latter

member

of a

be used after an absolute participle to express

had

it

when';

dawned, when

e.g.

';

'

no sooner had' his Honour

3.

The gen. absolute

and more limited

entered,
is

than/

much

in its application.

less

common than the

It is restricted to

loc.

contem-

poraneous actions, the subject being a person and the predicate

a present participle in form or sense. Its meaning may be rendered by 'while,' 'as/ or 'though*; e.g. HW<T\
*
wandering about, though I was looking on ; Tp

ft|7T:

while he was speaking thus, the hunter

VI1 2 6

PARTICIPLES

200
remained concealed

'
;

'

f^rat while he was thus

reflecting

women came

there to fetch

water.*

Participles.

206.
main

Participles are constantly

used in Sanskrit to qualify the

They

action, supplying the place of subordinate clauses.

Latin and Greet, express a relative, temporal, causal,

concessive, or hypothetical sense. A final sense is also expressed
the future
All these meanings are inherent in the

may,

as in

by

participle.

participle, without the aid of particles, except that ^rft

added when the sense is concessive.

mW

E. g.

with anger, said to him';

1

'

eflmfcg^ TO; ^rre

filftxfftjST

is

usually

the jackal, being filled

*1*U*t enaU

1"

'JJlfl

not
though you have been frequently dissuaded by me, you do

listen to

me';

you do not
to

tell,

dUfaUJ^

pieces';

Bhima

though knowing
rffaf

your head will be shattered

'he ran again at
Vi*K*H$(*l<l
it,

in order to strike him.'

Bahuvrihi compounds are very frequently employed in a participial sense, the part. *f?^ being omitted;
e.g.
.

being anxious he reflected.'

207. Present Participle. This

participle (aa well as a

pat
^BT% *sits,
3

with a present sense) is used with Hlf^l or *lflf?f

fdfa

'stands,*

^nrt *goes

on,* to

'is,'

express continuous action,

like the English

is

doing' ;

e.

g.

^fU^

'

5TT
for

Itl^ni

this is the

T'f lRHd*J^i" f^V^^f

we formerly dwelt

very forest in which

a long time*; tt^tldlQ 'he keeps eating*;

TnRl

'she is being carefully

'this

pot

is filled

'

guarded

with porridge.

Wl

VII 208

PARTICIPLES

2OI

a. The negative of verbs meaning 'to cease* is

similarly
construed with a present participle; e.g. f^fft
^PTn^^niTtne lion did aot cease (=kept) slaying the
'

animals.'
A.

Verbs expressing

endure,'

emotion such

an.

may be accompanied by a

of the emotion;

ashamed

e.g. t^8

of speaking thus

as

'

to

be ashamed/ to

pres. part, indicating the

*si<m

TR

^^-

eanw

**re yon not

'

c.
predicative present (or past) part, accompanies the aec,,
or the nom. in the passive construction, "with verbs of seeing,

hearing, knowing, thinking, wishing

o one saw

e.g.

(cp. 198, i);

me

entering';

?BF

the king one day

one repeating a couple

hmrd

oe

of si okas *;
'

RisHdli many daughter* of royl

are recorded to have been wedded according to the man*$i of
the Gandharvas/
3O8. Past Faxtioipleg. The passive part, in ?I and Hf *dit
form (161

89, n.

3
)

in

^(but hardly ever the pert wst pl

-used as finite redae (tK

^TO^: 89) are very frequently

T^^^IR. 'this was

being omitted) ; e.g.

he said this/

aaid by

to

'

a.

wise

The
its

v
passive of intransitive

an active sense ;
past participle has
1

fl^JT^'l

stood there for a longtime

'

.to

the Ganges

^[ irf^T

^H

he died on U

*y/

in ?! have both * pftT*

Jb. Some past participles
'obtained'
tive active sense ;-e. g. TTO

^
1

'

'

Ht^re

entered (by)

'having drunk';

and 'having entered

t^I

'forgotten*

*I

w9

^^
"

202

PAB1TOIPLES

VI I

and 'having divided';

JT^f 'begotten
'having borne* (f.); ^l^fc 'ridden,' &c., and riding/ &o.
'divided'

c.

The past

tive active

participles in

T never seem to occur with

and

transi-

meaning.

209. Future Participles Passive. These (162)

The

necessity, obligation, fitness, probability.

the same as with the past pass. part.

*I

must needs go

m mtlst not (= do not

:

kill

'then he too will surely

Occasionally the

fut. pass. part,

ease by the strength of your

is

king'; Hfl$|*Ufr

me,

make a noise.'

has a purely future sense ;

wings/

^RW^and m^(from 3j'be

to express
necessity

express

construction

e.g.

to another country*

A.

209

or high probability.

are used impersonally

The

adjective or sub-

stantive of the predicate

agrees with the subject in the inatr. ;
a-g- H*U ^r^f^n^f
is most
JrfiRfcqn 'she must be (

TO HTfipft ^T

probably) near';

strength of that animal

must be very

fTf7fT

XHM^

'the

great.

2IO.TheIiideclinableParticiple(aeriind)nearly always
expresses

that an

(rarely that

it

is

action

is

completed before another begins

simultaneous).
Referring to the grammatical

or the virtual
subject of the main action, it
generally agrees
tta nom., or, in the
passive construction, with the
instr.,
'
oocwionally with other cases also

;-e.g.

* JTOTO * *m:

ie

love increased as soon as

but

having

'then he
throwing himself upon
with

iwwtly smiling maiden '

with

him

he had seen the

{^7 agrees with

'

withaverbal

PARTICIPLES
noun

e. g.

fW f

1ft fvf\

203
*

*l?tn^ what

would you gain

*
by killing a poor man like me ? This use represents the
original
sense of the form as an old instrumental of a verbal noun.

b.

Having the

full

value of inflected participles,

may

it

express the various logical relations of the latter, and may even
be accompanied, like
^ff%, f^ft, ^ft to

expitssa

thereby

continuous action; e. g. ^JKl^rflfl *nfa 'he is the

most of all the townsmen.*
c.

number

foie-

of gerunds are equivaleDt in sense to

preposi-

tions (179).

The

original instr. nature of the gerund is preserved in its

or with a general subject exemployment with fcPH. or
</.

^W^

pressed by the impersonal passive construction;

e.g.
*
what (gain accrues) to yon by concealing ?
'have done with going to the forest';

'

'

heaven by killing animals/

if -one goes to

Infinitive.
This frequent form expresses the aim of an action and

may in general be used wherever the dative of purpose is employed

(200 B) . It differs from the dative of an ordinary verbal noun solely
in governing its object in the ace, instead of the gen.; e.g. 7f
5&1J
'

^Inn he strives to conquer him =q*$i

**nd he

^tcjj^t

strives

for the conquering of him.' It preserves its original ace. sense

inasmuch as it is used as the direct object of verbs (e. g. ^TT^

^W^ 'he obtains a bathe'), and

ject of a sentence.

cannot be employed as the subVerbal nouns usually aupply its place as the
is better

to
subject; e.g.
^T*f ^f *J Mfailfi 'ghuig (= give)
than receiving' (= to receive). The construction of the soc* with
the infinitive is unknown to Sanskrit, its place beiag supplied,
with verbs of saying, &c. by oraiio recta -with ^ffl {i&>}, or
f

otherwise by the use of a predicative

ace. (198,

and 207

c).

an

'

The

infinitive

be used with substantives

may

'opportunity'), adjectives ('fit/ 'capable

*

'

'

be able/
is

VII

INFINITIVE

204

wish/

begin ')

not the time to delay

'this is

e.g.

'),

time,

(e. g.

as well as verbs (e.g.

TW ^BTOt R^faiJH,

'this

'

an opportunity to show yourself;

f

who

on his forehead (by fate)?

(inorder) toask you';

(is)
5

?.

and

?^f

4qRl<j

wished

The

able to escape from what is written

to

3. sing. ind. of

infinitive in the sense of a polite

'

Ujp^

^tt*Rr* 'I have

i(*)ffl 'he

is

come

able to tell';

make.'
are used with an

^f| 'deserve'

imperative= please/ 'deign to'

your Honour please to hear me ?
;

will

&

Tha

into a

infinitive, after dropping its final

may be formed
Bahuvrlhi compound (189) with ITRT 'desire/ or
*H4^
s

mind/ in the sense of wishing or having a mind to do what the

verb expresses ;
l

e.

g^^TR:

c.

'desirous of seeing'; fil

what do yon intend to

say ?
There being no pawdTeform of the infinitive in

fTP^

'

^pTTT

Sanskrit,
verb* governing the infin. are
put in the passive in order to give

be taught morality by me ;
'a hut (was) begun to be erected
'

by him/

The fnt

part. pass.

ITWa'ak-ya may either agree with the

or b* put in the neat.

sing.;-~e.g. if
(mischiefe) cannot be repaired'

mg fftTfT 'she cannot be ignored

it to ignore') when angry/

3*

(lit.

'she

'fitting'

is

not a possible

and

5^,

'

8uit .

Same
'

irom JCKU

she should
rightly be released

by

me

VII 213

TENSES

205

AND MOODS

TEUTSES

Present.
212. The use of this tense is much the same as in English.
But the following differences should be noted:
i. In narration the historical
present is more commonly
used than in English,
to
especially
express the durative sense

(which the Sanskrit imperfect lacks); e.g.

'
"
Damanaka asked, How was it ? "
1

'

f*l% ^faffi Hiranyaka, having taken

sleep in his hole.

formerly/

is

e. g.
sometimes added to this present
I formerly used to live in a certain
;

WTfa
The

tree.'

his food, used to

particle

'

^ (which

in the older language frequently

accompanied

^T, and thus

much more

frequently used thus;

acquired

its

meaning when alone)

e.g.

'in a certain place

named Somilaka used to live.'

b. The present is used to
express
'

i,

a weaver

the immediate past;

'

"^n&m ^Hl^lfil
a. The present also

here I come/

e.

is

I have just

e,g,

come/

expresses the near future, IJ^T 'soon* and

'

With

e.g. ffc
b. It
e.

e.g.
(180) heing sometimes added;
'then leaving the bow, I am off*;
therefore I will just send Satrughna/
interrogatives

*Of*C

it

Tffl|

implies a donht as to future action;

'what shall I do ?

'

may express an exhortation to perform an action at once

^ppfa Mft^l^: 'then we (will) enter (s= let us enter)
;

g- *ff^

the house.'

Fast Taiumu
213, All the three past tenses, imperfect, perfect, and aorist,
besides the past participles ia fl t and W(^ ta-vat (and the
hi storical pres ent) , are used
promiscuously to express the historical

206

PAST TENSES

FtJTUKB

VI J 214

or remote past, applying

equally to facia which happened only
once, or were repeated or continuous.
tf. The
perfect is properly restricted to the statement of facts
of the remote past, not
coming within the experience of the
speaker. The i. and 2. sing, are therefore very rare.

A The imperfect, in addition

to describing the historical past,

states past facts of

which the speaker himself has been a witness.

The aorist has (along with the
participles in 7f and TWfO

c.

the special sense of the

present perfect, being therefore appropriate
in dialogues;
e.g.
*J^Hq: 'my

^H'Ulf^mdlglMlY

desire has obtained sweet fulfilment

'

I have bestowed tibe

'

;
|jwf
*
sovereignty on you ; cf

'

<ggqMHfl I

have

seen him.*

The aorist (very rarely the

imperfect) without the augment
used imperatively with Wt
(215 e and 180).
e. .As there is no
pluperfect in Sanskrit, its sense (to be inferred
from the context) has to be
expressed by the other past tenses
or the gerund, or
occasionally by a past participle with an auxiliary
<f.

is

verb.

Future.
214. The simple future

fctoe

is a
general tense, referring to any
action, while the periphrastic future, which is much less

frequently employed,
therefore often

is restricted to the
remote future. Both can
be employed in
describing the same action, and

they frequently interchange.

.

The future

is

sometimes used in an imperative

sense, when

go,

my

dear, but first hear

my request.'

Imperative.
215- Besides the ordinary
injunctive or exhortative sense, this

mood

lias

some

special uses.

rMPEKATIVE-^ OPTATIVE

VII 2i6
a.

The

forms,

first

207

persons, which are survivals of old subjunctive

may be translated by

'

will

'

or let

"Let us play"

'his brother said,

'

e.

g.

'5

*T*nftT'l

will

make/
The

b.

3, sing. pass, is

commonly used

instead of the 2. pers. act.;

(cp.
c.

e.g.

as a polite imperative

^T^dW/Sire, Pra7

'

listen!

211 a).

The imperative may be

used, instead of an

you live long'; ftpfT^,

*

auspicious
It

<f.

there be

tRJT*tt

^
;

e. g.
*

f^TC

^fa may

may your .paths be

with interexpress possibility or doubt, especially

may

rogatives;

=' Godspeed.*

optative or
*

benedictive, to express a wish or blessing

e,

g.

f*R *Rf?[ *TT TT^ ^l^l^1M\

WNT^

'

whether

hood
poison or not, the swelling of a serpent's

is
'

believe it ?
terrifying' ; iri^J *RT^T ajft 'who on earth would
*
now?
do
we
should
*what
fo*f^M <K,^T*I
e. The imperative with the prohibitive particle JFTT is somewhat
rare, its place being

commonly supplied by the unaugmented

(213 d)> by the opt. wither, or TO^and

aor.

flfW^with the instr. (180).

Optative or Potential.
2l6. Besides

its

proper function this

various shades of meaning

mood

also expresses the

appropriate to the subjunctive (which

has become obsolete in Sanskrit).

i.

In principal sentence* it expresses

ings:

a wish

(often with the particle "fTPf added);

/0 that I could see

t>.

the following mean-

Bama

e.g.

here!

possibility or doubt;-e.g.

haps he

may

be awakened by the lowing of the cows';

of their
'kings can see through the eye

OPTATIVE

208
spies';

Tpfc

-BENEDICTTVE

VII 217

V^RTT

f-*Ud TT f*llf^g<, *JWt

may

shot by an archer may hit an individual, or

'the arrow

not hit him.'

e.g. ^T
being often equivalent to a future;
will
not
not
this
1RTT *rnf f?[%<^/
likely to=)
stay hare.'
girl (is
c. probability,

d. exhortation or precept

e. g.

<Fm^ J4lJ

do you act thus

'
;

'

^MIMc^f \PT \tjc^ one should save wealth against calamity/

a. The optative is used in the following kinds of subordinate
clauses
:

a. in general relative classes

'the king

Jf'lTTf *JJTf?T

neglect the time for the

e.

payment

qtl^+l/ indicate

me

e.g.

the pkce where I

*Ufc^

am

% ^f

*TO

to live* (=tbat I

live there).

c. in

to

not

of salaries.*

b. in final clauses ('in order that')

may

^^ ^t

g. qu<?irfn*l*i<l|

who (= every king who) does

consequential clauses ('so that*);

e.g.

^ET

HfO

*in eeil

'

IT

*l(iti^^f^ (only) such a burden should be borne as

may not weigh a man down.'
d. in the protasis (as well as the apodosis) of hypothetical

clauses, with the sense of the Lat. present (possible condition)

or imperfect (impossible condition)

e -g-

*rf?[

subjunctive (cp. 218);

^ ^TTH *KMfJf^ t%9%?T *Ht\T W*tt

not a king, the state would founder like a ship.

'

if

there were

Beuedictive or Frecative.
aiy. This rare form (150), a kind of aorist optative,
restricted to the expression of blessings, or, in

the speaker's wish ;

to a warrior*

feh

the

is

first

properly

person, of

g. TK*Ufl4T $?Ttt mayst thou gire birth

11*41 *J*4ltf*^'may I become successful/ The
e.

imperative is also employed in this sense (215

c).

In a few rare

VII 218

CONDITIONAL

209

cases the benedictive is indistinguishable in meaning from an

imperative or an ordinary optative

'

ye proclaim
'for I

this speech

^ ^ WTO

e.g.

'do

1 f$ M4J$u(i

do not perceive what should

drive

any my sorrow.'

Conditional.
2l8. The conditional, as
future) veil indicates,

is

its

form (an

a
condition,
properly used to express past

the unreality of which

is

implied, and

pluperfect (conditional) suhjunctive

aorifit

indicative past of ibe

is equivalent to the

in Latin or English, or tie

It

in Greek.
indicative, used conditionally,

in both protasis and apodosis;

'

if

e.g.

is

employed

^W^R^i $'**

there had been abundant rain, there would

been no famine,'

If a potential is used in the

ditional in the apodosis

may

acquire

protect

a spit.'

would
punishment, the strong

con-

the sense of a hypotiietiotl

present (= imperf. suhjunctive) j-e.

inflict

law

roast the

weak

like

APPENDIX
LIST OF
The

VERBS

order of the parts of the verb,

Present

(PH,),

Imperfect

Perfect

(PF.),

Aorist (AO.);

(IMP.),

when

Imperative

Future

Gerund

aorist, participle (PP.);

all

are given,

Optative

(IP?.)

Passive

(FT.);

(PS.),

Infinitive (nrr.);

(GD.);

is:

(OP.);

present,

Causa-

tive (cs,), aorist; Desiderative (DS.)J Intensive (INT.),

The Roman numerals

signify the conjugational class of ihe

verb; P. indicates that the verb

pada ouly, A. that

conjugated in the Parasmai-

conjugated in the Atmanepada only.

it is

'bend,'

is

I,

P.

^RrfTT

PS.

IFZfft

PP.

B
'

anoint,' VII, P, "SPfflff

j,

OP.

^rWTc

II

*s.

ad, 'eat/

OP.

TWT^

II

FT.

^TO%
II, P,

an, 'breathe,'

3|l*f<$

n>v,

PP.

^, ^f; ^f%

"W^jfWI ps.'VSft

^^

IMP.

CS.

^R\J

^^ n/food

i|l^|(7| N

E, P. ^iftf?!

"Wfci;

PP.

IMP.

IPV.

IMP.

^RT^O ^11%

^flfH, Wf'lf|

or

OP.

H
s,

'attain,'

V,

^f?f,

A.

IMP.
II

211

LIST OF VERBS
'

ix, P. ^rorfa

eat,'

wr.

OP.
i

*firs

PP.

>

^t^n

n
'

be,' II, P.

V&R,

trf*,

IMP.

ut*i

'

throw,' IV, P.

as,

TRlfr I

a.
'

sp

obtain,' v, P.

wint ^m
DS. imfn H
i

as, 'sit,

i,

^|

W^T

go,' ii,

n, A. *ntt

pL

OP.

P. -urn , nPi, irt*

^Tm

*
I

^tw

p.

A.
irreg. pres. part.

adbii,'read,' II,
3.

m-

T?T:

^t*

APPENDIX

212

OP.

%|vTl*rid

FT. *4i3)m<)

AO.

II

^le

nvTIttf

PS.

du.

3.

PP.

II

'

idh or

^indh,

f7T,

IP*.

PP.

|,^K

ITT^T,

^r

kindle/ VII, A.
I

OP.

'

wish,' vi, P.

is,

t^:

i^tfd

le^fn

cs.

i IMP.

Ao.^ftc^

FT.

HfM^fd

PS.

^qrl

II

'

see,'
i

<*

a,

A. t^n!

I,

fam^
i^ffn N

FT.

'burn/

P.

I,

^^

PS.

BCP.

^rfTf

^5J7T

AO.

PP.

(|

^f^r

IMP. ^Jfalr^

PP.

AO.

II

pp.

r *go'

v^

&c.

,'

^^fd

P-

I,

PP.

A. TJY|^
i

^ra

IMP.
i

IMP.^JCT

ufv^pi:

PP.

s/sbine/

/do/ vin,

UTRf

1,

PF.

||

PF.

TITWT'l

PS.

^^

or

^^

grfrft, grrtfTr;

nff^MTi

cs.

A. ?TH^

ydm,

II

IPV.

inrafif

kam, *Iovc/ A. (no present)

\

^iri^

cs.

^t

j*,

^rari,

PP.

LIST OF VERBS
FT.

213

*f\mfii
8 PF.

^1(138)
i

w.

^Ixeft^

AO.

'

w'fr

PP.

cs. '4i$4i1?i

draw,

I,

"

tt

^^

^fS^nt

PS.

<t^ft

^?hc}

'

be able/

'stride/

PF.^nTl

A. qP5ft

I,
\

Tekram,

f^ft

GD. ^fh$

II

AO.

I,

*l*lRf,

AO.
I

cs.

ftm'fa

or

kn.

buy/ IX,

'
,

f^
cs.

km;

vm,

ksi.' destroy,' V. P.
r

H*J*4ffl
,

^H^tfl

re -

DS.

P. gHtfTT; 'plough,' VI, P.

VI, P.

kr, 'scatter/

*R^7i

OTft

AO.

DS.

3flfd

P.

cut/ VI,

wni

rr.

t^W

-throw,- vi, t^rrfw,

w.

I FT,

APPENDIX

214
PP.

fa^M, fa WO
^n9

FT.

nnp.

^MSRr,

%?pj

Wffif

dig,' I,

^q^

PS.

PS.

II

PP.

cs.

'

*gpt khan,

quake,' IV, ^tffif ,

or ^gfira

?t

%rnrfa

cs.

subh,

^n

^ir^

or

pp.

PP.

^rraf

eat/
P.

P.

^i(<n
9

I,

*teu,

'^rT

N PP.

qigfft

n, p.

DS.

f gad, 'speak/ 1, P.l^fTI

i

Tflnpu

cs.

Jii^ejrd

PP.^!^

II

DS.

'

go,' I, P.

cs. J|4(i||7!

DS.

'plunge/

*n*

PP.

guh, 'hide/
i

pp.

^jp

gaiing/
i

GD.

I,

PS.

I,

iTKfft

^TT^

or anfffl

DTT.

PP.

GD.

^iffc

3mi

^CT

PP.

||

GD.

tie/

or

dTffpfl

^f

tt

4Ui|ft, <%

<

pr
^ffif, o^
03^1 JOT. *rft<pT;

*fon?l

IKT.

f%Rf*nrf?r

A.

I,

J|f<mf?|

fajifnfii

gRTW (138, 7) AO.

*m 3RTT, Tr or

ap^fTf
P3.

FT.

cs.

cs.

IX, P.

^pRjit N

^1^

^nr^rfTT

W^R^

AO.

^Tf^rf?r N

gpfr, ^rSf

afan,

FT.

cs.

AO.

oafhi

Tf?T

IOT.

tl

PS.

n
I

P8.

LIST OP
AO.

^nrtfa,

VERBS

^w^te

"

OP.

IWRrfn

P.

glai, 'droop,' I,

^- WfT^

**>

cfmuiid

u
s,

'sound,'

^^

I,^rf?f ,*%

^S !<">

gbra, 'smell,'

P. ftPHfTt I

I,

w.l^

w. ffR

cs.

s,

'speak,' II, A.

P.

car, 'move,' I,

'move,'
i

P.

I,

rp.5rt?m

w-

*Wfr
i

^ftfR.

"

^*f?r

or

^T^
cs.

'.

H
oi, 'collect,'

V,

'think,'

f^tfiT,

II

X. P. ftRreft I

P.
\

cat,:

t^t

vn,

'

or

APPENDIX

2l6
'

ST^

be born,

jan,

STRft

IV, A.

**.

**%

AO.

J>8.
4

P. (134 A 4)
^TT5 jagr, awake,' II,

^TT^ff ,

PP.

'conquer,' I,

ji,

f^fi^

^iin

*ii\e,* i,

AO.

GD.fSrar, ^f^nsr

p.

nSjcD^

rr. 3^rf?r

^rfw

ftp^r

PT.

ps.^sq?t

cs.

it

3faH?r

u PP.

^nrn:

PS.

*?tffo

pp.

SRTTfiT R

/know/
rr.

^7*1%

IX, *T*fTf7T,

TTOfiT

PP,

p.

PS.

f^^Og:

sftfirar

^^

Vow old/ iv,

ir,

P. (A. with TR^T and f^T) SRTfit R

f^<g:

aiHK^l

cs.

TJT1TT

TTTO and ^ITH

'stretch,'

VIII, ffl{Vf?r,

.^

*****

PS.

^
I

PF.

ITT^

DS.
I

AO.

f^TrT^
PF.

7mm,

?ft

PS.

H
If

or

IV

'

'rafir '

"

fc^fjfi^^p^!^,^ .^r^T^QT
?r i

gf ***

ng[ft>^

ii

^.g^

"

WIT1? '

LIST OF VERBS

217

'

*Pl t?p, be

pleased,' IV, P.

gtgfa

wrf

H PF,

*$***

**-

H
-

tr,
i

cross/ I, P. or VI, A. fl^ffl or

AO.

^mOn,

^nrraf^or

'abandon,'

*T.

^, nfV^ nO*^

INF.

f?T^
^fX^fw,

I,

ai^ft,

PF.

^
I

nnK

**

cs.

B PF. n<*u*i;

cs.

'tremble,' I, P. or IV, P. A.

WT^

A.

tvar, 'hasten/ I,

TOfn

B FF.TTSn;

or

w.

^
^tRn

<*

'bite/ I, P.

Adams',
PP.

^5!

to.

dab, 'burn/
I

ff

give/ HI,

i
'

div,

PP.

?T

" ^' ^ ^
'

play/ IV, P.

CS.

or

w-

cs.

nnr.^fg^

Fr.^fi^fif

<^ffl
^fl^

^lf^f?l

^rf* T^

INT,

*F. sura. 2.

ft

C8.

^If

cs.

M^afii

TT-

^^l

DTF.

dS,

P. ^ff?f

VTT^X

AO.

^8

^?T,

I,

PF.

^jf*T

ps.w

J>3.t^f^tTI

^
I

APPENDIX

2l8
f|[f

dih, 'anoint/ ii,

A.
IMP,

>

OP.

PF.

f^f

A.

f^f?$

PS,

f^J^

fl[irrac,

PP.

fipV

o-tfrf^n
-

dnh, milk/ II,

(like

fl[|)

anra. 3.

?^f*V

OP.
FT.

tj

9
'

X|

P8.

l|fpt

pp.

J\*

GD.

"

A0 .
tfl

^/

1,

A.

A0

IMP.

-A.

GD.

LIST OF VERBS

219

A.

PS.

Tsfaft

AO.

^raifa

fawfa

DS.

^WRT,, ^rf^RT

AO.

PP.

fffl

GD. p

VnT

'

wash/

\ITffl 'fl
(

hu,

shake,'

or IX,

J,

'washed'

^ftfff,

^^

q?t

PS.

VHrffl,

>^|

':

running

vfroft

^TTOfff,

VTJ^

^Trf?I,

TI

PP.

^&
^pri^Bm^ni cs^K^fd,^
bear,' (no present) H

^TTTj

PS.

^nq7t

or

blow,' I, P.

wraft

nad, 'hum,'
cs.

I,

'*(^4jf?l

nam, 'bend/
i

cs.

rnr

<H>.

I,

^ll^f?l
^Wf?T

P.

1|

*Wi|ffl[ or

M PT.

P. if^ft

'Nsft M. f*ft
i

\WfiT

PP.

or

Ao.

l|4iV(7|

^*ft
urra

cs.

IKT.
P*.

TTW ^*

AO.

iw *raL al

^-

^l*!^

perish/ IV, P.

"

'TftWf'T

or

*Wf?I

iTf^rfW

I PP.
I

lltlci

DS.

111*4

PP 'TC

'Hjf

GD.

^ff

cs.

WTf^lft

'

nT,

fHfn,

bind/ IV,

nah,

lead/

cs. i||^|i||7l

I,

DS.

"ft I

II

P*.

fil^Mffl? ^t

f*RT6I

INT.

(p.

ill ^n

cs.

'nH

113)

II

PP.

TOft *^

AO.

nas,

CS.

AO

PS.

^ft^

eg.

dhma,

V4H*lfa

cs.

or

PF.^TR

II

'

dhy,

?t

x dbav, 'run,' and

I

FT.

220

APPENDIX

'

dance,' IV, P. JurfTf

t,

w 5^

'

||

ffcrf*

t^;

DS ,fi

n
*

'coot.'

qq: pat. 'faiy

i

us.

^fir,

i,

P. *rofn N

i,

w. ^fJnr

fq^rfn

?Tii PF.

pF..

^pi.

ITW

i?f?r?rr}

pad, 'go/ IV, A.

?T

r&ft

A0

'

pS, drink,' I P. preffr U PF. IT^-,

or

A0 ^rqrfr
.

'

ITT pS,

3\pus,
p. ql?t

P.

H,

protect/

mtn

AO.

II

'thrive,'

IV

or IX, P.

PP.

CB.

TfT^RTfir H

^g

PP.

VfC

nrr.

g^f?T or gHUTfil

y PF.

P?

(55

par),

^5%

m,

'fill,'

PP.
'

fit or

P.

^f

GD.

VI, P.

IT.

*%$

a,.

^rfW

^ggft , PF ^j^. ,0^. AQ

WIBft M ig^pt PP. TO a^.TCT,

'burst/

M^l^

P. TRWfiT H vr.

I,

221

VERBS

LIST OF

'

bind/ TX, P. 4^11(4

bandh,

II

PF.

PP.

Hifofl or

R*^> |^Fm6|

or

cs.

^
pp

'

budb, perceive/

$$^lr

(p. 122)

FT. iftdgT)

^ft^RrfTf

cs.

P. A. or IV, A. *ftsrf*I ,

^jfw, ^5^*

AO,

I,

PS,

g^ZRt

**y*

PP.

^8"

?l or

"$&(&

II

or

GO-

ua.

speak/

ii,

II,

3*ftf
I

^;

A.

?T*?t

OP

used in tbe other forms.

is

eat/ I, P.

bliaks,

INF.

*rf^ig^

Wftf U w. *T^^
cs. *m4fn H

'

divide/ I,

j,

Hqffl,

^U

PS. AO.

PF.

cs.
c

j,

break/ VII, P. *RrfW

AO.

^RT^fK
wr GD.

PP.

'

sbine/ II, P.

*TT bba,

or

^JJ

H PF. *|*fl
is,'

ca.

*r.

speak/

^TTm

FT. *t(^siTfl
I,

A.

^rnrotTf ,

*TTT*f
I

PP.

IMP.

TfT

?H^n PF. ^rft

*ft H

tt

AO.

^PnfTC

FT.

222

APPENDIX

'

f3p% |

deaye,' VII, ftwftT,

id.

PS.

fTO7t

fHJ

PF.

an.

P-tl*fm; T^HmTI mp.^,^ n <v>

tftl>hl, fear,'in,
>

w. fo^i^i

Ao,^*141c^

i|q^

or

'hecome,' 'bo,'

IHT.

tffant

PS.

w\n ^<pi

<

iNT.'%a?fa|?f I

/VII,

bhr

W?Tfw,W%Pr.TO%|

I,

nrf?T,

(p.

92) U

FT.:

T*J5

(139. 7)

'
,

cany,'

P. (also

IH,

I,

JTTfff,

^)

f*RTf5

a
i

rr.

arf^rft

PS.

t*Rni

r.

jj, 'fry,'

VI, P.aTHrfn

'wander,' IV, P. or

I)

I,

PS.

PP. JJTT

apypqfT,

o^jj^f or

jj.'siixk.' I,

P.

TOTftfl

PF.

^mr

FT.
\

PP.

1S

WTWrfTf or

or
I

on.

^ft^fif

l$**&t

P. A.

AO.

SD

OF VERBS

LIST

^ mad, 'rejoice/
or

|>|

IV, P. JfTTfiT

AO.

II

223

^l^c^

PP.

4J^|pl

'

man, think/ IV
AO.

^H*g

*rar

FT. 7J?g?)

nrr.

irap^

cs.

VHI, A. *TOt

or

PS. VT*C|7t

*n*Ri?i

*nf

**.
s.

or TfVpt

PP.

II

&D. *|{fll,

rfl^wTi

^TEr or

'

I or IX, P. *nrf?T (or *Rrf?T) or ^f^lfff K

*n^manth, shake/
pp.

THTO,
cs.

^^fi|V!<

4<^^ffl

n. 4jf^sm(7i

Traf^

PS.

PP.

^rf^nr

GD.

II

PT,

||

'

measure/ n, P. or III, A. Hfffl or

ma,
or

n^

v\^fH

PS.

^nnf^

AO.

muc, 'loosen/ VI, ^ffTT,

I

mult,

'be bewildered/

or 44T|J^l or

mr,

'die,

'wipe/

ftra?t

OP.

M.

finr

PF.

^Rt

*JW

IV, P. flWfiT

PF.

TOl or

PP.

PP.

n, p. ?nf

^r^rt
1

*Tl

II

f*f*Tlr)

P. (no present) K PF. *FRTT>

PS.

j,

w. *TfaTf?Tj

?l

PP.

RTR^

IP*.

pp.

K
i

IT.

Tft

GD.

^s:

^rr9hf*r,

*nrril

^rr^l%

^ff
^ff

w&&

^WT

IMP.

'nf ;

^^ it^i^T<\

^^

5*

or

APPENDIX

224

'

^TT mnS, meation,'

PP.

^TRT

D AO.

mlai, 'fade/ I, P. *N 1*4 fit R PF. 1p?ft

WT*

PP.

?Hfft

I, P.

4*Hl|4|f*| or <MM4|f?l

cs.

AO,

II

'

IKr-

15*^

TT^ifl

c8 -

i?^

p*.

i^rw

PF.

?t

worship,' r, ^rarffl,

pp*

>

?CB

<.

a-

'

M. 4|U(c)

or

^t^fd

I, P.

stop/

PP. "'SHT

^(l(|^ ca. ^*4^i or

vr ya, go,' ii, P- *rrf?i

U
I

^W

^I^Tj

nrp.

'

***

4J4JI1,

PIT.

GD.

^^ng I
M.
i

IMP.

OP ^TRTR^fr PP. "^nft"

-

*ii*i7(

IHqfci

irnr

Rt^l^fJI

DS.

PP.

^m^i

WTPI.

or

^ntTlqJ

AO.

0;

GD. ^rrarr,

5rra

II

'

yu,

^ftf rap
OP. *TR^ N PP* ^T H

P. ^ftf?T

join,' II,

^ftTp^l

ca.

*TN4Pl>

'

protect/

FT.

voqn

\^ni

T^ffH,
I

PS.

T^rat^r

an.i
ir

I,

AO.

"^int

^T^

H PF.
I

PP.

TVf

rr.

^Mjft

PS,

OD

'tinge,' IY, P. ^ilrfn

II

PS.

<??qft

'graap' (^UK^a-Tabh, 'begin'),

I

X^|

AO.

^R^W

PP.

I,

PP.

TW

A. Jjfft

T??

>-

*>

LIST OP VERBS

225

'

ram,

A. (P. only when

sport,' I,

t^%

FT.

nn>.

B.

<4<qfd

I,

TTTfiT,

7?(p^

DS.

transitive)
PT.

shine/

PP.

"^T

IKF.

^VJ*^

^^f

: ;

T7T

^%

?^T*T>

*7t H

^Vfa; ^7f

* **

ftt?6ft H

'

j,

T&fH

w.

ca.

H
*

rud,

pr

^v<^

II, PJ

weep/

AC.

TRC

'shut out/. vii,

^ar

^PIJT,

^nrr,
i

grow/

O^fd

FT.
I

pp.

^3Kf

'grasp/

GD.

I,

W^T,

P. Off?t
I

or

Of*lft

cs.

I,

PS.

\H^

OM^H!

A. ^W?t H

*W

ca.

PF.

PP.

^TWrfTT

scratch/ VI, P. -fif^f?!

f^if^i^

'cut/ ix,

GD.

^rfr

speak/

II, P.

OP,

^TfV^

*n*?ft
.

***

ftn^

w. f*l%^

nfcMu *ftwr

vac,

FT.

AO.

0- ^1T

^TTfif

'

f^T^likh,

H%|

^Of
PP. ^*

IMJ.

w. f^crfii

**-

) i

(P.

rwi

Tj^i

'

ruh,

v%

^wl

^0<Ml<; *rw

or
i

Offft

TT.

or

DTF.

APPENDIX

226
I

cj^ft

PT.

TOfT

w. ^3-^3

AO.

Tad, 'speak,' I, P.

q(f?r

T*.

S*nt

*f<lPl

f^f^l

^
^$

PS.

*H<*<fa

>
I

AO.

^tHmflq,

BWTT^I

^f^T

St^.'

M. f^qf^Uffl

IT.

AO.

f^<fll

II

^l^ft

"

^ffcT

or ^fqt^fjT

or
PS.

^n^rarfir K

n,P.

^JT, ^T, *fe ^^:

cs.

'dweii,' i, p. Tfffit u

''CTsfn

p-

^9^

w.

PP.

wear,' II.

nnr.

^ftg^

.'cany.'

TW,

A. <T%|
i

cs.

OP.

OD.

?||

AO.

op

PT.

no-.

grj:

m qn

PF.

^rnref?r

yffjf,

J,

^mr

Tjftfl

'

UflN^

sow,' I, qftflf | PP. 'giTPT,

s, 'desire,'

'

PP.

'

vap,

i OB.

OP.

^TTf ;

^TF.'

AO.

or

LIST OP VERBS
via, 'find/

f^f
f^f

PP.

fos

or

f*

f^ft,

vi,

?t i

^Tfir,

tTrTT,

ft*T

227

f^,

ftft^

w. fo*I% ('there

ST^H

cs.

exists

%^rf?f

AO.
3
)

DS.

B
'

VI, P. f*nrf7f

enter,'

is,

fo%1[

D PP.

AO.

'

^r,

cover/ v,

vr,

fiRi^

PS.

'choose/ IX, A.

fc^vrt, 'exist/
AO.

^gnq^

R PP.

A. (P. also

I,

or

rF.

nf|^

Tfifa^

rr.

*nft

in AO., rr.)

^R^%

WIT

xo.

PP. *pfl

tt

GD.

w.

W[

'

increase/

A. (P. also in

I,

rr. -qasifTl

AO., FT.)

PP.

^pSnt i w.
INF.

AO.
'

pierce/ IV, P. t%^rf?r I PP.

vyadh,
PS.

ftvft
x
1

PP.

"ftW

vraj *go/
FT.

1,

^rf^WfTf
cs.

OD.

wfir

P.
I

PS.

fW

ft^T,
R ra.

?TO?t

iil^'qfd

PP.

*nrnr,

^fiw

SrfWT

en. fif^

VI t

P.

^jft

P,

iftft

A PB.

fW%

PP.

'

f^ sains,
i

w.

praise/

ira%

I,

ij^r

'

cut/

JRfll

AO.

n^?n, ^ro ^fftnpu

i

Q2

**

f^W

iyp.

228

APPENDIX
'be able/ V, P.

s'ak,

SIS|W

3|djftf?l

PS*

Sfizft

'curse/

TOT

PP.

I,
I

sarn, 'cease/
i

cs.

*P.

II

yjIMtini

^HTT^ $ft

or

^l*^fa

n,

P.

AO.

**

It

IV, P. yjlUlft

^iifn

cs.

3|Mffl,

^t

THff and

PP.

*T^ sap,

,'

w.

941(141

Sftj:

PP.

AO.

sas,

IMP.

order/

*Trf%

I.

OT.

ftl^*

3-

"Viiitin^ ^nrr: or

ftprg
II,

w.

an/go/
i

FT.

*rftm

DT

1,

AO.

^f^Mc^

FT. ^rr-

U(lRld or flTE

PP.

fit^

OP. ^i
i

cs.

*fhrf?l

GD. uOfr<fli

?ref7r,

PT.

un^jeiffl

sue, 'grieve/ I, P.
\

"Rrs

CD.

ttr?r>

A,

PF. ui^ii^i

U||^7| or ftpgft

pa.

umc^N

OP.

^f%rof?T, <%

DTF.

n PF.

w.

||

fir&

AO.

DS.
PT.

^ft^

^ftf^rgt

ft^rra,

^1%

pp.

ca.

AO.

*fH*ifd

faif^
f%nr

OD.

it

LIST OF VERBS
u, 'hear,'

229

V, P.

^s'vas/breath*,'
*>

or

nr

II. P.

'adhere,' I, P.

j,

^f^fj, B

^jr

OD.

TOf?T

AO.

PP.

eg.

'

sad>

rr,

<*.

w.

>.

OT.

PP.

'

x-

8ink|

PI.

pr

^fn

M.

wit

or

war i OB.

PP.

PS.
i

o^j

oi>.

^ft^,

'

sic,

sprinkle,'

VI, ftrarfff,

^rnrafTT

ft^f ,
p*.

8idh, 'repel,' I, P.

and

re"> otlt ''

I

M.

v>

^J?J

'

^au,
OJ? -

bear,' II,

$ft*l

w.

II

sr, 'go,' i,

A.

^^
p.

w. ^71

^
|

IMP.

^7|

FT. ^Tf^TRRt or

^fn

fW

on.
|

or.

$%,

9t<^

i TT.

on.
'

n"

emit,' VI, P.

^rf?T

^rf

^,

P.

^{JB^

flm

23

APPENDIX

H
'

p.
i

creep/

^nft

PS.

^f?f

P.

I,

PP.

^n

*n

PF.

^Nrfit

cs.

'prop,' IX, P, ^JRSTTf*

PS.

nrr.

^n^

^R

w.

Rmmfii

IP*.

AO.

or ^OTtfTf

rr.

FT.

cs.

^t?T

stu/praise/ II,

U^qq

JfTf

IMP.

q^

PS.

^re^ or
I

^^

Ao.

PP.

*7T

CD.

cs.
g

st r ,

cover/

Vj>

Rqln

^r,

GD.

IX,
PS.

^nr

^4<)

cs.

or

iguHPf

Ijlfllfd

from ^f

(as if

*dKeii?i

str,

58)

PP.

'

stand/
i

INF.

17tR|

I,

^Bhi%

^rnj^

pp.

?f^

PP.

cs.

*rorfa
wnrrfTT M.

^^I7i

PP.

^f?r

PS.

^pg^

n
i

f^m

T^n|

PP.
pp.

^^7^

AO.

FT.

GD. f^rerr,

f?igi4jf?t u

'touch/vi, p.
FT.

||

AO.

i^j:

A0

OJD>

ami, 'smile/ I, A. mrfft U PF.

T^ta

GD.

fccir, oftrar

amr, 'remember/
i

I.

PP.

cs.

^iM<(f?f or ^Jl^^fJT

P. ?JTTf?T d PF.

^TTI

GD.

^RTT

o^

r,

II

rr.

'

A.

syand,

drop^I,
I

cs.

^^?t

tt

PF.

^^p%;

PS.

4*^4ft

flow/

I,

P. ^nrf?I | PF.

^HW

FT.

*f^Zrf?T

LIST OP VERBS
'embrace,'

j,

^Hff
^nfa N ^-1%
^ftf* H PF. ^IM gfflj:
AO. "HOiR
PSft

A.

I,

ST.

<">

^MSI

P.

sleep,' IT,

4|M4l(7l

nsrr.

*3H

FT.

nrr-

I^HL

fT bS,

ff^najfn

'leave,'

^IM^ffl

w^j

HI, P. ^TfTfiT

t PP.

TS.

^q?t
(

Tft^f

^rff^r or

ift f
i

PP.

PP.

^RTT
-

OP.

sacrifice,' III,

AO.

^I ^

^^nfWt^i
I

hr, 'take,'

XFV.

mp.

ff
i

fl^fa
I,

FT.

ft^fif
I

DS.

^f?f,

PS.

**ft

^imRl

?T I

w. f*frtfit,

hri,'be asbamed,' HI, P.

rf^^
:

PS.

snft

PP.

PP.

w.

^tar

ftfts

or

OP.
.

i^rt?r

inn e. amr^ ^^^ BW

i

iwr,

<">.

^^rpr

t^Tf%

tlN^ ftf^m
^ff^
^ftft (p. 9 6 ^

ffftrarfn

JT hu,

IKF

P.

M. Rlfl*l(d

ftn^

fff*r,

FT.

VH,

AO.

^rw AO. ^nrl

fN OB. ftwr,

'

strike,'

f?r

M. RIM l*i Ri

i. ^gnifn

I^TRC

OP.

w. ^q?t

w*i*if!i

'

svap,

231

or

APPENDIX

II

METRE IN CLASSICAL SANSKRIT

The

versification of classical Sanskrit differs considerably

that rf the Vedic hymns, being

strict rules, and

more

artificial,

more

from

subject to

far greater number of varieties of metre.

showing a

Classical Sanskrit metres are divided into

I. those

measured by the number of syllables;

measured by the number of morae they contain.

II. those

Nearly

all

Sanskrit poetry is written in stanzas consisting of

four metrical lines or quarter- versea (called pada, 'foot's: quarter).

These stanzas are regularly divided into hemistichs or

is

Quantity

measured

as in Latin

and Greek.

by nature or by position.

Two consonants

vowel long by position,

Anumra

consonants.

half-.versea.

Vowels are long

make a preceding short

and Visarga counting as

short vowel counts -as one

full

mora (matru), a long

vowel (by nature or position) aa two.

Metres ueaiured by Syllable*

X.

(Akfara^chandah).
These consist of
A. two half-verses identical in structure, while the quarter-

verws

and 3

differ

from 2 and

B. four tiBarter-vewea

4.

all identical

A.

The

in structure*

&loka.

'

The Sloka (' song, 1 from sru, hear '), developed from the Vedio
Anusjnbh,

is

the Epic verse, and

may be

considered the Indian

METRE IN CLASSICAL SANSKRIT

verse par excellence,
occurring, as

than any other metre in

two half-verses

it

does, far

more

classical Sanskrit
poetry.

233
frequently

It consists of

of sixteen syllables or of four

padas of ei^bt

syllables.

Dividing the half-verse into four feet of four syllables, ire find
that only the second and the fourth foot are
determined 4s to
- w *), while tibe
quantity. The fourth is necessarily iambic

second may assume four

different forms.

(^
The first and the

third

foot are undetermined,

^ v i* always excluded
except that
from them. By far the commonest form of the second foot U

^ (in Nala

The type

of the

1442 out of 1732 half- verses).

Slota may therefore be represented t3

E.g. Asid raja Nalo nSmi

up&pann5 gunair
It

is

only

VMs&i&auto baE
|

istai

when the second

foot has

may

assume

any

of the other three forms, the

all its

2.

***lw

(---I
I

3.

4-

The

first

w\j
*

1-,

first (typical)

foot is limited,

m.

ii.

form

is

called VipulS, axe in the above

frequency of occTirronce. Oat of

KalidSsa (Eaghu-vainsa and KumSr

and Bilhana, each of the fofir ftdmirffete

above order claims the

fiol

fat

When the seeood *** Jw

i.
I.

^ that tb

admissible forms.

m the following table

rtipavSn asvakorld^ 1

foBoiriiig afeaw:

iv.

APPENDIX

234
In the

II

an undetermined syllable: a comma

table a dot indicates

marks the caesura.

The end of a pada

coincides with the end of a word (sometimes

with
the
a
of
end
word in a compound), and the whole Sloka
only
contains a complete sentence. The construction does not run on

into the next line.

combined into a

B.

An

Occasionally three half-verses are found

triplet.

Four Pada* identical in Form.

i.

Of the numerous

(n
Indravajra

varieties

developed from the Vedic Tri-

syllables to the pada}, the

A.

commonest

-- w -- w w
Upendravajra :w-w| -- w|

(a mixture of the above two)

c.

TTpaj&ti

e.

Bathoddhata s-w~|www|

3.

The commonest forma

are

--v\
fl

j[

|w

||

of Jagati (ia syllables to the

pa

are

d.

Pmtavilaonbita

wwwl
i

3.

The commonest

p5da)

5-

II

"

--w|-wu|w-w|w-w|-||
of

Atiiakvan (15 syllables to the

is

Malim:
p5da)

<u

v-/^|

variety of Sakvari (14 syllables to the

The commonest form

pada)

is

Vasantatilaka:
4-

ww|

wwwwi^w --

he commonest

-w --

varieties of Atyasti (17 syllables to

the

METBB IN CLASSICAL SANSKRIT

<?.

Xandakranta

235

--- j~, uujwuu|-,-v|~-wj-*||

6*

The commonest form

of Atidhrti (19

vw7*

to

the

The commonest

pada)

syllables

is

pada)

variety of Prakrti

(*i

syllables to the

is

Sragdhara:

Metres measured by Morae.

II.

A.!
(Matra-chandafc).

The Vaitaliya
first

contains 30

wwnw

in the half-verse,

14 ib the

pada, 16 in the second.

Each pada may be divided into

three feet, the second
always consiating of a choriambus, and the
third of two iambics while the first foot in the fiwt
p5da consists
;

of a pyrrhic, in the second

p5da of an anapaest.

thus contains 21
syllables.

The

following

is

The

half-verse

the scheme of the

half-verse;

wwl-vw-l^-w^Jl^v-j-wv-lvj-w^Jl
B, Metres
is

in

which the number of marae in each

specified (Gana-cchandab).

Arya

or

Gatha

taining 4 morae

the form

wwu

has 7} feet to the half-verse, each foot con(= 30 morae altogether). The 4 morue may take
\j

--

they may also become

or

foot (gaija)

w - v.

The 8th

w v,

>

foot

u
is

or

vo

in the

2nd and 4th

in the 6th they appear as

vwwo

always monosyllabic; the 6th of

second half-verse consists of a

single short syllable.

second half-verse contains only 27

&e

Hence the

APPENDIX

III

GRAMMAR

CHIEF PECULIARITIES OF VEDIC

As

1.

several stages can be distinguished in the

development

of the Vedic language, some of the following- statements are

strictly applicable

important

only to the Rig-veda, the oldest and most

monument of Vedic

literature.

The Alphabet.
The sounds

2.

are tie

of two additional letters.

same

M\af

^ d and ^ dh between vowels

and
Sg lh e. g. fjjfe a<J= f^ Ide',

Cerebral

regularly become cerebral 3,

'I praise';

as in Sanskrit, with the exception

minuses tftnudhu'se,

'to the bountiful.'

Sandhi
3. A. Vowels. Hiatus is not avoided either within a
word,
or between the members of a
or
between the words
compound,
of a sentence;
and, in particular, initial a after e

only occasionally elided ;-e. g.

suriasya,
'
wealth in horses' ;

Vaninasya

bhf

Agn&

and o

'

of the sun

(21 a) is

'

au-aBviam,

of Varuna (and)

'

Agni

'he goes towards

5
'; vfpro aksarat, 'the
priest poured out.
The e of the pronominal forms
(dat., loc.) tve", 'to or in thee,'
to or in ns/
'to
or
in you,' remains
yusm^,
unchanged
before Towels; as doee the
final o produced
by the coalescence of
tte particle
u, as in atho
(ithan), m<5 (m|j,), n6 (n&).
eti,

M4

The final syllables

they were

am,

an, In, un, rn are treated

(cp

fi

^^

CHIEF PECULIARITIES OF VEDIC GRAMMAR

i.e,

^bere it
(except in tbe 3. pi. subjunctive,
uBr,
ink,
become
while
un,
In,
fn
original ant),

an becomes

an

represents

rmr;

e.g.

am

mabam

asi,

'tbou art great*

(fait

Sometimes

extended to the

rules

which

initials of

a gacchan

tittar&

iva, 'like reins.*

yugani, 'later agea will come'); rasmimr

*.

23?

in Sanskrit apply internally only, are

words

e. g.

sah6

sti

nab

(cp. 67).

Declension.
4.

A. findings. Singular,

a.

Instr. S is sometimes added

to stems in a, leas

commonly to feminines in a;- e.g. ya-jfi^

inatr.
'sacrifice/ instn yajftena and yajfla; manisa, f. 'wisdom,
mantsiiya and manlsa. The a of ena is also often lengthened.
Stems m -man sometimes do not syncopate tbe vowel of the
suffix, while when they do, the m or the n is occasionally dropped
1

e. ?.

bhu-miina and bhu-n-a for bhu-mn-a ; dra^h-m-^for

Stems in

lioc.

take

a,

though

agnf, m. 'fire/ loc. agniu itnd

Stems in -an usually drop the i;

e. g.

They never syncopate

the

a.

commonly than au

less

agna.
e.g*

bn&mani and brahman.

of the suffix;

e.g. rajani

on y

form

their

(cp. 90).
c.

Voe. Stems

vocative in -as ;

in -mat, -vat, -vas, -yas regularly

e. g.

nom. bhanuman :

voc. bhinumas ; harivan :

harivas; cakrvan: cdkrvas; kiniyan: kaniyas.

usually than au
Dual. a. The nom. ace. voc. take 5
3~
'the two door*';
e.g. asvlnS, 'the two Asvins'; dvara, i

mm

the two
e.

rivers.*

g. devf, *the

b.

Femininea in derivative

i.
personal pronouns of tbe *
e. g. N. yuv&n ; A. yuvam ;

Ab. ynv^d L. yuv6s.

;

reanain

two goddesMfi/

The

cases ;

ttsd a.

APPENDIX

238
Plural. BTom.

&

Masculine stems in -a often (feminines

in -a rarely) take asas beside as

Feminine stems

b.

III

e.g. martyasab, 'mortals.'

in derivative I take s only;

e.g. devflt,

'

goddesses/

Neuters take

c.

a,

T,

u (sometimes shortened
'

as 5ni, ini, uni;

Instr.

e. g.

yuga, 'yokes

(cp,

to

&,

i,

u) as well

Lat. juga, Gk.

Steins in -a take ebhis nearly

(vyd).

as often as ais

e.

g.

dev^bhih and dev&b.

B.

The main

Inflexional Type,

declension

is

difference in

type of

in the polysyllabic stems (mostly feminines, with a

a considerable number of which are
in T and

few masculines)

u,

inflected like the monosyllabic stems dhl and bhu(ioo), excepting

the gen.
wise for

E.

where they take nam. (Stems in derivative I otherthe most part follow nadl and vadhu as in Sanskrit; 100.)
pi.,

g. rathi,

m.

'

'

'

'

charioteer

nadi,

f.

'river

tanu,

f.

body.'

CHIEF PEOULIAB1TIES OF VEDIC GRAMMAB

239

Conjugation.

Augment,

5*

This prefix

a.

long, in others metrically

some cases permanently

a-var, 3. sg. aoiiflt of vr, he

is

in

e. g.

has covered';
a-raik, 3. eg. aorist of

'she has given up.'

ric,

The augment can always be dropped without changing the

meaning. Unaugmented forms are, however, often used as init.

junctives : this use has survived in Sanskrit with the prohibitive

particle

6.

ma

(128

a).

Verbal Prefixes. These

follow the verb.

other words

They can be

generally precede, but sometime**

separated from

it

by particles and

'

;-. g.

tvS visantu, let them enter thee

'

gtfmad

vajebhir a s

may he come to us with riches.'

7* Ending*.
The primary termination of the I. p*rs. pi.
active, -ma*i, is much commoner than -mas
e. g. i-masi and
na^i,

i-mas,'wego.'
ft.

*ta

In the
e. g,

th.ana and -tana

2. pi.

often occur beside -tha

ya-thi and ya-thana, 'ye go'

y5-t^

and

ya-ttfoa,

and
'do

ye go/
c.

The

2. sg.

Impv. has a not uncommon alternative ending in

-tat (added to the weak stem), which expresses an injunction to

be carried out in the future raksa-tSt, * protect ; bru-t5t, *ay * ;
f

'

dhat-tat,

'

place

(cp.

"used for the 2. du.

Gk. ^cpc-r, Lat. lege-tdd).

and

pl, t or i.

and 3*

It is

sometimes

sg.

middle {like the perf. middle, 136) is not

uncommonly identical with the i.; e.g. stfy-e, 'ne Kes* (=ee^e}.
f.

8.

The

3. pers. sg, pres.

Reduplication. Many roots reduplicate with

a long TOWC!
c

in the perfect ;

g. dhr, 'support*: dwUiftr-a;

vas,

<OoObe*:

vS-vas-e; tu, 'thrive': tu-45v-a,

Q. Tense*.
occur often. It

& There is a pluperfect, which doe* not, feawevw,

is

formed from the perfect stem by pre&ing tie

APPENDIX

240

augment, and adding the secondary terminations;

i.

'appear/
&.

The

&g

periphrastic future does not exist

perfect is not

known

Moods,

IO.

moner than the

is

e. g.

from

cit,

-ciket-am, 3. a-ciket.
;

the periphrastic

to the Rig-veda.

a. There is a subjunctive,
Its

optative.

meaning

is

which

is

much com-

imperative or final; it
Its stem is formed

also often equivalent to a future indicative.

adding -a to ihe tense stem. Tn the a-conjugation it therefore

endd in a ; e. g. bh&va*. la the second conjugation -a is added to
*
e. g. from Icr, do
the strong stem, which remains throughout

"by

The endings

krnay-a.

Thus

are partly primary, partly secondary.

9

'

the subjunctive of bhu, be/ and suppress out, are formed

as follows:

Par.

i.

bhva-ni

bhdva-va

2. bha*va-si, bh&va-s
3. bhtfva-ti,

Atm.

i. bha*v-ai
2.

Par.

bhava-t

bhava-se

b.

bhdvS-tha

bhdva-tas

bhiva-n

bhava-vahai

bhavu-mahai

bh^v-aithe

bhaVa-dhvai

bh^v-aite

(bhav-anta)

i. suna*v-S-ni

8una"v-a-va

suniv-a-ma

sun^v-a-thas

sundv-a-tha

eun^v-a-tas

svm^lv-a-n

sun^v-a-s

3. suna"v-a-t

have

bhdva-thas

3. bhjfva-te

2.

Atm.

bhava-ma

i.

sun4v-ai

sundv-a-vahai

suniv-a-mahai

2.

suniv-a-ae

sunav-aithe

sunav-a-dhvai

3.

sun^v-a-te

sunav-aite

sunav-anta

Not only the

perfect and aorist

present, but the

as well,

the tliree moods, subjunctive, optative, and imperative.

'
*
E. g. pf. subj. of stu, praise * tu-st&v-a-t j opt. of vrt, turn '
all

va-vrt-yat ; impv. of mnc,

ba-bhu-tu ; Atm.

2.

'

release

sg. of vrt

'

'

mu-mug-dhi ;

va-vrt-sva.

of bhu,

be

'
:

CHIEF PECTJLIAKITIES OF VJEDIC GRAMMAR

Aor, aubj.

nl,

'lead*

3. *g.

241

n&-a-ti orne's-a-t; budh, 'wake*:

ddhif-a-tivid/find*: vid-a-t; kr,'do*: kar-a-tiorkar-a-t Opt.

fvid: vid-et; ae.'reaoh':
aa-yat;bhaj/ share*: bhakI*ta. Impv.
*
f av, favour ' : 2.
sg. avid-dhf, du. avis-tarn,
;
pi. avis-tana

3. sg*

vis-tu; sad/sit down ': 3. sg.sada-tu J dTi.sada-tain,ph sada-ntu; sro,

hear*

2.

sru-dhl, wru-tdm, sru-ta"; 3. grtf-tu, sru-tam, ftruv-antn,

H. Participle*. In addition to those surviving in Sanskrit

he Veda has an aorist participle, both active and middk;
e.g.
from

do': kr-tot; gam, 'go': guv-ant; stta.'atand*:

rthant; Atm., kr: kr-ani; budh: budh-fin^.
?ar.,

*.

The

kr,

part, in -ta-vat ia not

known

to the

Rig-veda.

12* OeroncUi.

ID addition to the gerund in -tva, there

one in -tyf^ and a very rare one in -tvija,

commoner

vowel of the forms used with

prefixes, -ya

and

-tya,

ifl

ie

TW

geaormBy

lengthened.

13. Infinitives.

About a dozen

kinds of infinitives era be

distinguished, having the form of an ace., dot, abL, gcvu> or tar*

The last three cases are rare. The vast majority are dfti. iafinitivea, these being about twelve times as

common

as th

ace,

inf. is formed either from the rooi or fine*

The aoc.
verbal noun in -tu
A.

'

(the latter being very rare in tbe

e.g. sam-idh-am, 'to kindle'; prsti-dhi-m, 'to plwe

pra-tfr-am, *to lengthen ont*; kir-tinn,

"to give.*
b.

in

formed from the rooi or from

e.
di-^, to
-man, -van, -tu, or -dhi

The dat.

-as,

inf. ie

to believe (cp. e tftra-^oi);

'

to know

*
;

d5-vn-

jiv-rfs-i

(&xww from
'

kir-tav-^i (with double accent), to do* ;

c. Examples of the other ease* are :

gir&*i, ** jpS
t*WH**m

*T*-f*&*^

da-tos, 'to give*;

APPENDIX

242

III

Preposition*.

The genuine

14.

and
a.

prepositions are used only with the ace.,

from a few isolated instances of the

abl. (apart

With ace.
across

tiras,

b.

beyond '; lidhi/onto'

near
c.

puras,
*

from or up

'towards

pdri, 'round';

on'; antr, 'within';

dhi,

'

before,

to

dhi,

from upon

5
;

anta>, 'from within

'

'

and

api, a,

tipa,

'

With abl.
'

4nu, after '; antar,

purrfs, 'before.'

'
;

a, lipa, prdti,

With loc.

'

instr.).

'

rfti/

'between'; dccha, abhi,

'

loo.,

p$ri,

from (around)

'

*
;

a,

away

'

'
;

pur^s,

before.'

Accent.
15* The accent
well as in

marked
two Brahmanas.
is

in all the texts

Of the

of the four Vedas, as

four different systems of

marking it, that of the Eig--veda is the most important. Here

the ohief accent, the acute (udatta,
'raised*), or rising tone, in
not marked at all, probably because it comes midway between the
grave or low tone (an-nd&tta) which precedes, and the rrarita,
or felling tone, which follows it and marks the transition from an
accented to a toneless syllable. The amidatta preceding the acute
marked with a horizontal stroke below, and the svarita following

is

it,

with a vertical stroke above

e. g.

llfrl t

ag-nl-na*.

The

Bo-oaHed independent svarita (originally also

preceded by an acute,
which disappears by removal of hiatus in the written text, but
nas often to be restored in
pronunciation) is marked like the
enclitic

onei^e.g.

jjf kvfc

(=ktia); the anudatta being also indi-

cated onder the

preceding syllable ; e.g.^^f^viryam (=vlrfam).

If an independent svarita
precedes an udatta it is marked with
tfee numeral <|
w
ten
the
(i)
syllable is short/ with
(3) when it

S* >c**& the

%are bearing

both the svarita sign and the anudatta

**^ precede* ike mfctta;

CHIEF I*CUUARJmtS OF VBXHC OAAMMAB

r*jr* 'v<ui^

Ur4)6

avantb),

A*

Joi remain* unmarked

f*fti?miiijt rf

Hi th

accented lyBaWe

til

;
grave ylfeblee
atthe taffimita* nf a tenteure prertding an acute moat be marked;

And

**ariU are

ail jtrav** folio *iog

left

unmarked

till

th* one

or

16. Xaelittoft*

e.

The fwrticU

Th dmon*imtire
(

jrono*ini

t v A,

ptoo, to^t

dd, ivid,

ftd Isn, tlrn.

itt,

glu, 3u, ca (

Th*

indefinite

Another*; Mm^'Aom*.*

VttMMNmtedi Vtewui.

17,

u,

nhtn unruphiir

Tbt demoattrmtire

M rt|iUt Jag a HOOD

.g.

wy

pron.

'

j4oimial

hii

(Agni%) birtht'; but wjA ufto^/ of tUt

*, The vootiT loMt
l

the Imglh of th
*

hither, y

Ko|4,
order,

two

ovirtljpi gturditni of great

l8 The rmplnymrnt of the SOOemt Jn declension and conmay lie gathered from the pandlgmf given in the

jitgnticitt

but the following pexmliftxittee of it* uae

prr**]in xnunmai
in tbt Mtt4mo fchouW be noted.
A The **o*to* it invarUbly empUaited on the first iylUble
j

only, alt the other tytlablee of

complex expreaiion losing

their accent* *~**g. boHar yaYlf^h* lakrtto,

*0

nooit youthful

napit eahaeirau (nom.firj6 nrfp*t sihwRvfi),

A. The ftaito
of a principal etate U on*ocnted, unleas
'
the eenteoce
I]N X pnOi* Agnf,' Sinoe

wie

aacrificer

*i tfijo

Trb

ft
ft

;,. Agnfm

txgftii

voo.

not count in a eenteno*. a verb foHowicg It it accented ;

*
tbon of lit tening ean, hear
ierul-karva, tfrodfat Wvaa f

do

~e. g.

owr oaJK*

one verb,

all

eentenoe being regard** * opeJ>le of baying only

terbe ijiftlMticftUj oonaaeted with tbe f*me tabject

APPENDIX

III

!;-e<g.tarflnir

(j

jayati,

c,

Mi, p%ati 'sfiil

(

In SH borlinate

he

ekes (introduced

thrives/
conquers, rules,

by

tie relative or

ita deri-

'

vatives,

and the

ca
particles hf, 'for/

tovid, Whether') tie verl)

is

and ced, 'if/

always accented;-* g,

ne'd,

lest/

yam yajip
f

parlur asi, Vhat sacrifice thou protected Wien

clauses are in a relation of

subordinate,

and

its

In
principal

tie

first is

often treated as

verhccented,

eta the veiU prefix

wrb and accented;

the verl and loses

antithesis,

h o principal

in subordinate

clw

is

it

separated

from the

k compounded

its

accfint;-e,|;,a jncclati/he

with

comes/ but yi

SANSKRIT INDEX
Tola index
contains

all Sanskrit words and affixes

occurring fe the
except the numerals (104-108), unless declined, and the verbs
ppendul. The former can be found at once
owing to their numerical,

^mar

e latter

owing

to their
alphabetical order.

Indifferent words occurring

l68

The

A,

figures refer to

adv., adverb, adverbial,

opv., comparative,

aen., denominative,

"future

indeclinable,
j

Pol-, particle,

^,

8uffi

pv., superlative.

l*p.,

p.,

pm., prowmn,

passive,

no*.,

par, paradigm.

post,, possessive.

pri, primary,

Tatpurusa.

interjection,

pt,

v,, vocative.

participle.

vK^vorfeal

with,

m.

of, 15, i.

195, it,

augment, ia8.

of rat
conj% 1 34 ; pri nom. sf .,
*8*, I 6; sec. nom. sf,,
163;

a, sf.

nominal

p.

atbo,
'

ad,

sterna in, 97.

having

fire,'

-ta, adv. before/ 177

'
in front of pip. adv., 177
g, pel' pray/ iSof
iras, m. a proper name,
'

-ward/

adjectives in,

*noinV 134 D
(p. i>7
1
anu, adj. 'minute, cpv, o^ 103^ *.
stems
-at,
in> 85 ; 156; i8a, I fr.
.

ail, aoi>

jwu

awr/ 130*.

adfea, adv. prp. 'Wow/ 177*1

(
adv. f*p- feetp

85.

c,
A^J,

.,

inter., interroga-

ordinal,

pt, perfect

pr., present,

In., foot-aote.

n,, neater,

note,

w.,

ordv

preposition, prepositional.

A-vowel, pronunciation
pronominal root,
a-,

irr., irregularities,

per., periphrastic,

passive participle,
nominal,
prp,,

gd,, gerund.

int., intensive,

numeral, nom., nominal.

Pwt

od., compound,
dem., demonstrative,

enclitic,

encL,

ft, future.

inf., infinitive,

LPT., imperative,

ao., aorist.

cs., causative,

da., dcsiderative.

participle passive,

^nmu,

specified.

ABBREVIATIONS

~ adjective,

conjnnction.

cj.,

paragraphs unless pages are

i.

SANSKRIT INDEX

246
'

an,

3 a (p. 106).
suffix, 182, i 6 ; stems

breathe, 134

-an, pri.

nom.

amba,

f.

'mother/ p. 55,

-aya, sec. vb.

sf.,

in,

90; iiregular, 91.

'
anafl-vah, m. ox ', 96, 2, p. 54.
au-antaram, prp. adv. after/ 177 c.
'
an-Sdara, m. disregard for/ 204 d.
'

-anlya, fp. suffix, 102, 3;

182, i 6.

ami, prp. 'after/ 176, i.

'
anu-kr, imitate/ w. gen., 202, i b.
an-udatta, m. grave accent, p. 242.
anu-nasika, m. nasal, 7.
a.' devoted/ w.
aoc.,TQ7,3.
anu-yrata,
anu-ifo/ instruct/ w.two acc.,i 9 8> 2.
f.n.
x
anu-ivara, m., 4,
;
7 ; xo; 15,
39' 3; 3<5 ' *'* 43 B; 65;
66 A a; 144,1.
anHcana, pf. pt 'learned/ 159.
*ntar, prp. 'within/ 46, f n. i ;

&A

176, a CL
antara, prn. a* 'outer/ 120
antara, n. difference/ 1 87 <?

c.

(p. 1 73)
antara, prp. adv. 'between/ 177 a.
antarena, prp. adv.'between/ 177 a.
antika, n. 'vicinity/ 178; a. 'near/
103, 2 5.

<

anna, n. food/ p. 26, f.n. i.

'
any*, prn. a. other/ 120 a; w, abL
201,26.
anyac ca, adv. 'moreover/ 180.
anya-tara, prn. a. either/ 120 *.
anya-tra, prp. adv. 'apart from,
177*f
anyo nya, prn. ' one another/ 188,
'

2 cL

anvaSSc, adj. follo-wincr/

'
P, f. pi. water/ 96,!.

03 a.

apwidh,
'

api, pel.

potential,

2160.

abLi, prp. against/ 176, 2 a.

'
abni-jBa, a. versed in/ w. gen., aoa,

abW-taa, prp. adv.

abhi-laaa,

around/ 177
loi., 204

ami, prn. nom. pi.

those/ 25

m. 'desire/ w.
am, gemnd suffix, 166.

112.

151 a, 2

prn. 'this/ ill ; 195, 2 a.

ftyi,ij. 'prithee/ 181.
'
'
or vocative pel., 181.
aye, ij. ah
!

are,
arc,

ij.

'sirrah

'
J

181.

'praue/pf., 139, 6.
artha, m. 'need of/ w. inst., 199,
i
^ ; adv. at end of cd. - ' for the
sake of/ 187 c?.
ardha, prn. a. 'half/ 120 d.
ardha-rStra, m. midnight/ 188, a 0.
'
arpaya, cs. hand over to/ w. dat.,
'

aooAi.
arvak, prp. adv. 'before/ 1770.
arh, 'deserve/ w. inf., 211 a.
alani, adv. enough/ 180 ; 184 1 ; w.
inst., 199, iff;
3154; w. dat.
200 Baa; w. gd., aiod.
alpa, prn. a, 'little/ 103, 2 6; ..
ava-graha, m. mark of elision, 9.
'
avara, prn. a. posterior/ 120 c.
ava-lambya, prp. gd. 'resorting to/
179.
'
ava-sara, nu opportunity/ w. inf.,

an

(p. 204).

avac, adj.

'

downward/ 93

6,

avyayibhava, m. indec. cd., 188, 3 a.

ad ,'eat/ds., 170, a.
Aaoka, king of India, a.
aa$&, nm. 'eight/ 106 ?>.
2 6; pr. pt., 156(7 ;
as,
be/ 134
w. per. pf., 140; w. per, ft., 352 ;

injore/ w. gen., 202, i e.

also/ 180 ; w. pt, 206 ; w.

f.n. 5.

ayam,

w.

apa-kr, injure/ w. gen., 202, i c.

apara, prn. adj. 'other/ 120 cj w.
abl., 201, a b.
*
nparam, adv. besides/ 180.

125, 4;

dat.,
a.

200

Bio;

w.j geii., 302,

'

throw/ ao., 147 a.

nom. suffix, 83 182, i 6.
asuya, 'be angry/ w. dat, 200 A a.
as,

-as, pri.
asrj, n.

'blood/ 79.

m. f. ' that,' I la ; 195,

'
astam, adv. home/ 184 6.
asti, 'is/ omitted, 191 b; w. pr.
asau, prn.

a 6.

pt.,

307.
asthi,n. 'bone/99,3,
asmad, prn. stem of 1st pers., 109.
asmadiya, poss. prn. 'our/ 116.
~\ '**y/
I39> 5 J w. two ace.,
198, a.
-ah becomes o in
Sandhi, 69 o.

p,

SANSKRIT INDEX
<

188, a c.ahan, n. day/ 91, a

aham, prn. I,' 109.
500.
ahar, n. 'day/ 46, f.n. I
'
ahar-gftna, m. series of days/ p. 49,
;

'go/

I,

'

f.n.

ahar-pati,

m.

lord of

day/ 50

127,

pr.,

1510;

per.

pf.,

ft-*

xn.
seo, sf., i8a, a;

in, 98.

other/ iao

'

i3^

153 a; 153* P*-

154, a.
prn. root, 'this/
i 6
-i, pri. sf., 182,
itara, prn. a.
aoi, a &.

ahaha,ij. <ha!' 'alas!' 181.

aho, ij. 'ohl* 181.

ft.;

i,

stems

a.

247

a ; w.

abl.,

A,

i. ij.

180 (p. 148); 194, I

305,. i c; air.
i <J.
ittham, adv. 'thus/ 205,
'this/ xxx.
idam, dem.

a,

a.

-in, sec. rf. f i8a, a

m. n. 'day and night/

tn. x; 186, i.

aho-ratra,
p. 49,

'ah!* 181 (p. 158).

'from/ w. abl., 176, a;
compounded w. gam and d&,
prp.

184, f.n.
-5, see.

s,

182, a (p. 163) ; items in,

in, pf., 136, 4 ; 137, ' ;

97; roota

137, *<*.
ah, ij. 'ah!' I8i(p. 158).
I.
fi-oam, 'rip/ 1 33
'
a-tta, pp. of a-da, take/ 160, a 6.
atman, m. 'soul/ '.self/ 90 ; 115 I.
fttmane-pada, n. 'middle voice/ 1 ai.
'
a-daya, prp. gd. taking/ 179.
'
adi, TO. beginning/ 189 A.
a-di, 'enjoin/ w. dat., 198, a a;

aoo

B a.

182, a (p. 163).

a.
ap, obtain/ pf., 135, a ; ds., 170,
Rpah, f. pi. 'water/ 193, $d.
'
w. gen.,
a-yatta, pp. dependent on/
2oa, a 6.
sf.,

-ayana, sec.
Syria,

n.<

if,,

ftryS,

life/ 83.

b.
f,

pm.

189 j ; stems in,

87.
indra-vajrS, f, a metre, p. 334,
86 b ; 1 18.
iyat, a. so much/
'
180 (p. 149).
iva, end. pel. like/
'
wish/ pr., 133 C a ; pf* 135* 3
is,
136, i; w. inf., air.
-is,

a metre,

1, flea

sf.,

r8a, a

loo ; 103,

103, a

sf.,

feminines in, 95;

a; 107; 188,

a a.

1
ik|,'see/per. pf., 14^1 J ds.,i7o,2.
l
Id,*
praise/ pr., 134 A$Z>' (p. 100).
7.
iSirksa, -driS, -dr^a,pnu such/
-Ina, "secondary suffix, p. 164.
ds. stem of ap/ obtain, 170,2 ;

av&m, prn. we two/ 109.

*
avis, adv. openly/ 184 5.
a-saina, 'reckon on/ w. loc., 203

ipsa,

ord. s, 116.
-lya? poss. sfJ 107 ;
88 ; 103, 2 ; i8a, i b.
-iyas, cpv. sf.,

aoa,

i a.

IT, pel.

'und/ 180

-u, pri.

sf.,

tKrita,

(p.

I49X

oS.
183, i 6; stems in,

pp. 'accustomed

aoa, a c.
'
forsake/ per.

ujjh,

p. 335.

pf.,

to,

w. gen

140, r.

'

a-tis,f.' blessing/ 836.

x.
S-fotya, prp. gd.' resorting to/ 179,
I a.
aniru, 'womiae/ acxD
'
J
sit/ per. pf., 140, 1 ; 158
as,
pr. pt., 307.
'
fc-sth&ya, prp. gd. resorting to/ 179.

iao

e.

145.
i8a, i b.
i b.
pri* nom. suffix, 83 ; x8a,
aorist suffix, 142

-iajha, spv.
-is,

ft;

i8a, a (p. 163).

a.
a-rabhya, prp. gd.-' 'since/' 179,
4
5-rudha, pp. ridden and riding/

ao8

196

adya, adj. 'first/ 189 &.

-ana, pt. sf., 158 a; i8a, ifc; ipv.
f
sf., i 3 i, 4
a(p.9<>> '*v

-am, sec,

pel. 'so/

iti,

c.

nttara, prn. a. subsequent/

w. gen.,
uttarena, adv. 'north of,
aoa, 4.
'
a.
93 a.

upward/*
m. 'acute accent, p. 242.
ud-dya,prp.gcL-'towardJi, 179>'w. abL, 201 a*
ud-vij, shrink from,
ndaRc,

ud-atta,

-una, pri. suffix, 182,

i $.

SANSKBIT INDEX

248
md,

'wet,' pr.

upa-kantha, m.

and impf., 128.

'

Ai,

178.
upa-kr, benefit/ w. gen., 202, i e.
f.
a
mixed metre, p. 234.
npa-jati,

Ka,

'

177
UP, ending of gen.

sing., 99, i. 3
of 3. pi., 131, 6;
136 ; 142

m. a proper name. 83
*Bas,f. 'dawn/ 83 rt

a.

a metre, St.
pn\ suffix, 83 ; 182,

Uinih,
-us,

f.

i b.

0, pri. sf. f 182, i Z>; Btema IEL

tlna, pp. 'diminished/ 104 Z>.
Brj,

f.

100.

'

a.

which of m&nj ?

pr. impf.,

ia8

pr.,

133 C 2

1O8, 2.

stems

in, 101.
'
Tte, prp. adv. without/
Ttvij, m. 'priert/ 79 Z>.

177

c.

'

c.

no

edh,/ thrive/ per. pf., 140, i.

e-dhi, 2.Bg.ipv. of as, 'be/ 134
ena, prn. he, ahe, it/ 112 a.
*v * P L > 8 <> (P- H9) J w.

A 2k

pt., 205,

evam, pcL 'thia,' 180;

w.pp^ 205,
i
c*

195, 2 a.

i;

210 d.
prn.

113 a;

E, ai, t>, rooti ending in, 1 29, 8.

'
eka, run. one/ 105, i ; 120 6 ; 192.
eka-tama, pro, a. *one of many/

ea, dem. prn. 'thw,' 48;

kamam, adv. pel. indeed,' 180.

kala y m. 'time/ w. inf., 211 (p. 204).
Kalid&aa, the poet, 185 ; p. 333.
kirn, inter, 'what?' 113 ; 180; 199,
kiyat,

eka-tara, prn. a. 'either/ i2o&.

etad, dem. prn. 'thia/
a.
*
eta-vat, prn. so much/ 118.

ii a a;

'
ka-tara, pro. a. which of two ? 1 20 a.
ka-fci, prn. .* how many ? 1 18 a.
kati-payay prn. a. 'some/ laorf.
kathaya, den. 'tell/ 175 a; 198,
2 a ; 200 Ala.
'
'
kadS, inter. when ? 1 13 a ; w. cid

'

S> 'go/
C*.,

'

karma-dharaya/descriptivecd./! 88.
m. 'manner/ iSp/.
kalpa,
kas-cid, indef. pm.'
some,' 119 ; 192.
*
kaatam, ij. 'alns! 181 (p. 158).
kanta, pp. beloved/ 97 ; 160, 2 c.
-kama, compounded w. inf., 2 lib.

strength/ 796.
ttrdhvam, prp. adv. ' above/ 177 c .

-F,

pf., 136, 4.

and cana, 119 a.

'
kanis$ha, spv. least/ 103, 2 6.
kanlyae, cpv. 'lesser/ 103, a b.
kain, Move/ 125, 4 ; pp., 160, 2

148.
tiaanaa,

0g

who ? 113; with

'

120 6.
on both aides

both,'

ubbava-tas, prp. adv.

inter, prn.

ka-tama, prn.
1 ao a.

upendra-vajra, f. a metre, p. 234.

nbha, pm. 'both/ p. 81, f.n.
a.

i. 3.

api, cana, old, 119.

'
kakubh,
region/ 78.
kac cid, inter, pel. ' I hope/ 180.

upari, prp. ady. over, 177 d.

uparistat, prp. adv. 'above/ 177 d.
upSUnah, f. 'shoe/ Si.

101

aa, nominal stems in, 102.

Au, ending of

upa-dhmaniva, 6, n. 4.
uj>a-ram, desist/ 207 a.
f.

ubhaya, pro,

o,

vicinity,

'

how much ?

'

86 b ;

u8.

'indeed/ 180 (p. 150).

'
kl-dri -dr4a, prn. what like ? 1 1 7.
kirtaya, 'celebrate/ 1 75 a.
ku, prn. as first member of a cd,,
113 .
'
'
kn-tra, inter. where ? 113 a.
*
a.
kup, be angry/ w. dat., 200
'
kuiala, n. health/ 200
3.
kr,
*do/ pr,, 127, ,5 a; 134 B
(p. 107); p, 135, i f 136 a; 136,
2; 137, i; 138, 2; 140; pf. pt.,
157; o., 1430; 144, a; ft., 151,
i j per. ft., 152 a ;
p*., 154, 3
*54 7; 155; PP-, 160,3; fp. t
162, i 6; 162,3; gd., 163; inf.,
167; cs., 168; w. inL, 199, iff;
kiJa, pel.

w.

loc.,

204.

SANSKRIT INDEX
19; ai; 101

13301.

'cut/ pr.,

Jqrt,

krtam, adv., 180; 199, 3 gr; 215

krta-vat, act. pp. having done/ 89,
f.n. 3; 161.
'

*
krte, adv. on account of,' 177 d.
-krtvas, adv. af. fonning muitiplica-

137,

a;

'

tend to/

pf.,

135, i

154,

a.

w.

dat.,

only,' 180

(p. 151).
1
one, 119.
akffledin/.w. gen., *oa,

'

c.

kram,

i33Ai;

'etride/ pr.,

1650;

int.,

gd.,

1730.

kii, 'buy,' pr., 127,

pr. pt, 156.

6;

par., p. loa;

krudh, *be angry/ w. gen., aoa,

I
a.
; w. dat., 200
krostr, m, 'jackal/ 101 c.
'
kva, inter. where?' 180 (p. 151) ;

w.

'

'ksip,

forbear/ w. gen., aoa, I

I b;
cast/ w. dat., aoo

g,'

160,

.,

w.

cpv. of, 103, a.

pt, 137, a &;

ad;

gd.,

ac;

ft.,

303 e.
grama-prapta, pp. Tp. cd., 187,
'gravan, m. '*tone/ 90, 4.

1.

i.
gla, 'languish,' ca., 168, irr.

*eaVp, 137* a &; da^ 171, 5ghnat, pr. pt.1 'killing/ 156 a.
3.
ghrj, 'sniell, pr., 133
Gbiw,

of final, 53.

Ca, end. pel 'and/ 180 (p. 151).

'
(p. 106);
cakas, shine/ pr., 134
per. pfM 140, a.
'
cairvas, pf. pt. having done/ 89,
'
I a.
caka, say/ w. dat, 200
*
catur, nnu four,' 105, 4.
catv&nniiftt, nm. 'forty/ p. 63,

!.

1650.

khalu, pel. 'indeed/ 180 (p. 151).

'
khya, teU/ ao., 147 a; CB. w. dat.,

aoo

137,

A4

mean/

a.

pf.,

f.

c.

loc., 204.

ksudra,

int. of, 1 74.

with/ 179, X.
'boll/ 'cow/ loa.
den.
'protect/ 175.
gopaya,
gai,<ring/pf., 129, 8; pa., 154, i.
grah, 'seize/ pr., 134 Fa (p. 108);

m.

N, doubling

1190,

api,

kaain,

awake/

gfhltva, prp. gd,

pnu 'some

'pi, indef.

kovida,

'

a.

'

pa.,

aooBi.
kevalam, adv.

0,3.3; 173.

gr,

pf.,

i $,

162,

'
guru, a. heavy/ cpv. of, 88 j 103,
'
i.
gnh, conceal, pr., 133

go,

kip,

ko

i.

'

1080.

tivea,

;
135, 1.4; 137,1.
i34Aic; 135,3; 136,
a; 143; 147 a, 3; 1510; 155;

3.4.5;

<?.

kr, 'acatter/

249

A 10.

f.n, 4.

'move/

car,

cs.

gd.,

1640;

int.,

1 74 a.

Gata, pp. 'gone/ in

f.n.4.

gam,

go/ 89 6

pr.,

cda>, p, 171,

133 A a

pf.,

heavier/ 88.

gavjwva, n, Dvandva cd., 186.

ga, i. sing/ pf., rap, 8; pa., 154,
gft, a. 'go/ aoriEt, 148.
g&tha, f. a metre, p. 235.
gir, f. voice/ 8 a.

guna,

vowel-atrengthening/

d.

carama, prn. a4j. laat,'

X
gather/ pf., 13$* 45 P^ 54i ;
fp., i6a, 3; dfl., 169, i; 171,4.
diaaya, gen. adv. 'after long/ aoa,
5*ci,

137* at; 138,7; per. pf-, 140;

per. ft., 152 a ; ps. ao., 155 a j pp.,
160, a; fp., 162, a; gd., 163;
164 a; i65a;ds., 171,1; w.acc.,
197, 1 a.

garlyan, cpv.

120

'

170;

cnr, 'steal/ pr., 125,

4;

ft.,

167.
1
218.
ced, pel 'i^ 180 (p. 151);

Ch,

donbled, 51.
out ohy ao., 143, a.

initial,
'

chid,

A3, (P;^
6.

4
Jaks, 'eat/ pr., 134
'
pi p*. having gone/ 89

jaganvas,

250

SANSKRIT INDEX
'

jagmivas, pf. pt. having gone/ 80 6.

jaghmvas, pf. pfc 'haviSg
killed/
09 0.

f.

'string,' 100, 4.

pr,

i 33

jan/be^orn/

B^
^,

'sloth/ioo
tap, 'be hot/ int., 1 73.
tarn/ languish,' pr., 133 Br.

p, i 37>

193,,

J^V'nmpat/int.,^*.
n.

tanao-bhttta, pp. 'dark,' 188, i

103; p. 164.

'water only,' 180 7.

*"
jala. uc,m. 'cloud,'
79 i.'
jato, 2. Bg i pv of
2 c.
han, 134
jagr/awake,' 4 6,f. n . i; p
jala-mStra,

-tavat, pp. act., as finite verb, ao8

p. 341, ii

'<

f
,

jatu, pel. 'ever,'

,

pf.

09

180

c.

-tara, cpv. B f.,

, f.

162,3; 182, 16.

p t., 'having stood/

a, o.
-t5, sec. suffix, p. 164.

'by birth/ 199

t5d, 'strike/ w. loc.,

204.
Vedic 2 pL

-tfit,

a 39
such like/

ending, p.

ta-drksa, -dri -drsa, prn.

tfivaka,poss. P rn.'thy/ii6a.

Wvat

pm
much> Ij8
'solong/&c.,i8o(p. 153).
*

.
-ti,pri.sf.,
., 182,,
u, des.a.,w. ace,,
197, 3 .

prp.
j
040.
jftfina-vat, a.

knowing/ 86.
cpv. 'superior; io 3l a a .
Jje?tQa, 8p
eldest,' io 3> 3 o.

jy^s.

'across/ p.

5^

f. ,

34 ; before palatals
*^
3 8 ; 30.

o,a; 182,

i.

v.

tn,
-tu,

sf.,

tr,

thence,' 180 (p. ic

a^
5;>

pn.

sf.,

182,

trtiya,nm. 'third,
'

ft ;

stems

in,

'

"iere/

tris,
_

~f

Wy

'

iwu tH,

UO

fl.

(Vedic), p. 338,

inf.

a.

itcd.,i87.

167.

'equal/ w. inst, 199,

**' 2o
w.gen.,202, 2d.

carpenter/ 90.

'

pel 'buV 180(^.152).

pn. sf., 182, i 6 (p. !62);

tnlya,

pm-'iomany/iiSa
mm
" - J
"

'

tjryanc, a,' horizontal/ 93 a .

v^

T'

adv. 'three
times/

gen., 202, 5 a.
'-..f

J..T

J*^'

J^gJ?'

P- I64-

io8a'

101

.
f

SANSKRIT INDEX
tvad, prn. stem, 109.
'
tvadlya, posB. prn. thy/ 116.
tvam, prn. 'thou,' 109.
tvfi, enol. ace. of tvam, 109 a; 195,

a. 'long-Eved/ 83 a.
milk/ ao., 141 b ; d., 1 70,

dirghayuB,
*

duh,

w. two ace., 198,

55. 8r.-

tva-drsa, prn. 'like thee/ 117.

-tviya, Vedio gd. sf., p. 241, la.

inf,,

-tvl, Vedio gd. if., p. 341, ia.

167

int.,

164;

-thana, Vedic

a. pi. ending, p.
339.
-thama, ord. suffix, 107.

Dams', 'bite/ pr., 133

A 4;

cs.,

168,

irr. 4.

1746.
cs.

Aio.

'show/ 198, 49; 200

'
davlyas, cpv. of dOra, far/ 103, 2.
(
dah, burn/ 69 a ; ao., 144, 5 ; ft.,
151 a, i ; ds., 170, i; int., 174,
d&, 'give/ pr., 134 B i ; ao., 144, 3
148, i; ft., 151; pp., 160, 20;
fp., 162, ia; 162, a j c., 168 a ;

a.

3; 200

'teen before/ 188,

*arm/ 83 c.

dyu,f. 'Ay/ 99,4dyo,f. 'sky/ zoao.

dyaoh, nom, of div and dyv, 99, 4;

1020.
dra, 'run; mt^ 1746.
> *49dru, 'run/ pf., 13^ J
4 ^^
druta-vilambita, n. a metee ( fiwt

and

ilow*), p- 334-

a
drumaya, dn. 'ramk as tree,' 175.
'
*.
drub, injure/ w. dat., 200

dva, am.

two,' 105, a.

dvand va, n. < aggrej^r

dvaya,

pm.

p. 170, f. a. i.

daty, m. giver/ 101.

datri, f. 'giver/ 101 e.

m. pL ' wife/ 193, 3

dn.I>vidv cd,

186,36.

A i.

d.

div, i. f.'Bky/99,4.
div, a. 'play/pr., 125, 5; 133 Bi.
diva-naktam, adv. 'day and night,
1 86, 3.
'
di4, i. f. point,' 7-9.
'
di4, a. to point/ 141 tf*
181.
djstyS, inet. by good lock/
'
dih, anoint/ 69 adip, 'shine/ ao., 1490, a.
'
a.
dlTgha, a. long/ opv. of, 103,

&-

dot, n.

'

t,

<i.

drh, 'be firm/ 69^

deva-datta, m,Tp. cd, 187, a.
deva-nagari, script, 3; 4; 6; 8.
i.
dehi, a. sing, ipv^ 134

<&., 171,

ia

milking/

a'b.

dyava-prthivyau,
'

daksa, a. skilled in/ aoa, a c; 2O3/.

'
dakeina, prn. a. south/ 120 c.
*
daksina-tas, adv. to the south of,'
w. gen., 202, 4.
dan^aya, den. 'fine/ w. two ace.,
198, a.
'
datta, pp. given,* 160, a 6.
dadhi, n. 'curds/ 99, 3.
day, 'have mercy, w. gen., 202, i o.
'
daridra, be poor/ pr., 134
4 ; int.,
darsaya,

173

-did, a. 'seeing/ 79

drata-pOrva,
sf., p.

a.

'

dr^,

pri. sf., 182, i &; see.

ord. suffix, 107.

'
far/ 103, a ; 201 c,
Bee/ pr., 133
5 ; ao, 144, 4;
147 a ; ft., 151 1, I ; 1p., 102, i c;

dtti-a, a.

-tva, gd. Buffix, 163.

-Tha,

n.

'

ioa

SANSKRIT INDEX

252
'place/ p. 27,

dl*,

134
*>,

n.

f.

ij

144, 2; fp,, 162, i &; cs.,r68; int.,

173; V- two ace., 198, 3.
'
ni-tva, prp^gd. = with/ 1 79.
no, pel. 'now/ 180 (p. 153).

pr.,

4 138, 3 (par.) ;
i443; 1481 PPviSo,
;

136,

pf.

ds., 171, 3-

-dha, adv.

of manner, 108

sf.

-dhi, a. ring, ipv,

sf.,

6.

fie, 181 (p. 158).

1
100 (p. 60),
thought,
1
dha, shake, pr., 134 C 3 ; 134
., 168, 3.
dhebi, 2. sing, ipr, of dha, 134

dhik,

dhi,

-nu, pri.

ij.

f.

sf.,

i b.

182,

nud, 'push/ pp., 160, la.

nflnam, pel. 'indeed/ 180 (p. 154).
nrf in. ' man/ 101 6.

131, 4.

'

I ;

'dance/

nrt,

B I.

a;

169,

ds.,

int.,

&

1.73

netlistha, spv, 'nearest/ 103, a &.

nedlyas, cpv. 'nearer/ 103, 2 b.
no, neg. pel. 'not/ 180 (p. 154).
'
nau, i.
ship/ 102.
nau, a. enol. dual pru., 1090; 195,

dhma, 'blow,' pr., 133 A 5.

dhvan, 'sound/ pp., 160, yd.
-dhvam, 2. pi. sf., 144, a; when
changed to -dhvam, ibid.

i 6.
.

36

52; palatalized, 63 c

40

41

nyafic, adj. 'downward/ 93 a.

nyayya, a. 'suitable/ w. inf., ail d.

cerebralized,
f. n. 2;
2 ; in-

65; not cerebralized, 92,

changed to Anutvara, 66
sorted i* nent. pL, 71

Pac, 'cook/pf., 137, a a .

'
paBca, nm. five/ 1 06 6.
pafica-guna, a. 'fivefold/ aor, a

c.

na,neg.pcl. 'not/i8o(p. 153).

-na, pri. sf., 182, i 6; pp, sf., 160.

'

nam,

patm,

bend/ gd., 165 a.

namas, n., 1846; w. dat., 200 A

,,,.
'

naa, end. prn.

A.D.G.
*;

of

n.

'

ds. f 171, 3
;
174 b.
pada (or middle) endings, 16 a ; 56
730panthan, m. 'path/ 91, i.

aham

paya,

,.

proximity/ 178,
'
near/ 177 a.

ttx-kasi, prp. adv.

ai'

&oka metre,

cs. sf.,

para, a.

subsequent/

para-tas, prp. adv.

param,

^prp.

/ with loc., 204.

act.,

89 5.

20 c

'

'

chief,

'

adv.

beyond,*
'after/

77

c, d.

i77c;

parama/a. chief/ 189 /.

paraetat, prp. adv. 'beyond/ 177 d,
'
paras-para, one another/ 188, a rf.
uai-pada, 121; 187 a (p. 172).
'
.

w.
;

2040.

dat f

c,

a.

i68rt.

'

'

int.,

dv. pel., 180

(p. 153).
,

i.

the typical

pad, 'go/ ao, pa., 155

i-., 154-

Bigari, Sanskrit wript,

n''

pi.

'wife/9^
f.

P- 333.
3.

namai-ya, den. adore/ 175.

< KA Imrf * ft
J?

rtmt

f.

pathja,

c.

147 a

fall/ pf., 137, 2 a; ao.,

pp., 160, a ; 204.
in.
pati,
'husband/ oo. j.

pat,

'river/ 100 (p. 60); Yedic

declension of, p. 238.
nanu, inter, pel., 180 (p. 153).
naptr, an. 'grandson/ 101 a.
uadi,

'averted/ 93

b.

pari, prp. before lr,

pari-tas, prp.^dv.

J34E.
'around/
177 a.
'
pan-tyajya, prp. gd.
except,* 1 70
9
panvrSj, m.
c.
mendicant,'
79
'

parena, prp. adv. after/ 177 a ,

pascit, prp. adv, 'after/ 177 rf/

<-.

SANSKRIT
253

'ride,'

5K*Stfffis
source"

adv.

'

puras, prp.
,

prp

'

'Prior''

prafcrtva/inat'''!

Banij,

*7i,a; w. two aoc., 198, 3.

prp 'towarda,' i76Ti.

prati,

dv.

'before/i, /

aao, a.

'backward/ 73 a; 9
03.
prathama, HDL 'tot/ laol
pra^a, 'grant/ w. dat., gm,
* c.

202,

ao6.

SANSKRIT

254

'

2. a.

budh,

INDEX

'wise,* 55.

fall/ pr.,

tf,

brahman, m. creator/ po, 3.

brahma-han, m. 'brahman-killer
'

bhram,

'

133

B 2.

133^3-

bhrajj, 'fry/pr.,

wander/

pr.,

133

pf.,

139* J -

92.

brahnu, Indian writing, 3.

brtl, speak/ pr., 1^4
3 o

m.

bhratarau,
;

w. two

du.

and

'brother

sister/ 186, 3 o.

ace., 198, 2.

M, Sandhi
Bha, sec.
bhagavat,

Sandhi

p. 164.

sf.,
'

a.
adorable/ 49 a.
bhagoh,v. of bhagavat,49 a (Sandhi).

p,

bhaj, ''snare/
<
bhanj, break/
5; pp., 160,
bhartr, ID.

139,

pr.,
1 1.

r.

134 D;

husband/ xoi

pa., 154,

a.

bhavat, I, m. 'your Honour/ 49;

86 a; 950,
n. x; 193, ia\
195, I o.
'
bhavat, a. pr. pt. being/ 86 a ; 156.
(
bhavati, ia/ as copula, 191 6 ; with
pr. part., 207.
bhavadiya, poss. prn. 'your/ 195, 3.
bhavaa, old v. of bhavat, 49 ; 86 a.
1
bhavitavya, ft), 'that must be, aogb.
-bhaj, a. 'sharing,' 76 6.
bhfivatka, prn. your/ 1 16

of final, 42;

ma, pri. sf., 182, i b-} sec.sf., p. 164;

ma. sf., 107.
maghavan, m. Indra/ 91, 5.
'

majj, 'sink/

different/ 201, 2 o.
'
bhisaj, m. physician/ 79 6.
bhi, 'fear/cs., 168^.3; w.abl., 201 a.
'

bhuj,
bhfl,

bend/
i.'be';

'

P^.

pr., 125,
pf.,

P*9 a ; PS-, P- 130.

bhu,2.f.earth,*ioo(p.6o).
ic.
-bhata,pp.'being/T88,
*
bhtlyaa, cpv. more/ 103, 20*
*
bhttyistha, spv. most/ 103, 2 a.
bhy, 'bear/pt, i 3 6aj 140,3; ds.,
170,

i.
,

ao.,

'

'

ao., 144, i

gd.,

165 a }

man, stems in, 90.

manas, n. compounded w. inf., 211 fe.
manasvin, adj. wise/ 87 a.
mantraya, den. take oounsel/ 175 a.
manth, churn/ pp., 133
4 ; 134
'

'

pp., 100, I b.

;
132 ; pf.,
140; ao., 148, 2 ;
ft, 151; per. ft., 152 a;
153;
I*-i I54i pr. ft.pt., 156 158 ; pf.
t
&;
pt. 89
157; 159; fp. t Kfa,
l&; 162,2; 162, 3; 162, 3 a;
gd,, 164 ; inf., 167 ; ds., 169 ; int.,
172; w. dat, 2cx> B i a ; w. gen,,
202, i a; fp. w. mat, 209; par.,

i39> 7

pp., 160,

3 a.

da., 171, i.

bhinna, pp.

6, 2;

mati, f. thought/ 98 a.
*
-math, adj. destroying/ 77 a.
ad, i. 'rejoice/ pr., 133 B i ;
1455.
mad, 2. prn. stem, 109.
'
madlya, posa. prn. my/ 116.
inadhu, n. honey/ 08 b.
'
madhu-lih, m. bee/ 8 1.

man, think/

151

a ; 195, 3.

I c; 162, a.

ft.,

-mat, sec. sf., p. 165 stems in, 86.

mata, pp. 'approved/ w. gen., 202,

bhSvya, fp. that must be/ 209 b.

bhid,' cleave/ pp., 160, i; fp., 162,

'

internal

of, 68.

of bhi,v*t, 49

86 a; p. 158.

f.
mandSkrantS,
( approaching
riowly'), a metre, p. 235.
sec.
-maya,
suffix, p. 165.
-mas!, Vedio ending of i. pi. pr.,

P- 239.
*

mahat, a. great/ 85 188, 2 o.

maharaja, m. 'great king/ 188, 2 o.
ma, i. measure/ pr., 134 B 2 ; da.,
;

mft, 2. proh. poL, 128; 180;

3.

end.

aoo.

195. i *>
mfita-pitarau , m.
mother/ 186, 3

of aham, 109 a

du. 'father and

c.

matr, 1 'mother/ IOT ; 186, 3 c.

-matra^n. compounded w.pt.,ao5 1 d.
3

SANSKBIT INDEX
matra, f. 'measure,*
mo-dila, prn. like me/ 117.
-m&oa, part, si, 158 182, I

yao, 'ask,' w. two aoc., 198, 2.

*
yadrs, y adrsa, prn. what like/ 117.
yavat, pro. 'as much/ 118; adv.,
'just/ 212, 2; cj., 180 (p. 156);

'

b.

mSmaka,

n6a.

posa. prn. 'my,'

xnalini, f.
P- 3 34-

garlanded'), a metre,

870.
wink/ ao., 149 a,

'

mil,

in,

3.

'

without,' 179*
muktva, prp. 1 gd.
muo, 'loosen, pr., 133 C i; ao v 149,
2

(p. 154).

xnurdhan, m. head, 6 go.

a. cerebral/ 6*
xnurdhanya,
*
;

'

., 173$.
., 169,, i; int.,
die/ da.,

wipe/ pr.
mrta-bhartrka,

mjdu,

33

a. f.,

134 A

1 6.

189,7.

adj.* soft/ 98.

end. gen. dat. prn., 109 a ; 1 95,1 1.

5.
mna, study,' pr., 133
'
mla, fade/ pp., 160, i cs., 168, i.

me

'

Ya,

rel.

'

who,' 114

with ka, 119

o;

sec-

nominal

af,

p., 165; ordinal sf., 107.

yaj, 'sacrifice/ pf., I35>

4J Z 37
3 o; ps., I546; pf. pt-, I57J PP->
x6o, 2; IQ9IJ(P- 188 )'
'
2 ; w.
200
strive, w. dat.,
yat,

204 c.

loo.,

1 1 8.
-yat, sf. of quantity,
180 (p. 155)ya-tae, adv. 'whence/
1 18 a.
yati, prn. as many,'
180 (p. 155)ya-tra, adv. 'where,'
'
180 (p. 155)yartha, adv. as,'
'
yad, cj. thaV 18 (P- ^S)yadi,ci.'if/i8o(p. 155);

yam,

'restrain/ pr.,

139,

P*-

y5,

2 a.
cpv. sf., 103,
go/ 131, 6 ; ao., 146

197, i a.

w.

47

>

p. 105.

fashion/ ao, ps., 155

'
rata, pp. delighting in/ 204*ratua-bhata, pp. 'being *
I88,i<?; 184, N.
*
ratni-bhQta, pp. 'become
rac,

184..

ir.

'charioteer*

n.

a metre,

rathoddhata, f.
rabh, 'seize/ p.

a,

(Vedic),

p. 234.

5SJ

<**

''be glad,' ao., 144. *-

ram,

pi, 1 39* J '

188, a a.
rSjan, m. king/ 90, i;
i89.
raja-putra, m. ki^s owm,'
rawrsi,m. royal sage, 1:89,1.
raj,

shine,*

rfiftri,

2.

-ru, prL

'
yaviyaa, opv. younger, 103,2.
n.
83.
'fame/
ya&bB,

-ya,f

ra^den.^pUy^tag/i^
1*1

8-

I33^ a ;

R, as original final, 46, f.o.

50 ; stems in, 82.
-ra, pri. si, p. 163 ; sec. !,
'

-repeated, 119*?.
-ya, pa. af., 121 ; 154 i fp- t, 162, i;
i8a, i b ; gd. if., 164; int. af., 172;

den. sfv 175;

yuvan, m. youth/ 91, 4.

yuvam,
'ye two,' 109.
yusmad, pm. stem, 109.
'
y osmadiya, posa. prn. your/ 1 16.
you/ 109; 193, 3.
yuyam, prn.
'
yena, cj. that,' 180 Qp^ 156).
yojana, n. dittonca of 9 mfos, 197,
2; 203 j.

iu

'

maiden,* 95

137,

.
*

yuvatlj i

'

Ai a; p,

-yu, pri. sf., 182, 1 1.

*
yukta, pp. prepared/ w.loc., 204 c;
1
fitting,' w. int, 2ii <f.
yuj, 'join,' fp., 162, i c; pe. w. loc,,
204 c; w. inl y inc.

ps, ao., 155.

muh, be confused/ 69 Z>.

muhuh, adv. 'again, 180
my,
mrj

prp. adv., 1770.

yu, 'jorn/ pr., 134
i a.

-mi, pri. if., 182, i b.

mitra-varunau, m. du., 186, 3&.

-min, eteniB

255

sf.,

p. 1

ace.,

.3S5:
sst
I
w.
geaa.,
'

202,

.
.

SANSKRIT INDEX

'ft

.108,

^fc-'^/S

3
a

"i, *5^

&

fj
;

ds., 170, i

^.

Par* | p. loo.

OB.,

;#*:**
*

2io b

vartainana, pr.pt., 205,

*

'

i &.

varsjUi, f. pi, rains/ 193. a tf

<
varsistha, spv. oldest/ 103, td

rai,m.' wealth/ 102.

-La, see. auffix, p. ifa
laksml, f. proi^ritj ioo 4
lag, cling to/ w. loc.', 203 'e.

l^T?'

'

'

'"

Va

!'.

'

ft

A 2 a.

^w*,3;pp.2 c
'

J
J^' 37i

nom

no., 144,

ifio,

..

IO9a; I9 5'

^Sf^f.i ^
'

I;

<older >' 10 3, 2 5.

,a.'wear/pf., .^,

"

**,-Bcratcvpp., 160,3.

^/sy^; fe^

I?**' ^34

^
X'

tf^f

*"%'

*' jl6a >3J w-aat.,

^ooAT^'
1U.

'

cut/ pr,, 134 p

loka,m!V.pL
g. PL,
-Va, pri.

'

j (

Io8 ^

'
world
world, TA*
193,

vfi,^cL Cj.'or/j8o(p.i 5 6V
'
111 *"
elo uenfc '' 8 *
7
''
?

vficTf

a.
f
vaoaB-pa^m.'iord ofepeech/iS?
7*
vg
m> enoL pnLj
^

r
i.

*
.uffix, p.

163
a metre"' D I*A
P 34
'
.:
vac, apeak/ pf., i
j
35
ae
40
B
7
1 "" J 4 ' 6 ;
?
pf' ^Jo ;*
,
2
g '
;. twoaco.;
jfts 164;
iVi 2
vaficaya, 'cheat/ w. abt, 201 ft
"v
*^ x Beo 8 f-, p. 165; stems
in^ 86;
vajp^a^tha,

A
'^^
W

f-n. i.

^ 8 *' 3
\ d1
^*f
W ^^ gen "
"f?Y'

W^l-

f.

'

'

'

^ ^le/ w

pp., 160,

^;'?S
know

f>

3*

pL

?6*

20 4& ,

ampf., 131, 6

pf pt"'
*.

^JS-'d?'

'

''

loc '>

I 57

vidyate, exiBts/ w. gen.,

202, i a.
vidvat, pr. pf. pt. *
b.
knowing/

-Tin, sec.

S- ?^
teins
p,

90,.

'strew/

fem. of

p,

137,

f.

a',

89
165 ; sterna in, 87 a "
w
th u
;: !
yi77fc.

p.

a fonn of the ^loka metre

'

233-

PP

'

W ^^
*

Wld ps- 8ense

'separate/ w. abl., 201

vi-rSma, m. stop/ 9.
.< settler/
79.

&.

CB.,

SAKSKEIT INDEX
'

m.

vi-tasa,

difference,' at

cd.,

'

vi-im,

aU-^uering;

'trot,'

loo.,

^am,

gen., 202,6.

viiSva-jit, a,

w.

end of

1870; w.

187

6.

cease,' pi-i

-^13, diEkibutive adv.

metre, p, J35-

203

e..

m,

'confidence,' w, loo,,

a metre,

p. 234.

'p.',

304(2.

f.

a.

all-pervading,' 93
'bard breathing,' 4,
vwjarga. in.
f.n.i; 6,f.n. i; 15,8; 27; *9

viavanc, a.

gon/ 189 c.

48;49;& 2
3';

;P',49>

fl

send away,' w. two ace., 198,

dat., 200 Aib,

vi-srj,

w.

and pa, sense,

vi-smrta, pp., w. act.
____-,

!au,

vr,

'choose,' pf.

204

136 a;

w.

loc.,
,

.^^t

207,

n ^0H

Ti

vrddha/old.'cpv.ofjio^jb.

vowel graaastrongest
vrddhi,
101
3
'tion,'i7a;i95": 3;99>4;
;
'

f.

I44)

4J *45*J

a
'hcreaang,' 77

^-',
veda^a,

or gen.,
ca. 'tell,' w. dat.

198, 2 a,

4 a.

vai, expletive

pcL,i8o,p, 157-

m. pi
193. 3

MO, 'be weary;

eary/

c.

3J^I

---

*put;i84J.

vrt (vartate), w. loo., 203 cjw.pt.,

136! a.

rf.,

w. gen,, 202, ic;

ivsraM,

lolc.

SANSKRIT
'

sakta, pp. attached/ with gen.

Inc., 303, a&; 203*.

and

sakthl,n. 'thigh/99, 3.
'
akhi, m. friend/ 99, 2 ; 188, 3 c.
c
akhi, f. Mend,' 99, a,
*
adhere,' pr., 133
4 ; w. loc.,
safij,

203 e.
133 A I

ad, 'sink/ pr.,

1
sadrja, a. 'like,
2
c.
199,

fam-dhi, in.

'

cs., 168.
w. inst. or gen,,
;

5.

fam-nidhi,

m.

vicinity/

78.

accompanied by

hu

wife/ iSgj.
<
am, prp., before kr, make/ 134 E.
'
ama, a. equal/ w. inst. or gen.,
199, 2 c\ 302,*2 d. ,
sam-aksam, prp. aJv. 'before/ 177 rf.
*
samanta-tas, adv. around/ 177 a.
*
samam, prp. adv. with/ w. inat.,
177 7>J 199,2.
amaya, prp. adv. 'near/ w. ace.,

177
Bamartha,
w. inf.,

a.

'

able/ w.

loc.,

304 c ;

an.

amana,a. 'equal/ w. inst v 199, 2 c.

samlpa, n. 'vicinity/ 178.
'
Sam-pad, tend to/ w. dat., 200 B i.
Bam-prasftran&, reduction of the
syllables ya, va, ra, to i, u, r,
p.il,f.n. i; p. 32, f.n. I; p. 51,
f.n.i; 91, 3-4-5J 96> a.' Pr
13333,03; 134 a a; pf., 135,
-

4* I37
J
ps-i I54 6 J PP-i l6o
a. 3a; ds., 171, 2.
'
tam-bh5vayft, cs. expect, w. cren.
or loc., 202, i if; 303^.
*
samyaHc, a. right/ 93 a.
'
0amraj, m. lovereign/ 79.
(
aaura, prn. a. all/ 120 o.
arva-tas, prp. adv. 'around/ 177 a.
aah, 'bear/ pp., 696; inf.. 16*7,
'
saha, prp. adv.
with/ w. -inst.,
a c

1776; 199,
sahaoram, n.
F)

spnnkie,'

sic,

'

2 (p. 188).

thousand,* 106

'

99'

pr,,

133 C i

aoriet suffix, 142

par., p. 98.
BU-manaSj a. 'cheerful/

m.

su-hrd,

go/

'

friend/ 77

1510,

ft.,

stu, 'praise/ pf.,

5 ; ds., 169, i.

'strew/

4;

189

b.

pf.,

151^,1;

ft-,

i.

136^; 137,
137,

i;

i;

138,

ps., 154,

pp., 160, i
'

stri,

33 a.

144,4;

'create/ ao.,
d*. t 170, i.

srj,

rtr,

134

I36-

pf.,

'creep/

ao,, 147,

146.

'press out/ pr., 127,

su,'

inst.,

f.

woman, 100 a

'stand/

stha,

133

A 3J

pf.

^-

(p. 62).

896;

pt.,

144, 35

48;

pr.,

pp.,

160, 2; inf., 167; cs., lOStf; <!H.,

170, I ; w. loc., 203 c.
sthita, pp. -sat w. pt., 205, 1 1.
sthira, a, *finn/ cpv. of, 103, 2 a.
sn&, 'bathe/ cs., 168, irr. i.
snih, 'be oily/ pp., 69 a.
'
1
r
aprs*, touch/ ao., 144, 4 ; ft., 15 b, .
'
-spra, a.
touching/ 79 d.
'
2.
desire/ w. dat., 200
spr'b,

Bma, pel, used w. pr., 212, i a.

smr, 'remember/ ps., 154, 3 w. gen.,
;

202, 1 1.
-sya, future suffix, 151.

a garland'),
f.
(' wearing
a metre, p. 235.
sraj,
'garland/ 79 b.
sro^ 'flow/ pf., 136^.
snic, f. lndle, 79 a.
'
flva, refl. prn.
own/ 115 c ; 1 20 o.
svap, 'steep/ pr., 134
3 a ; pf.,
I37i '<?; ps,, 154,6; pp., 160, a;
srag-dharil,

'

<ls.j

171,

2.

avayam, prn.
avar,

'

self/

'heaven/ 46,

1150.
f.n. I.

'

falling accent/ p. 242.

svar-pati, m. 'lord of heaven/ 50 a.
f. 'sister/ 101 a.
,
Bvarita,

c.

aakam, prp. adv. 'with/ w. inst,

77

'

srp,

3.

1776; 199,2.

'

sa-patnl-ka, a.

morning/ 186,

'
Birdham, prp. adv. with/ w.

BT,

euphonic combination/

I44

aadhu, adv. 'well/ 181 (p. 158).

r
tayam-pratar, cd. adv. evening and

-sifl,

wvt, pr. part.' being/ 156 a 205, 1 a, I.

f
satyam, adv. truly/ 180 (p. 1^7).

i<>

INDEX

i, ij.

'hail/ i8r (p. 158),

SAN8KKIT INDEX

in, Si.

180

(p. 157).

hi, i.

89 1; 92; pr.,
136,3; 137, 2&;

hi, 2. cj.

A 3.

welcome,' w.

'

dat.,

svamin, m. 'master, 87 a.
<
av&mi-ya, den. treat as master/ 175.

H,

6, f.n. 3;

initial,

54

6; aspiration of
internal Sandhi of, 69

noun stems
lia, encl. pel.,

ban, 'kill/

29,

pf. pt.,

134A2C;

359
*

haste-gata, pp. held iu tlie hand/

p. 171, in. 4.
hasty-as'van, m. dn. Dvandva cd.
c
elephant and horse/ 186", i.
'
2La, I. depart/ pr., 134
'
2 a ; ps. 9
h5, 2. abandon/ pr., 134
201 b.
ha, 3. ij. 'alast' 181 (p. 159).

av-agatam, adv.

200

'

pf.,

per. ft., 152^; pr. pt.,

1563; pp., 160, a ; gd., 165^; OP.,
168, 5 j da., 171, 1.4.
hanta, ij. 'pray/ 181 (p. 159),
harini, f. a metre, p. 234.
'
83.
havis, n. offering/
1
'
hasta, in. hand, at end of {MM*, cde?.,

139, 4;

B
B

'

impel/

pf.,

139,4.

'for/ 180 (p. 157).

-hi,ipv. sf., 131,4.

'
lums, injure/ pr., 134 D.
'
hu, sacrifice/ pr., 127, 2 ; pt, 156
158 a; fp., 102, i fi ; par., p.
hfl,

'calT-hva,

int.,

172

a.

'

hrajiyas, opv. shorter, 103, 2.

hva (hve), 'call/ pf., 136, 4; per.
3; '"**
pa., 154
pf., 140, 3;

172 a.

189*.

GENERAL INDEX
the
abbreviations uccurriug in this Index have boon explained at
the Sanskrit Index.
of
I
and
of
beginning
Appendix
The
refer to paragraphs unless pages are specified.

The

figures

sense of past passive participle,

Abbreviation, sign of, 9.

Ablative, syntactical use

with prepositions, 176,

6, c;

of,

201;
177 a,

179, 2.

Absolute cases, 205; participles with

eva or -mati-a, 205, i tf
Accent, 15, 10; 104 d\ 107; 109 a\
112; 169; J75J 1 7<5, f.n.; App.
III,i5-i8; shift of, 72 a, 6; 860;

208

a,

f1 -

Adjectives, 86; 87; 88; 93; 0,50;

idenpronominal, 120; expressing
construed
tity, equality, likeness
with inst., 199, 2 c j with gen.,
202, 2fl

of

242-4; of the vocative, p. 243;

the finite verb, pp. 243-4.
Accordance with, expressed by the

instrumental, 199, i&.

Accusative, syntactical use of, 197 ;
double, 198 ; with infinitive, not
used in Sanskrit, an; with pred;
positions, 176, I ; 177 fl, 4, c,
179,1.
Action nouns, 182, i.
Active, voice (Parasmaipadft), 121 ;

construed with $be in-

Adverbial compounds, 186, 3 ; 188,

3 particles, 180.
Adverbs, 180; numeral, 108 tf-o ;
indefinite, 119 a; prepositional,
177 ; constructed with gen., 202, 4*
Agent, expressed by instr., 199;
noum, 101 ; 152 ; 182, i.
108 .
Aggregative numeral nouns,
Aiyn of an action, expressed by dat.,
200 B i, 2 ; by loc., 2O4i an.
of the, 4 ;
Alphabet, arrangement
the Vedic,
6; table facing p. I ;
;

.,

finitive, 211.

p. 236.

260

GENERAL INDEX

i, p. 55, 1 n.
5 ; of stems in -an, p. 56, N. 2 j
of stems in -u, p. 57, f. n. 2 ; of

Analogy of feminines in

stems inr,p. 58, f.n. i.

141-9 ; fla- ao., 141 a s- ao.,
143; 144; is- ao., 145; sis-ao.,
146; second ao.: form with thematic -a, 147 ; root ao., 148 ; reduplicated ao., 149; passive ao.,
155 ; syntactical use of, 213 c.
Apodoris in conditional sentences,
216 d; 218.
Aorist,

Apposition in descriptive compounds

188, i.
Article, 192; 1955.
Articulation, place or organ oF, 29.
Aspiration, 20, 6; 30, 2 ; initial,

4* (4), 53$, 55 (n) loss of, 62 ;

compensationforlossof,^; 620,6.
Assimilation, 16 ; p. 67, f. n. i; of
;

fc*lti34; 37; 38; 39,' of final n,

30, 2-4; 37; 40; of final 00,42 B.

Attraction in gender,
194,

number, 194,40.
Augment, 128; Sandhi

of,

in

30;

230; 128;

Avesta, 131, 6; 134, 2&; 137,3 a ,

f.

n.

Bahuvrfhi compounds tised

participially, 206 a ; with infinitive as
first member, ai I 6.
Benedictive

(Precative), 150; 217.

Cardinal points, 201 c.

Cardinal!, 104; declension

106; syntax

of,

of,

105

strong, 73,- eyn-

tacfecalueeofthe, 196-204.
its suffix
;
dropped,
;
160,3; i62,3a;
*, 1*3*', 164 a

Causative, 168

I-

in -tara, 103,
201, 2 a.

181,

103, 2

201,

i.

abl. after,

Comparison, degrees of, 103; in

180 e.
compounds, 188, i &
Compounded verb, 164, 165 (gd.);
;

184.

Compounds,
nominal,

184-9;
185

verbal, 184;
co-ordinative

(Dvandva), 186; dependent (Tatpurusa) determinatives, 187 ; descriptive (Earmadharaya) determinatives, 1 88; powessives (Bahuvrili), 189 : ending in -in and
-ka, 189 /.
Concomitance, expressed by inst,,

199.

Concord, 194.
Conditional,
use, 218.

153;

its

syntactical

:
two kinds of,
131; first:
125; 133;
126; 127; 134; paraof
the
digms
present system, 132.
ConjugationaLclasses, ten, 134-7.
Conjunctive particles, 180.
Connecting vowel -a, 147 ; 149 ; -i,
136 a; 1520; 157; 160,3;
;

109.

Consonant stems, 75-96.

Consonants, 6-13 changes of, 32 :
37i classification of, 20; ao;
of 51 (oh) ; 52
Doubling
)
fc^'7; a8; 31; 33; 33. 7 g.
loss of final,
28; 61 ; conjunct \
ii ; la ; list of
compound, 13 ;
quality of, 30 ; changes in quality
of, 32; Vedic Sandhi of,
pp. 236-7.
;

>,

4.

of dentals,

193,

Comparative, in -lyas, 88

1060.

of the, 198,

Collective, compounds, 186, i; 188,

2 a ; words
expressing plural sense,

second:

compounds, 187

TOC; 176;

lh, p. 236.

Changeable consonant stems, 84-96:

in -at, 85 ; in -mat, -vat, 86 ; in
-in, 87; in -lyas, 88; in -vas, 89 ;
in -an (-man, -van), 90, 92, 96 ;
in -ac, 93 ; feminine of, 95.
Cognate accusative, 197, 4.

Conjugation, 121-75

3ase-6ndings,normal, 71; sometimes

retained in
a.
Cases,

ternal Sandhi of, 64 ; 65 ; 67 ;

nominal stems in, So; Vedic 1 gnd

GENERAL INDEX

Contracted forms, 133

i; p. in,
fin. i; 137, a a; 14704; 170,2;
171* 3Countries,

names

of,

Fitness for, expressed by loc., 2040.

Frequentative, see Intensive.
Future, simple, 151; 214 (in syntax); periphrastic, 152; 214 (in
syntax;; used imperatively, 2140.

193, 30.

Dative case, syntax of, aoo

202,
I e ; with causatives, 198, 4 a.
of
nouns,
Declension, 70-120 ;
74102 ; of numerals, 104-8 ; of pronouns, 109-20; Vedio, pp. 237-8.
Demons trati ve pronoun agrees in
gender with predicate, 194, 3 c.
Denominative, 175.
Dentals, 15, 6. 7
34-41 ; palatalized, 38
40 ; 63 c; cerebralized,
39 ; 41 ; 64 ; nominal stems in, 77.
Derivative verbs, 168-75.
Desiderative, 169; 170; 171; adjectives, 197,3.
Diphthongs, 5, 3. 4 ; 6.

261

Dissimilation, 96, 2

66

I a.

Distance expressed by ace., 197, a ;

by loc,, 203 j,
Distributive adverbs, 108 c; relative,
1190.
Doubling, of ch, 51 ; of n or n, 52.

Drama, 153.
Dravidian dialects, 2.
Dual, its syntactical use, 193,

Dvandva compounds,
;

186

con-

elliptical, 186, 3

c.

Elision of initial a, 9 ; 2 1 a ;
Enclitic words, 1 09 a; 112 a; p. 243.
Endings, in declension, 70; conjucational, 131 (table); of the perfect, 136 ; Vedic, pp. 237, 239.
Epics, 26 ; 153; 180 (uta).
45, 2 &.

External Sandbi, 17-55.

Feminine, formation of,

83 ,-830? 95S9 8 e99'
101

73, f.n. i;
1-

'

10;

105, 3. 4 ; 107 ,
1 17 a; 118; special terminations
of (in I and u stems), 100, 2 p. 60,
f.n.i; loo a; suffixes, 1830.
Final consonants allowable, 27; 28;
61 ; how treated in unchangeable
t

103,

terns, 76.

in, 194, 3 cGenitive, absolute, 205, 2; with prepositions, 176, a a; 177 <J; 178;
syntax of, 202 ; with causatives,

198, 4<i; double, 202, 6.

Gerund, 163-6 ; ita syntactical use,

210; Vedic, p. 241.
Gerunds equivalent to prepositions,
179; aio c.
Goal of an action, expressed by the
ace., 197, i by the dat., 200 Ai 6 ;
;

by the

204.
Gutturals, reversion
2
c; 160, i
134
loc.,

to,
ft;

81

92

171,4-

Hard sounds, 6,tn. 5 ; 31, i ; 3* 33Hiatus, 16; 21 b; 22 ; 45; 4*J 49*

Historical present, 212, i ; 213.
Hypothetical clauses, 216 d; 218.
2. sing.,

Imperative

formation c

syntactical use of, 215.

21 3 1.
Imperfect, syntactical use of,
I o;
Impersonal construction, 205,

131,

Vedic, p. 237.
tracted, 189 e

Gender, 70 a; 186, i; rules of; 183;

in syntax, 194; natural instead of
grammatical, 194, 3 b ; attraction

2080; 209 fc; 2io<; 2150.

the
of,' expressed by

'In respect

inst., 199, i/.

Indeclinable, words, 176-81
163-6 ; 210.

parti-

ciple,

Indefinite pronouns, 119.

Indirect object, expressed

by

dat.,

aoa, ic; by loo., 204^

its syntactical
Infinitive, 123; 167;
UK, 21 1 ; no passive of, 211 0;

200

A;

Vedie, p. 241.
Inscriptions, 2.
Insertion, of vowels: a,

i, I,

134

A3

2 b (imp.) ;
stem); I, 134
f
1 73 a;
173*;
x
consonants : k, 35 (in Sandhi) ; t,
(pr.

^frJ^J

36

A6

y.pl. n.);

2 (in
Sandhi); n, 66
105,4; io6a(ma.pL);

(in

GENERAL INDEX

262

168, 3 (.); 174 & k intO; n r

na, 1 37 3 (?* stem); p, i68

155
(pr. Btem)
B, 150 (prec.)
Sandhi)
(ca.); y,

151 1 2 (ft.)

Nasals, 29, 3

Need

(ao. ps.); r, 134 Ai

S, a, s, 36 B i (in

168,

4 (.).

syntactical use

1776;

of.

199; 302, I/; Vedic, p. 237,

Intensive, 127, 2 a; 172-4.
Interjections, 181.
Irregularities, of vowel Sandhi, 23 ;
of consonant Sandhi, 48 ; 49 ; in

declension, 91

final, 35.

inst.,

199,

Numeral, adverbs, 108; compounds,

(an stems)
92
99 (i and u stems); in conjugation: 133, 134 (pr. stem); 139
(pf.) ; 144 (s- ao.) ; 147*3 (second
ao.); 149 a (red. ao.); 151 1 (ft.);
i68(cs.); 17
;

expressed by

of adjectives in i and
;
loitf; suffixes, 183 &;
11, 98 a ;
its syntactical use, 194, 3 <(.
Nominal stem formatiou, 182.
Nominative, syntactical use of, 196 ;
with iti sometimes = ace ., 194, i ;
ig6 fc.
Nouns, declension of, 74-102.
Number, 706; 121 a; 193 (in syntax).

Instrumental, with prepositional adverbs,

of,'

Neuter, 73 1

nasal,

'

I ff-

88, 2 a.

Numerals, 104-8 ; 202, 5

Numerical fig-urea, 1 4.
Objective genitive, 202.
(Potential) in
Optative

a.

syntax,

216.
Labials, stems in, 78.
Locative, with prepositions, 1 76, i a ;
absolute, 190 ; 205 ; syntactical
use of, 203 ; "Vedic, p. 237.
Loss of sounds : of initial a, 2 1 a ;
2 b ; of medial a
45 3 & i 134
(see Syncope) ; of medial u, 1 34 C

134 E;

of-final n, 90 ; 94, 2
(nom.); of radical nasal, 139, 6 (pf.)l
i

133

A 4 (pr.)

168,

(cs.)

160,

of n in 3. pi,
105 a (gd.)
ending, 131, 5 ; 156 (pr.) ; of Visarga, 45 ; 48
49 (in Sandhi)
of B (nom.), 100,4 (i-stems).
(pp.)

Order of wonlp, 191.

Ordinals, 107.
Organ of articulation, 29; 31; 37.

Pada or middle case-endiugH, 16 a

73 75 76.
;

Palatals, origin of, 6, f.n. J ; 15, 4nominal stems in, 79 ; repre7

sent gutturals in reduplication,
-,

129, 3Pfdi language,

2.

122; 156-62; senses

used with gen.
inherent in, 206
absolute, 205, 2 ; with loc. abso156 ; 158
lute, 205, 1 1 \ pr., 85
207 (in syntax) ; ft., 85 156
158; ptfSp; }57" '59;
160 ; 208 ; 213 ; 213 c (syntax)
ft. ps., 162
with gen., 203, 3 a

Participles,

Manner, expressed by inst., 199,

Masculine

2 a.

suffixes, 183.

Metathesis, 103, 2 (cpv.) ; 144,4 fa

ao.); 151 &, i (ft.); 167 (inf.).
Metre in classical Sanskrit, pp. 232-5.
;
Middle, case-endings, 16
76;

73 (declension); voice,
verbal endings, p. 89.
;
122
;
Moods,
215-18 (syntax); Vedic, p. 240.
Morae, metres measured by, p. 235.
Motive, expressed by ablative, 201, i.
108 a ;
adverbs,
Multiplicative,
tern, 72,

121

words with

*bl., 201,
gen., 202, 5 a.

20; with

202,3?; meaning and construction

of, 209; fern, of pr. and ft., 95 a,7>
;

attraction in gender to predicate,

194, 3 c ; Vedic, p. 241.
Partitive genitive, 202.
Passive, xai; 154 (paradigm) ; ao.,
155; construction, 190; 196; 198,
4 b; 199,26; 210.
Paxt, participles used as finite verb*,

208; tense*, 213.

135-9; endings

Perfect,

of,

136

GENERAL INDEX
paradigms of, 138; irregularities
of| 139 ; syntactical use of, 213.
Periphrastic forme : perfect, 140;
future, 152 ; in syntax, 214; nonexistent in the Rdg-veda, p. 240,

9&.
Pluperfect, not need in
213 e\ Vedic,p. 239.

Sanskrit,

its syntactical me, 193,

3 a-c words used only in, 193,
3 d ; used for singular, 195, i c

.Plural,

Vedic, p. 238.
Positive for comparative, 199
abl., 20 i t 2 a.

with

Possessive genitive, 202.

Postpositions, 176.

Potential (Optative), 216; in conditional sentences, 216, id] 218.

Prakrit dialects, 2.
Precative (Benedictive), 150; 217.
Predicative nom., 19-6 a; part.,
'

Prefixes, verbal,

184 a; Vedic, pp.

239, 244.
Prepositional adverbs, 177; norms,
178; gerunds, 179.
Prepositions, 176; Vedic, p. 242.
Present, system, 123-34; tense, 213
(syntax); participle in synfcix, 207.

by inst., 199, r c.
Primary endings, 131 ; suffixes, 182,

Price, expressed
i

182, ib.

Pronominal declension, 109-20; its

influence on nominal forms, p. 55?
f.n.

2.

120.

;
personal, 109 ;
(syntax); demonstrative,
110-12; 195, 2 (syntax); interrerogative, 1 1 3 ; relative, 114;
116: 195,
flexive, 115; possessive,
of
3 (syntax); compound, 117;
quantity in -yat, -vat, Ac., 118;

Pronouns, 109-20
195,

Tleason, expressed by Inat., 199, I a ;

by abl., 201, i.
Reduplication, general rules of, 129;
special rules of, 130 (pr.); 135,

1-4

149

(pf.);

(>0; *7(<k

indefinite,

119;

195

(y****)

Vedic forms of personal, p. 237.

Pronunciation, 15.
1
f>
93 .
Proper names, 1 88, I a ; 1 89
;

3<3.

Protasis, 216, 2<7;

2I&

Sandhi, nature of, 16 ; 1. external

of vowels, 18; 19; 20; of diphthongs, 21 ; 22; irregular, 23;
absence of, 24-6 ; of consonants,
n
27-55 : of final k, t, t, p before
:

or m, 33 ; of final t before 1, 34 ;
before palatals, 38 ; before cereof
brals, 39 ; of final nasals, 35 ;
final dental n, 36 ; 40 ; 41 ; of

m, 42 ; of final Visarga, 43
44; 49; of the final syllable ah,
45, 2 ; 46 ; 48 ; of the final syllable
afc,45,i; 46? offinalr,46; 47;
50 3. internal : 56 ; of vowele,
57? 58; of r, 58; 154,3; off,
;

of
58; 154, 4; of diphthongs, 59;
consonants, 60 ; of palatals before
consonants, 63 ; of dentals after
cerebrals, 64 ; of dental s, 67 ; of
in before y, r, I, v, 68; of h before
s, t, th, dh, 69; Vedic, pp. 236-7.
Sanskrit and Vedic, I.
Secondary endings, 131 ; suffixes,

182,

2.

Semivowels,

ao ; 29,

4.

Sibilants, 29, 5.
Soft sounds, 6, f.n. 5 ; 30, i.
extension of: expressed

Space,

by

ace., 197, 2.

Spirants, 29, o.
Stem formation, nominal, 182.

Stems, classification of nominal, 74 ;

endingin consonants, 74-56; noune
with two, 85-8 ; nouns with three,
89-93; ending in vowels, 97-102.
Strong stem in declension, 72 73
in conjugation, 124; 126 (pr.);
134 (PO *
;

Punctuation, 9.
dat 200.
Purpose, expressed by

);

with
173 a
(int.); with nasal inserted, 1740,
1}
Vedic, p. 239.
(int.)
Rhythm in red, ao., 149, 2 ; 149 a, T .
Root as nominal stein, 182, i a.

173 (int.); with an-, 1 39, 6;

final radical nasal repeated,

final

o.

207

263

GENERAL INDEX

264

Verb, concord of the, 194,

Vedic accent of, p. 243.

Subjective genitive, 202.

Subjunctive, surviving forms of,
132 a; 215 a; its meaning ex-

by the

pressed

optative,

Verbs

216;

201

Suffixes, primary, 182, 1

182, 2

(abl*)

geru, 302,

Superlative suffix in -tama, 103, ij

Vernaculars,

in-istha, 103, 2.

Vocative,

Syncope, 90 (-an sterna)

(pr,);

134

134 A 4 (radical);

A2

Vowel

characteristics of

in a,

a; of fearing,

100

Sanskrit, 190.

modern Indian,

122; 212-14; past,

97-102: stems
97; ini,u, 98; in i,u,

declension,
a,

in r, 101

alescence

213;

in ai, o, au, 102.

Than/ expressed by

Time, gen,
duration

which,

abl., 201, 2 a,

202, 5; loc/of, 203 i\

of,

197, 2 (ace.)
i

(I

17; co-

n t ), 85 a
(i, u), 83 (nom, pi
(mahat), 86 (-mat, -vat stems),

of,

199,

of,

18; 19; lengthened,

of,

82

Vedic, p. 239,
Terminations, see Endings.
1

2.

72 a; 76 a; 94,3;

710;

Vowels, 5; classification
Tenses,

governing

i,

986; Vedic, p.237; accent of,p.243.

Voice of the verb, 121.

137,2!)

(ft); I7ii3(<k); Vedic, p. 237,

Syntax, 190*218

of separating, 201 6

b (inst.)
(abl.), 199, 2

secondary,

16 a.

4;

of going (with abstract sub-

stantives), 197,

Vedic, p. 240.

2.

(nom. masc.), 154, 2

within

(inst,)

87 (-in stems), 92 (han), 94,

after

which, 201 d (abl.).

Transitive sense of some
perfect
passive participles, 208 J*

(i,

in ps,),

155 (ps. ao.), 160, 2 c (p*. pt.),

162, ic

(ft.

pt. ps,), 169,

(<k),

I7i,i(ds.),i73(int.),i75(dfin,),
184, N,

(I

1761; 20;

for

a, 5, i)

liquid,

shortened, 94, 3 (v.);

129, 6(red.syll.); 131, f.n. I (pr.

Unaccented pronouns, 109 a ; 112 a

1956; Vedic forpra, p. 243.

Unaugmented forms, Vedic,

p. 239.

stem); 182, ia(ti); 1876 (a);

stems ending in, 97-102 ; Vedic

Sandhi

of, p.

236.

Unchangeable consonant stems, 75-

Way

83.
'

Use of,' expressed by Snst,, 199,

g.

'by* which, expressed by the

inst., 199, i e.

Weak
grammar,

stem, in declension, 72; 84;

in conjugation,
2;
;
137

pp. 236-44.
Vehicle 'on* which, expressed by

(pp.) in compounds, 185 a.

Writing, origin of Indian, 3; of

Vedio, i; outlines of

inst,,

199,16.

its

134

160,

(pf.)

vowels,5; of consonfints 8;
s

u;

12.